'IrlliI1E Wl\flIWlE R~Il'lrlY'" ([])IF 'lr1E~£.~ JP>W lLllN NUMBER 6611 JUNE 1, 1966 Constitution and Contest Rules OF THE University Interscholastic League for 1966-1967 BUREAU OF PUBLIC SCHOOL SERVICE DIVISION OF EXTENSION THE UNIVERSITY OF TEXAS : AUSTIN Publications of The University of Tex~s COMMITTEE ON PUBLICATIONS P. T. FLAWN c. H. EADS L. F. ANDERSON . J. R. STOCKTON D.T.LAY FRANK H. wARDLAw The University publishes bulletins twice a month, so numbered that the first two digits of the number show the year of the issue and the last two the position in the yearly series. (For example, No. 6501 is the first publication of the year 1965.) These bulletins comprise the official publications of the University, publications on humanistic and scientific subjects, the bulletins issued from time to time by various divisions of the University. The follow­ing bureaus and divisions distribute publications issued by them; communi· cation concerning publications in these fields should be addressed to The University of Texas, Austin, Texas, care of the Bureau of Economic Geology, Bureau of Engineering Research, Bureau of Public School Service, and Di­vision of Extension. Communications concerning all other publications of the University should be addressed to University Publications, The Univer­sity of Texas, Austin, 78712. • Additional copies of this publication may be procured from the Bureau of Public School Service, The University of Texas Box 8028, University Station Austin, Texas 78712 • 60 cents per Copy Constitution and Contest Rt1les OF THE University Interscholastic League for 1966-1967 BUREAU OF PUBLIC SCHOOL SERVICE DIVISION OF EXTENSION THE UNIVERSITY OF TEXAS : AUSTIN The benefits of education and of useful knowledge, generally diffused through a community, are essen­ tial to the preservation of a free government. SAM HOUSTON Cultivated mind is the guardian genius of Democ­racy, and while guided and controlled by virtue, the noblest attribute of man. It is the only dictator that freemen acknowledge, and is the only security which freemen desire. MIRABEAU B. LAMAR THE UNIVERSITY OF TEXAS PUBLICATION NUMBER661 I JUNE I, 1966 PUBLISHED TWICE A MONTH BY THE UNIVERSITY OF TEXAS, UNIVERSITY STATION, AUSTIN, TEXAS, 787 I 2, SECOND-CLASS POSTAGE PAID AT AUSTIN, TEXAS. CALENDAR . INTRODUCTION CHANGES EFFECTIVE 1966-1967 CONSTITUTION Fees . Officers . Contests . Definitions Eligibility . . . Expenses and Rebates Disputes . Penalties . . . Annual Meetings . Award Rule . SPRING MEET PLAN . . . . . . All Round Championship, Point Schedule RULES FOR SPEECH CONTESTS: Debate . . . . Informative Speaking . Persuasive Speaking . Poetry Interpretation . Prose Reading Oral Reading . RULES FOR OTHER LITERARY CONTESTS: Journalism . Number Sense One-Act Play . Picture Memory Ready Writing Science Shorthand Slide Rule . . Spelling and Plain Writing . Story Telling . Typewriting . RULES FOR MUSIC COMPETITION: General Regulations Solos . Ensembles Organizations Special Contests RULES IN ATHLETIC CONTESTS: Athletic Benefit Plan . Football . . Boys' Basketball . Girls' Basketball . Tennis Volleyball . . . . . Junior Boys' Track and Field . Playground Baseball . . . High School Track and Field . Baseball . Golf . APPENDICES I. Awards in Final Contests . II. Schedule-Making . . III. Price List of Bulletins IV. Scholarships . . . . V. Results-1966 State Meet . PACE 4 6 9 12 12 14 15 19 27 28 28 29 30 31 34 39 44 47 50 53 56 59 65 68 73 76 79 87 92 101 105 106 112 121 124 127 131 133 134 147 157 165 167 175 175 176 180 186 188 189 192 195 199 Interscholastic League ·Calendar 1966-1967 Aug. IO-First day to issue football shoes and socks, Conferences AAA, AA, A, B, six and eight-man. (No conditioning drills or organized instruction permitted.) Aug. IS--First day for fall football practices, Conferences AAA, AA and A. Aug. IS--First day for fall football conditioning, Conferences B, six-and eight-man. (No contact equipment or contact activities permitted.) Aug. I7-First day for issuing football shoes and socks in Conference AAAA. (No conditioning drills or organized instruction permitted.) Aug. 22-First day for issuing contact equipment and conducting contact activities in Conferences B, six-and eight-man. Aug. 22-First day for football conditioning, Conference AAAA. (No contact equipment or contact activities permitted.) Aug. 22-First day for football interschool scrimmages, Conferences AAA, AA, A, B, six. and eight-man. Aug. 26--First day for issuing contact equipment and having contact activities, Con­ference AAAA. Sept. I-Last day for accepting Football Plan. Sept. I-Last day for filing Music Acceptance Cards. Sept. I-Constitution and Contest Rules available. Sept. I-Fees accepted for I966-I967 school year. Sept. 9-First day for playing football games, all conferences. Sept. I 7-Last day for meeting of football district executive committees. Oct. I-First day for boys' and girls' basketball practice, Conference B. Oct. '1-Last day for organizing basketball districts. Oct. IS--Last day for accepting Boys' and Girls' Basketball Plans. Oct. I5-First day for girls' basketball practice, Conferences A, AA and AAA. Oct. IS--First day for interschool boys' and girls' basketball scrimmages or games, Conference B. Oct. IS--First day for boys' basketball practice, Conferences AAAA and AAA. Oct. 29-First day for organizing spring meet districts, all conferences. (Boys' basket­ball chairman is spring meet organizing chairman.) Nov. I-First day for boys' basketball practice, Conferences A and AA. Nov. I-First day for interschool girls' basketball scrimmages or games, Conferences A, AA and AAA. Nov. 6-7-Legislative Council meets in Austin. Nov. I2-Last day to certify district football champions, Conferences AA and A. Nov. IS--First day for interschool boys' basketball scrimmages or games, Conferences AAAA, AAA, AA and A. Nov. IS--Last day for filing girls' volleyball acceptance cards. Nov. IS--First day for Regional Marching Band Contests. Nov. I9-Last day to certify district football champions, Conferences AAAA, AAA, B, six-and eight-man. Dec. I-Last day for postmarking one-act play enrollment cards. Dec. I-Last day for enrolling in Interscholastic League Press Conference. Dec. I-Last day for postmarking journalism acceptance cards. Dec. I-Last day for paying Interscholastic League membership fees. Dec. I5-First day for girls' volleyball practice, all conferences. Dec. I 7-Last day for holding Regional Marching Contests. Feb. I-Deadline for submitting issues of school newspapers for ILPC criticism. Feb. I-Last day for newspapers to be rated by ILPC. Feb. I-First day for interschool scrimmages or games, girls' volleyball, all conferences. Feb. 2-Last day for organizing spring meet districts. Feb. I3-Last day for requesting additions to basic set and for submitting plays NOT on Approved List for consideration as entries in One-Act Play contest. Feb. IS-Last day for accepting Baseball Plan. Feb. IS-Last day for certifying boys' district basketball champions, all conferences. Feb. IS-Earliest day for holding Regional Solo and Ensemble contests. Feb. 20-First day for boys' regional basketball playoffs, all conferences. Feb. 25-Last day for certifying girls' district basketball champions, all conferences. Feb. 25-Last day for boys' regional basketball playoffs, all conferences. Feb. 27-First day for girls' regional basketball playoffs, all conferences. Mar. I-Last day for organizing baseball district5, all conferences. Mar. I-Last day for receipt of ILPC Individual Achievement Awards entries. Mar. 2, 3, 4-Boys' State Basketball Tournament. March 3-Last day for filing one-act play titles with State Office. March 4-Last day for girls' regional basketball playoffs, all conferences. March 9, 10, 11-Girls' State Basketball Tournament. March 11-Last day for holding Regional Solo and Ensemble contests. Mar. I7, IB-ILPC State Convention. March 25-First weekend for holding district spring meets. March 24. 25, 26-Easter Vacation. April I-Last weekend for district one-act play contests for districts which progress to area meets. April 7-Regional Music Contest for Regions I, XII, and VII. April 8-Last day for certifying girls' volleyball district champions, all conferences. April IS-Last day for playing off girls' volleyball regional championship, all confer· ences. April 15-Last weekend for holding district spring meets. April 15-Regional Music Contest for Regions II, IX and XIII. April 17-Last day for filing entries in Regional Meets. April 22....:...Regional Music Contest for Regions XI, XIV and XV. April21..:.22-Regional Meets. April 28-29-Girls' volleyball state championship, all conferences. April 29-Regional Music Contest for Regions VIII, IV and V. May 4, 5, 6-State Meet. May 6-Regional Music Contest for Regions III, VI and X. May 13-Last day to submit Regional Music Contest schedule for 1967-1968. May 20-Last day to certify district baseball champions, all conferences. May 27-Last day to determine bidistrict baseball champions, Conferences AAAA and AAA. June 3-Last day to determine regional baseball champions, Conferences AAAA and AAA. June 5, 6-State Final Music Solo contests. June 6, 7-State Baseball Tournament, Conferences AAAA and AAA. June 7-Last day to determine regional baseball champions, Conferences AA and A. June 7-Last day to determine bidistrict baseball champions, Conference B. June 17-Annual meeting, Music Rules Advisory Committee, Austin. Introduction What is now known as The University Interscholastic League was first organized in December, 1910, at the State Teachers' Meeting at Abilene. Each year since then it has been organized by a bureau of the Extension Division of The University of Texas. For the first year the League's activities were confined to debates among the high schools affiliated with the Univer· sity. The following year contests in declamation were added and member­ship in the League was thrown open to all the public white schools of the State below college rank. Subsequently there were also added contests in various fields, suited to schools of different types, until the present schedule of contests was evolved. The League is an "annual" rather than a "perennial," to use the words of botany. It is in the form of a service offered annually by the Bureau of Pub­lic School Service, and has a shifting membership from year to year. The membership increased for 29 years, growing from 28 schools in 1910 to more than 6,000 during the peak years prior to World War II. During the 1965--66 school year 2,661 schools registered for participation in League contests. This League covers a larger geographical area, serves more different types of public schools, schedules a greater variety of contests, holds larger meets and a larger number of meets, and enjoys a greater school member­ship than any similar organization in the United States. Its purpose is to organize and direct, through the medium of properly supervised and con­trolled contests, desirable school activities, and thereby assist in preparing pupils for citizenship. Competitions organized in a sensible way and surrounded with proper controls, have demonstrated their usefulness so often and have furnished so much inspiration to talented pupils in Texas for so many years, that we feel that the League organization should have the active cooperation of every school executive and of every school teacher in Texas. Every public school in Texas, no matter how small, should become an active member if it is at all accessible to interschool competition. Special attention is called to the following matters: 1. The rules published herein and citations to special circulars as well as notices in the "Official Notices" column of the Leaguer, are considered notice to all League members. Ignorance of the rules cannot be plead in extenua­tion of any violation of the same. Immediately after the closing date for payment of fees each year, there are usually a number of disappointed schools which have failed to make re­mittance within the time prescribed. They usually pkad lack of notice. How­ever, notice of the closing date has been published now for many years, and no exceptions are made. It is best to see that membership is paUl at the first of the school year, and if, after a reasonable time, you do not receive a mem­bership receipt, address an inquiry to the State Office about it. Also be careful to observe other dates listed in the League Calendar on the page fol­lowing the Tabk of Contents of this bulletin. 2. When a school joins the League it is understood that the terms and conditions of participation in the contests as set forth in this Constitution and Contest Rules are to be accepted and observed. It is understood that when disputes arise, they shall be settled by the committees and in the man­ner prescribed herein. It is realized that this is a voluntary organization and all conditions surrounding participation as laid down herein are freely ac­cepted and that both the letter and spirit of the rules are to be observed with genuine cooperation and goodwill. 3. It will be noted that the forepart of this bulletin, pp. 11 to 30, contains the Constitution and interpretations. Therein are to be found all the general rules governing participation, schedule of fees, disposition of fees, defi­nitions, eligibility rules, organization of the various meets, methods of set­tling disputes, and so on. The executive officers of the school should be thoroughly familiar with this portion of the bulletin. Rules governing special contests begin on page 39. These special rules should be studied with great attention by the directors of the respective events. For illustration, the dramatics director should study the one-act play contest rules, the basketball coach the basketball rules, and so on. Each sponsor should be an authority on the rules of the contest which he undertakes; if some of the rules are not understood, the State Office should be contacted for interpretation. 4. This bulletin is issued in time for distribution to schools by the opening of the school session in September. It is the best notice that we can offer of changes in rules, and the only notice that we can give of the contests that are offered by the League. Attempts on the part of any executive committee to change the contests or rules nearly always result in serious dissatisfaction. 5. The "official interpretations" have been transferred from the appendix to the article and section of the Constitution and Contest Rules to which they apply. Each "interpretation" has been placed in italics under the rule in order to distinguish carefully between the original rule and the "official interpretations" of the State Executive Committee. Under the various "Plans" of competition, the italicized sentences and paragraphs are provided for emphasis and do not represent interpretations by the State Executive Committee unless it is specifically so indicated. 6. It is a mistake to suppose that the League program offers an activity for every pupil in the school. No extracurricular activity does that. If a con­siderable group of pupils and sponsors are interested arid put in honest work on an extracurricular activity that has sound educational substance in it, it is justified from an administrative point of view. With such a wide program as the League offers, however, a large percentage of pupils, especially those in the smaller schools, find something offered which they can do well or learn to do well, and hence en joy doing under the conditions of friendly rivalry which the Interscholastic League provides. R. J. KIDD, Director Bureau of Public School Service Division of Extension. University Interscholastic League Directory R. J. Kidd, Director and Director of Speech Activities, University Inter­scholastic League Dr. Rhea H. Williams, Associate Director and Director of Athletic Activities Dr. Nelson G. Patrick, Director of Music Activities Dr. Max R. Haddick, Director of Journalism Activities Lynn Murray, Director of Drama Activities. Important Changes, Effective 1966-1967 General: Rebate at State Meet has been discontinued. Article IV, Sec. 5-Superintendent applies for membership. Eligibility: Article VIII, Sec. 14---Special exemptions for students residing in school districts where "Freedom of Choice" prevails. Speech: Declamation is now known as "Oral Reading." Music: Twirlers, both in solo and ensemble competition, are limited to two com­petitive meets, outside League contests, during the school year. Athletics Sunday Games, Practice or Instruction: No League member school shall play any football, boys' or girls' basket· ball, baseball, or volleyball games or any track and field events on Sunday. Nor shall any League member school conduct any formal prac­tice, or teach any plays, formations, or skills in these sports on Sunday. Football Plan, Rule 30: Football practice or training is interpreted to mean any organized instruc­tion in football plays, formations or skills. Football equipment is inter­preted to mean the issuing of football, football shoulder pads, shoes and headgear, football trousers, or any other equipment used primarily in football. Accelerated physical education activities, calisthenics, or con­ditioning exercises may be conducted during the school term in the school day, provided it does not exceed one period a day, This period is not to exceed sixty minutes. Classes before and after school hours or during noon hours are prohibited. The specific grouping of high school athletes, such as football players, during the summer months for the pur­pose of conditioning and/or organized football instruction is prohibited. Track and Field Plan: 330-yard intermediate hurdles will replace the 180-yard low hurdles in the League list of track and field events. Junior Track and Field: Junior High School events now include 880-yard run. Volleyball Plan: Girls volleyball will play to a State Championship. Constitution of The University Interscholastic League ARTICLE I Name This organization shall be known as The University Interscholastic League. It is organized annually under the auspices of the Bureau of Public School Service, Division of Extension, The University of Texas. ARTICLE II Object The object of this League is to foster among the public schools of Texas interschool competitions as an aid in the preparation for citizenship. ARTICLE III Membership SECTION 1. Any public school in Texas below collegiate rank that is under the jurisdiction of and receives apportionment from the Texas Education Agency is eligible for membership. Exception: schools for defectives and correctives. Application for membership in the League shall be authorized and signed by the superintendent of the school unit or units making application. School membership is based on a school unit, or units contained in a single building. There is no membership covering more than one school building. In certain cases, how· ever (see Article VII, Section 2), there is more than one membership in a single building. Moreover, schools compete as a unit. No composite teams are permitted, for which see Article VI/, Section 8. SEC. 2. To become a member, a high school, junior high or elementary school shall pay a membership fee to The University Interscholastic League, University Station, Austin, Texas 78712, prior to December 1 of the school year for which payment is made. The payment for the fee entitles the school to membership for the current school year only. Post-dated checks are not accepted for membership. The schedule of fees is based on a high school's assignment to footbal1 and basketball conferences. Junior high schools and elementary schools are required to pay a fixed fee. High Schools Conference AAAA .. . ... . ..................... $40.00 Conference AAA .. .. .... ............ .. 40.00 Conference AA . ... . .. . ...... . . ..... 30.00 Conference A . .... ................. 25.00 Conference B ......................... 15.00 Junior High School . . . . . . . . . ........................ . 3.00 Two-Year High School ...... ............... ............ . 2.00 Elementary Schools Elementary School (each) ................ ............... $1.00 SEC. 3. In a system of schools, each high school, each junior high school, and each elementary school, where the latter is under a separate principal and is in a separate building from the high school and comprises the elemen­tary grades or any subdivision thereof, shall constitute a separate member of the League. Except as specified in the rules governing the music compe­tition, no pupil in one such school unit shall represent another in any con­test. SEC. 4. Each school joining this League shall be entitled to a copy of the Constitution and Contest Rules. and a subscription to the Interscholastic leaguer. Upon request of the principal or superintendent, each teacher hav­ing charge of preparing students for any League contest will be placed on the leaguer mailing list free of charge. SEC. 5. Any school that enters any of the contests of this League without having paid its membership fee shall be disqualified for the following school year, unless a satisfactory excuse for such failure is presented to the State Executive Committee. ARTICLE IV Officers SECTION. 1. The executive management and control of this League shall reside in the State Executive Committee, Regional Committees, and in the various District Committees in the areas respectively indicated by their titles, "State," "Regional," and "District." SEC. 2. The State Executive Committee of The University Interscholastic League shall be appointed by the President of the University. It shall be the duty of this Executive Committee to have administrative charge of the affairs of the League; to adopt rules governing the organization and control of contests, provided that all material changes in such contest rules (not affect­ing Uriiversity policy), including provisions for penalty, shall be submitted to the Legislative Council; to officially interpret the Constitution and the Contest Rules and to decide finally all disputes falling within its jurisdiction. Furthermore, it shall be the duty of the State Executive Committee to fur­nish official interpretations of rules. State Executive Committee: James R. D. Eddy, chairman; Rhea H. Wil­liams, R. J. Kidd, Emmette S. Redford, Jerre S. Williams, Jesse James Villar­real, Howard A. Calkins, Lynn F. Anderson and Lynn McCraw. SEC. 3. Members of the Legislative Council of The University Inter­scholastic League shall be elected for four-year terms. Representation on the Council shall consist of one representative from each region in each conference. Only superintendents, principals and county superintendents are eligible to be elected to the Council. Nominations for membership on the Council are to be made by mail ballot not later than September of each school term. The five persons receiving Vie greatest number of votes in each conference from each region will be listed on the final preferential ballot submitted to the schools. In case of ties in nominations, nominees shall be reduced to five by lot. The annual meeting of the Council shall be held at Austin in November of each year. It shall be the duty of this Council to determine policies to guide the State Executive Committee in making the rules governing the organization and control of contests; to adopt material changes in contest rules; to refer such material changes in contest rules to the member schools when, in its judg­ment, this is advisable. The Legislative Council shall not act on matters in· valving University policy. The Legislative Council shall select two of its own members to serve on an annual basis as chairman and vice-chairman of the Council. In case of vacancy on the Council, the State Executive Committee shall proceed to fill the vacancy in the manner prescribed above. SEC. 4. The duties of the football, basketball, and basebail executive committees are specified in Rule 6 in each of these plans of competition described in this publication. The duties of spring meet district executive committees and regional executive committees are found in Rules 5 and 19 of the Spring Meet Plan. The final responsibility for League membership, the control and manage­ment of all athletic contests, for enforcement of all eligibility rules, and recommendations of employment of athletic coaches shall rest with the super­intendent of schools. Under the provisions of this section, the superintendent may delegate to school officials such matters as he deems advisable. The superintendent shall be responsible for enrolling for League member­ship each school unit in the school system under his direction and adminis­tration. All League ballots and amendments shall be mailed directly to the superintendent's office, and ballots to be valid, must be signed by the super­intendent. Coaches, sponsors, and directors of any League contest who wish to make any changes in League policies or rules shall make their wishes and sugges­tions known through the superintendents of their respective schools. State-wide teachers' associations, coaches' associations, principals' associ­ations, administrators' associations and similar organizations may recom­mend rule changes direct to the Legislative Council of the University Inter­scholastic League. ARTICLE V Regional Officers A directory of regions and executive officers is published under an appro· priate heading in the Leaguer. ARTICLE VI Contests SECTION 1. List of Contests.-The League shall hold during the current school year the following contests: Baseball One-Act Play Basketball, Boys' Persuasive Speaking Basketball, Girls' Picture Memory Choral Singing Playground Ball Debate Poetry Interpretation Informative Speaking Prose Reading Football Ready Writing Football, Six-man Science Football, Eight-man Shorthand Golf Slide Rule Journalism Story Telling Music Spelling and Plain Writing Music Appreciation Tennis Number Sense Track and Field Oral Reading Typewriting Volleyball SEC 2. Dates for District, Regional, and State Meets.-The time for hold­ing meets during the current school year shall be in accordance with the "Calendar" published on the page following the Table of Contents of this bulletin. SEC. 3. Elementary and Junior High School Meets.-Any group of ele­mentary or junior high schools conveniently located may organize its own meet. Principals of the schools so associated (or persons designated by them) shall constitute the executive committee, which has the final author­ty for scheduling and planning the elementary school meet. The districts are to follow the conference classification to which the high school in the same district is assigned unless mutually agreeable otherwise. Contests offered for which rules are provided, follow: number sense, ready writing, oral reading, spelling and plain writing, junior track and field, playground ball, junior tennis, volleyball, picture memory, and story telling. Junior high school meets may use the list of contests offered to high school members. For schedule of points for computing all-round championship, see Rule 14 of the Spring Meet Plan. Elementary school and junior high school meets do not qualify partici­ pants to any higher meet. ARTICLE VII Definitions SECTION 1. High School.-A high school is one in which at least the time of two teachers, or the equivalent, is devoted to instruction in high school grades. In order to determine the "teaching time" in a given school per teacher, simply add up the number of minutes that the school teaches as a whole, and divide by the number of teachers in the school. Then determine the number of minutes that are devoted to teaching above the eighth grade. If that equals or exceeds "the time of two teachers," you should classify the school as a double unit school, having a high school department and an elementary department. In a twelve-grade system the first eight grades are con­sidered the elementary school and the last four grades as the high school. SEC. 2. Elementary School.-One or more grades below the high school level, housed in a building to itself or with the high school, constitutes a separate school unit in the League, and is entitled to enter its contestants in the elementary school meet provided the membership fee is paid. SEC. 3. Junior High School.-A junior high school is a unit in a school system organized as a junior high, whether or not it occupies a building to itself, and includes most frequently the seventh and eighth grades and the first year of high school, departmentalized to provide for individual differ­ences among pupils by permitting limited election of subjects, and marked by the introduction of some subjects usually taught in the high school. A school unit must teach at least one high school grade to be classified as a junior high school. For assignment to a district meet, see Rule 3, Spring Meet Plan. SEC. 4. Conferences.-A term used in classifying schools as to size, as "Conference B," "Conference A," "Conference AA," "Conference AAA" or "Conference AAAA." (For basis or representative division into conferences see the various plans of competition.) SEC. 5. Higher Class School.-A "higher class" school may be (a) a school with fifteen or more accredited units, (b) a school with as many as three units more than the school formerly attended, provided the latter school has less than fifteen accredited units. This applies in each and every contest regularly scheduled herein. SEC. 6. Advanced Classification.-This term is used to describe the spe­cial conditions under which a school in one conference may be moved into another conference in one or another or in all contests scheduled herein. (For rules governing classifications, see the various plans of competition.) SEC. 7. Junior and Senior Divisions.-Pupils under 15 and over 10 years of age on the first day of the preceding September are "juniors"; pupils 15 or over and under 19 the first day of the preceding September are "seniors." . The terms "junior" and "senior" do not apply to contests not so designated in this bulletin. Notice that basketball, volleyball, debate, extemporaneous speech, etc., are not in junior and senior divisions. There is junior track and field, and a high school track and field meet. SEC. 8. Composite Team.-A composite team is one made up of members from different school units. No composite teams are permitted to compete in Interscholastic League contests, except as specifically provided in rules gov· erning the music contests. . SEC. 9. College.-A "college" is any institution offering work above that of a regular high school, as determined by the latest catalogue or course of study of the institution under consideration. SEC. 10. Event.-An "event" is a part of a contest. For illustration: track and field is a contest made up of 14 different events. SEC. 11. The Bureau of Public School Service.-That part of the Exten· sion Division of The University of Texas, which, in addition to other ac­tivities, serves as an organizing agency for the League. SEC. 12. The League.-The League, organized yearly, consists of those public schools (see Article III, Section 1) which accept the plans of competi· tion set forth in this Constitution and Contest Rules by fulfilling the require· ments set forth in Article III, Sections 1and2. SEC. 13. Meets.-A "meet" is the gathering together of pupils for the purpose of engaging in scheduled contests. A "local" meet is one in which participation is confined to pupils of an individual school and generally for the purpose of qualifying contestants for the "district" meet. A "district" meet is one in which two or more schools in the same conference participate for the purpose of qualifying contestants for the "regional" meet. A "re­gional" meet is one in which the winners from a group of "district" meets compete for qualification to the State Meet. The "State" Meet is one in which regional winners compete for state championships in contests scheduled in Rule 22 of Spring Meet Plan. SEC. 14. Credit.-A '"credit" is a unit certifying satisfactory completion of the requirements for any of the courses approved by the Texas Education Agency as listed in the Public School Directory, with the exception of physi­ cal education (including competitive athletics). These courses must have been taught by a regularly employed instructor in a regularly scheduled class for a minimum of 45 minutes per day, five days per week, or the equiva­ lent thereof, continuing throughout the semester for one-half credit and/or through the school year for one credit. Course and grade requirements must be of a standard acceptable by other accredited schools to which the student must transfer or for college entrance. "Local credit" given for participation in school or club activities such as library or office assistant, student council representative, class officer, etc., may not be counted. SEC. 15. Semester.-A "semester" or the equivalent of an 18-week period of school attendance, starting with the "opening" of a school, in the mean­ing of Article VIII, Section 16, is one half of the "long session," during which a pupil may earn independent credit for scholastic work. SEC. 16. Term.-The word "term" is used herein to designate the period between the opening and the closing of school, usually from September to May. It is synonymous with "session," or with "long session" in institutions which have a "summer session." SEC. 17. Tournament and Round-Robin.-The word "tournament" is used herein in contradistinction to "round-robin." It means that at least three teams are assembled at one site at one time on successive days for an elimination contest. "Round-robin" is used to describe a series of contests, either at one time or scattered over several days or weeks or months, in which each team contests with every other team, and the winner is deter­mined on a percentage basis. SEC. 18. Recruiting.-The term "recruiting" means offering any induce­ment, directly or indirectly to a prospective athlete to enroll in a given school. An inducement may be actual cash, remission of tuition, board or lodging, free transportation, a job for which remuneration is above that normally paid for such services, or other valuable consideration. SEC. 19. Enrollment.-ln judging eligibility under Article VIII, Section 16, a pupil's enrollment period is a given semester begins with the day of his registration and ceases with his last day of attendance. A pupil changed from one high school to another, registered and went through a skeleton program of one day consisting of IS-minute class periods and returned the next day to his original high school. This does not constitute enrollment, since it is necessary /or the pupil to attend a full class period before he is considered enrolled. In rules of the League which use enrollment as a basis for determining the number on a given team, count only those grades which will be eligible at the time of the district meet. Do not count pupils on total enrollment who will pass into an ineligible grade or graduate at mid-term. In classifying high schools for competition in League contests the number enrolled in the last four gradues in high school is determined by the figures given in "Average Membership" of the "Superintendent's Annual Report." The "average membership" for a two-year period is followed in making the assignments. SEC. 20. Dormitory School.-The term "dormitory school" means a school that is eligible for League membership under provisions of Article III, Section 1, and one whose students live in the dormitories of the institution. SEC. 21. High School Team.-For purposes of interpretation a "high school team" is defined as a group of players, any one of whom has ever been used in an interschool game which counts on League standing. SEC. 22. Disqualification.-The penalty of "disqualification" prevents the offending school from qualifying for any League honors only in the con­test in which the infraction of rules occurs. SEC. 23. PaUJ Player.-A "paid player" is a contestant who is paid, either in cash or in valuable consideration, for participating in a particular game or contest in which a high school contestant or contestants are participating. SEC. 24. Official Notice.-Citations appearing in the "Official Notices" column of the Interscholastic Leaguer constitute notice to all member schools. SEC. 25. Standard Stage Properties.-Stage properties include such fur­niture as chairs, tables, settees, stools, benches, desks. etc. SEC. 26. Hand Properties.-Hand properties include objects which the actor carries upon or uses while on the stage, such as books, umbrellas, let­ters, lanterns, etc. SEC. 27. Track and field Meet.-Any meeting of three or fewer schools without the loss of any school time for track or field activities is not defined as a "Track and Field Meet." Any meeting of four or more schools for track or field activities is defined as a "Track and Field Meet." ARTICLE VIII Eligibility Rules The following eligibility rules shall apply to every contest held under the auspices of this League. School principals and superintendents are charged with the responsibility of seeing that these ruks are strictly observed in each and every contest in which their pupils engage. The "Official Notices" column in the Leaguer is considered sufficient notice to all member schools concerning interpretations of rules. SECTION 1. Age Limit.-No one shall take part in any contest in this League who, on the first day of September preceding the contest, has reached or passed his nineteenth birthday. A contestant who is eligible under this rule at the beginning of any Interscholastic League season remains eligible throughout the season. Earliest documentary evidence shall be final, in deciding disputes arising under this rule. Records in family Bibles are not accepted as evidence if the entry offered shows any sign of alteration. Moreover, entries which were not made at or near the time of birth are considered valueless as evidence. Recent affidavits of birth are not acceptable as evidence of date of birth. Note that date of filing of birth certificate determines the date of the document. SEC. 2. Undergraduates Only.-No one shall take part in any contest in this League who has been graduated from his school or other school of equal or higher rank, except: A contestant shall not be barred by this rule who has been graduated from a school of less than 15 accredited units (as recorded in the current Bulletin on Standards and Activities of the Texas Education Agency) and returns to take the advanced work in a high school having as many as three more accredited units; provided, that such pupil is an undergraduate in the school to which he or she returns or to which he or she has been transferred. Note, however, Section 18, of this article. A contestant shall not be barred by this rule until he has completed six con· secutive semesters in a three-year high school or eight consecutive semesters in a four-year high school, provided he has not received a diploma or par­ticipated in graduation exercises. a. Participation as a graduate in graduation exercises constitutes "graduation" within the meaning of this rule. A pupil receiving a "dummy diploma" is considered a graduate, and no revocation of a diploma, for any reason, restore,s undergraduate status insofar as this rule is concerned. b. The graduation requirements effective at the beginning of the school year govern in the application of this rule. c. The high school classification in force at the time the school opened for the cur­rent year governs. This seems the fairest interpretation, since otherwise, the action of the county board one way or another might render eligible or ineligible pupils who have already made choice of a high school for the year. SEC. 3. Scholarship Requirement.-No one shall take part in any contest in this League, who, at the time of the contest, is not passing, since the be­ginning of the semester or term, in at least three half unit credit courses (for which the contestant has no credit), to the date seven days prior to the con· test. Provided, that a pupil in a grade below the high school shall be con· sidered as fulfilling the scholarship requirement if he is passing in three· fourths of the work offered as a normal student load, and provUled further, that in a school not offering a total of 720 minutes of recitation work per week a pupil may satisfy the scholarship requirement if he is taking the regular amount of recitation work for that school and is passing in three· fourths of such work. a. The scholarship rule requires three courses taken in the high school. Work taken in any institution outside of the high school which the contestant seeks to represent may not be counted in order to make up the required amount of work. b. Seven days prior to the date of a contest (in regional music contests, 30 days) is the date which determines the eligibility of a contestant under this requirement. If at this time (seven days before the contest), the nature of the contestant's work, taken as a whole from the beginning of the semester, would not entitle him to promotion if it were promotion time, in at least three subjects, he is not eligible and he remains ineli­gible until the time when his work taken as a whole from the beginning of the semester would entitle him to promotion. See definition of semester in Article Vil, Section 15. c. A course of less than one-half unit per semester cannot be counted. For illustration, two one-fourth unit courses cannot be counted as one-half unit course. SEC. 4. College Contestants Barred.-No one shall take part in any con· test in this League who, either as a substitute or as a regular, ever repre· sented a college in any contest; or, who has ever ·attended a college as a regular student, "regular college student" meaning a student who has · ever enrolled for as much as one college course. (For definition of "college," see Article VII, Section 9.) No course is considered a college coUTse within the meaning of this rule for which only high school credit is given, although such course may be administered by a college. SEC. 5. Day Students Only.-The studies required in these rules shall be taken during the day session of school. SEC. 6. Attendance.-No one shall take part in any contest in this League who, at the time of the contest, has not been a bona fide regular attendant in the school unit represented for 30 calendar days immediately preceding the contest, or since the first day of the second week of the current school year; i.e., a pupil who enrolls after the first day of the second week is not eligible for 30 calendar days. Absence for not over two weeks on account of sickness or other unavoidable cause shall not bar a pupil if a written certificate of such cause for absence is presented, signed by the parent or guardian; provided, that such absence cannot be computed on time prior to the student's actual entry in a given school, or after his withdrawal. SEC. 7. Competitions Outside League.-ln all games or contests outside the League, and in so-called "non-conference" games, a League member shall abide by the rules and regulations of the League and be subject to the same penalties for infractions as if the contest or game were with another member of the League or as if the infraction were made in a regular "con­ference" game that decided League standing. This section does not apply to "B" squads or scrub teams of participating schools. No member school's scrub team, "A" or "B" team may schedule an interschool contest in a sport in which the other school is suspended. · SEC. 8. Amateurs Only.-No one shall take part in any athletic contest in this League who has ever received money, or other valuable consideration for teaching, officiating, or participating in any athletic sport, or game, or who in any game outside of games played as a member of his school team or the Interscholastic League has, within the last 12 months, competed on an athletic team with a paid player or contestant, or who for valuable con­sideration has allowed his name to be used for the promotion of any product, plan or service. Teaching, officiating or participating in the following games or sports for "valuable consideration" shall be considered as a violation of this rule: base­ball, basketball, bowling, boxing, football, golf, rodeo events, softball, swim­ming and diving, tennis, track and field, volleyball, weight lifting, wrestling. Sports and games not mentioned above may be added to the list by the State Executive Committee upon one year's notice to the member schools. This rule does not apply to pupils who were under 15 years of age at the time payment for athletic services was made; neither shall it prohibit the acceptance of rebates on railroad fare in interscholastic contests fostered by institutions of higher education. The penalty for violation of this rule shall be forfeiture of eligibility for one year from the date of the violation. a. Money or other valuable consideration accepted by a contestant after a contest ren· ders the contestant ineligible for further participation in Interscholastic League contests, irrespective of whether or not there was any agreement with regard to remuneration previous to the contest. b. This rule has been construed to prohibit a contestant from receiving any payment or valuable consideration, either for participation in, or as an incentive to participate in, any game or sport, including payment of expenses for a trip to a college for the purpose of considering an athletic scholarship or the signing of a "letter of intent" for such scholarship. The Pre-Enrollment Application, presented to the State Executive Commit­tee by the Southwest Conference Committee on October ·26, 1960, shall not be construed as a violation of the Amateur Rule. c. Generally, any "special services" or "benefits," offered only to athletes or members of an athletic team, will be construed as being "valuable consideration" and, consequent· ly, a violation of Article VIII, Section 8, The Amateur Rule. _ __ The following are not to be construed as violations of The Amateur Rule: (]) medical examinations, athletic insurances or services similar to athletic insurance furnished by schools that carry on athletic insurance; (2) expenses of athletes or teams on trips away from home as representatives of their school; and (3) supplies and services furnished during a game or a practice period, related only to the game and the practice periods. The "game and practice period" denotes the actual time in which the contestants are in athletic uniform. SEC. 9. Playing under Assumed Name.-No one shall participate in any contest of the League who has ever contested under an assumed name in any contest, (1) conducted under the auspices of the Interscholastic League or (2) in which participation would affect his eligibility for contests conducted under the auspices of the League. SEc. 10. Certificate of Eligibility.-Before each athletic season a member school shall file with the district chairman a list of the contestants represent· ing that school with the eligibility of such contestants certified by the princi­pal or superintendent. SEC. 11. Athletic Try-Outs.-No one shall take part in any athletic contest in this League who has ever participated in a college athletic practice session or test for purposes of revealing, demonstrating or displaying athletic ability in any sport. SEC. 12. Double Representation.-The same contestant shall not be eli­gible to represent his school in more than one of the public speaking contests in the same year. Participation in the one-act play contest shall not be con­sidered participation in a "public speaking event." SEC. 13. Changing Schools.-A pupil changing schools is not eligible in League contests whose parents (or guardian) reside outside the school dis· trict, until he shall have been in attendance at the school or in the school system to which he changes for one year immediately preceding the contest; provided, such pupil is not barred under this rule who ( 1) changes from a school district in which the parents of the pupil actually reside having less than 15 accredited units to the nearest school in good standing with the League having as many as three more, or to the school having 15 or more accredited units located nearest his home or the nearest one in his county, as measured by the public road, (2) lives with his parents or guard­ian and elects to change to any higher class school within 15 miles of his home. a. The school of the school district in which contestant resides has less than 15 accredited units. He is therefore eligible in School A, which is the nearest higher class school to his home or the nearest one in the county. But last season he attended School B, a higher class school, but not, of course, the nearest one to his home. This year he returns home and enters School A. Is he eligible to represent School A this season? He is eligible for participation in League contests this season, since School A district is his "home district" insofar as League rules are concerned. Notice, however, Article VIII, Section 14. b. In order to avail himself of the residence of his guardian to become eligible under this rule, the guardianship must be legal, recorded in its regular order in the office of the District or County Clerk, and of at least one year's standing. If no legal guardianship has been taken out, three years' residence with and support of a contestant establishes guardianship within the meaning of this rule, except: In case both parents of the con­testant are living no guardianship is possible in the meaning of this rule. c. A contestant, both of whose parents are dead, is eligible his first year in the school district wherein a grandparent, uncle, aunt, or older brother or sister resides, with whom he lives and by whom he is supported. Notice, however, Article VIII, Section 14. d. This rule applies only to pupils in high school. e. If the parents of a contestant move from the district before he has been in attend­ance for one year he loses his eligibility in the school district from which his parents move, and remains ineligible there until his year is up. f. In unaccredited schools, a contestant is eligible his first year only in the one located nearest his home or the nearest one in his county. If he has finished the grades &ffered in the nearest school, he automatically becomes eligible in the nearest school offering work in a higher grade. After an enrollment of three weeks, or longer, in an accredited school, the contestant cannot re-establish eligibility (under one year) in the unaccredited school unless there has been a corresponding change of residence on the part of his parents, or unless the contestant's home school has been raised in rank by adding at least one grade. g. Bus transfers are on the same basis as individual transfers except that bus trans­fers assigned by the County Board are not affected by this section. h. This rule applies also within a city having two or more senior high schools, but does not apply to elementary grades. Neither does it apply to junior high school graduates who change to the senior high school designated for such junior high school graduates. Districts outlined by the local school board shall govern. A pupil living in an "over­lapping" district is eligible his first year under this rule in the school of his choice so long as he is living in the district of that high school. After a pupil under these condi­tions makes a choice of a high school, he will lose his eligibility for one year if he changes to another high school even in the same school system, unless a corresponding change of residence by his parents has been made. Notice, however, Article VIII, Section 14. If parents change residence from District A in a city system to District B in the same system, the pupil may choose the high school of District B or the central vocational high school whose district includes all the other districts. In ruling on the transfer of contestants from high schools in a city system of schools to a central vocational school under this section, the "overlapping district" interpretation contained in paragraph "h" applies; that is, the vocational high school district including all the other districts is considered as an "overlapping district." i. In case of discontinuance of the school, paragraph '?' of this section shall apply. j. After a pupil in a lower class school makes a choice of a higher class school within JS miles of his home, he will lose his eligibility for one year if he changes to another higher class school located within IS miles of his home; unless (I) there is a correspond­ing change of residence by his parents, or (2) the County Board of Education has ordered the change of schools and the tuition and bus money has been transferred in accordance with the law providing for transfers from one district to another. SEC. 14. One Year Rule.-A pupil who has represented a high school (other than his present school) or academy in either football or basketball is ineligible in both of these sports for one calendar year in a school to which he changes, except a pupil who changes from a school which he has attended for at least one year having less than 15 accredited units to the nearest higher class school (see Article VII, Section 5) to his home, or the nearest in his county. A pupil living at home with his parents (or guardian) and qualifying under the "exception" clause above, is eligible under this section in any higher class school within 15 miles. A pupil changing from a training school conducted by a college to the local high school in which district his parents have lived at least one year, is not eligible under this rule. A junior high school pupil who has represented his junior high school in football or basketball is ineligible in both of these sports in a school district to which he changes until he has been in attendance for one year. a. To be ineligible under this rule the pupil must have represented in football or bas­ketball another high :;,chool having as many as IS accredited units. The number of units held by the former school when the pupil enrolls in the new school governs this point. Participation on "B" squad in an interschool football or basketball game counts as hav­ing represented a high school. b. A pupil is eligible under this rule who enrolls the first year in a newly created school located in his home district (where he has resided for at least one year). c. In the meaning of this rule, the one year provision has been satisfied when the pupil has been in attendance in ihe new school IOT two semesters even though the semesters may not be two consecutive semesters. d. In case of discontinuance of the school which a contestant has represented in basket­ball or football, paragraph "e" of this section shall apply. e. This section shall not operate to render pupils ineligible in a school to which they are changed by order of the County Board and to which their tuition money and bus money have been transferred, in accordance with the law providing for transfers from one district to another. f. A contestant represents School A, a fully accredited high school in an interschool football or basketball game; then he moves to school B, another fully accredited high school, where he remains ineligible for one year and consequently does not take part in any interschool football or basketball games. Later he moves to School C, a third fully accredited high school. This section shall not operate to render the pupil ineligible in School C, or in any other school to which he changes, since the provisions of this Rule have been satisfied when the pupil was in attendance for two consecutive semesters, with­out having participated in any inter school football or basketball games. g. In desegregated school districts, this section shall not operate to render pupils in­eligible in a high school to which they are assigned by the local school board, provided the pupil has no other choice of schools. In the first year in which a student is eligible to choose another school because of desegregation, he may transfer without loss of athletic eligibility, provided he is not recruited. If, because of earlier designation, he has been eligible to transfer but not without loss of athletic eligibility, he will be allowed to transfer in the school year 1966-67 with­out loss of athletic eligibility, provided he is not recruited. The State Executive Committee emphasizes that this interpretation applies only to the following situations: (a) Only in districts where "freedom of choice" has been established and transfers are made as designated by the local school board. (b) After a choice has been made, the athlete cannot return to his former school and be eligible without loss of his eligibility for one year. ( c) Only within a school district and not between school districts. SEC. 15. Teachers lneligible.-A person who is teaching whole or part time is ineligible for any League contest. SEc. 16. Passing Grade Preceding Semester.-No one shall take part in any contest in this League who did not attend school a major portion of the preceding semester and who did not complete at least three half units (see Article VII, Section 19) during the semester. a. Question arose as to whether a contestant was eligible to compete in a basketball game the Saturday night following the Friday which was the last school day of the fall semester. The contestant had failed to pass in three credit courses during the spring semester of the preceding school year, but had passed in three credit courses during the fall semester. At the time of the game, it was a question of which was the "last semester," the fall or the spring semester. The contestant was ineligible since the fall semester does not close until the new semester begins, and the new semester does not begin until school is in session again after the last school day of the fall semester. For definition of a "semester," see Article VII, Section 15. b. A student changing schools is ineligible under this section if the school to which he changes refuses to allow credit for work completed the preceding semester in the former school. c. A year's credit in a subject granted on the basis of grades made during both semes­ters may be counted as one of the three half units required regardless of the particular grade for either semester. d. No exceptions are made to this rule for any reason. If the contestant was sick, or had to quit school for other good reasons, he simply is not eligible if he failed to get credit for three half-unit courses during the preceding semester. Summer school work or any work handed in after the close of the semester cannot be counted. A contestant who has been out of school a full year or more is eligible, provided he attended a major portion of, and made three half units, the last semester he was in school. The fact that he was passing at the time of his withdrawal does not satisfy this rule. If he did not earn the prescribed credit he is not eligible. If the contestant was enrolled less than three weeks his last semester he is not considered as having "attended" that semester. e. Scholastic work to be valid must be work for which the contestant does not already have credit. (See Art. VII, Sec. 14.) f. A pupil who has been out of school a year or more is eligible under this section if he attended school a major portion of the last semester that he was in school, and completed three half units. g. An elementary pupil, in order to be eligible for participation in League contests, must have attended a major portion of the semester or term and must have been regularly and unconditionally promoted at the last promotion period in school attended. Such a pupil who has been out of school a year or more is eligible under this section if he was regularly and unconditionally promoted at the last promotion period in the school year during which he last attended school. A pupil who has been promoted conditionally from the elementary school to the high school may still be eligible under this rule if he passed, the last semester in the elementary school, three elementary school subjects. h. In schools operating on a term basis, contestants making passing grades in three half-units at the end of the first 18 weeks would be considered as having passed the re­quired amount of work under this section. A student failing at the close of the first 18 weeks would not be eligible during the second 18-week session. SEC. 17. Post Season Participation Forbidden.-No one shall take part in any athletic contest in this League who has ever participated in a post season football game other than one duly scheduled in the League championship series. SEC. 18. Ten Semester Rule.-No one shall take part in any contest in this League after the end of the tenth consecutive semester following his first enrollment in the eighth grade. (Note: See Composite Team Rule, Article VII, Section 8.) a. This section limits the eligibility of a contestant to not more than eight consecutive semesters in a four-year high school and not more than six consecutive semesters in a three-year high school. b. When a pupil enrolls in two or more eighth grade subjects this section is in effect. SEC. 19. Out-of-State Competition.-No one shall take part in any athletic contest in this League who has competed either as an individual or as a mem­ber of an athletic team in an out-of-state athletic contest that has not been approved by the State Executive Committee. This rule does not apply to regular scheduled school games arranged by the school officials, nor to ath­letic contests participated in between the closing and opening of the par­ticipant's school "terms" (provided the Amateur and Awards Rules are not violated). (For definition of school "term," see Article VII, Section 16.) SEC. 20. Music Amateur Rule.-No one shall take part in League Music contests who has received money or other valuable consideration for teach­ing or officiating in any music event, band or other musical organization, within the past twelve months. SEC. 21. Training Camps Forbidden.-Any student who attends a spe­cial athletic training camp in football or basketball shall be ineligible for a period of one year from the date he enrolls in the camp for any athletic contest in the League. This does not apply to bona fide summer camps giving an over-all activity program to the campers or students. ARTICLE IX Relations Between District, Regional, and State Contests Refer to the Spring Meet section for information on district, regional and state contests, page 31. ARTICLE X All-Round Championship Refer to the Spring Meet section for information on all-round champion· ships, page 34. ARTICLE XI Expenses and Rebates Tournaments and Meets.-ln district meets and tournaments, the awards offered and rebates of contestants and of judges shall be provided for as the respective directors may determine. Admission charges in any meet or tour­nament may be made when deemed advisable. If receipts exceed expenses of the meet or tournament the balance should be rebated to participating schools on a fair mileage basis. The executive committee of a meet may collect a small entry fee if other sources are insufficient to finance the meet. ARTICLE XII Disputes All disputes (except decisions of judges and referees of contests) among the members of the League shall be settled by the appropriate executive committee. The decision of district committees in all disputes arising in con· nection with the determination of the district championship shall be final. All protests must be made in writing within 24 hours after the contest. Eligibility protests, however, are not subject to the 24-hour limitation. The representative of a school involved is disqualified from sitting as a member of the committee in the adjudication of the dispute. Protests must be presented by either superintendent or principal. The State Executive Committee shall have jurisdiction of all disputes arising between schools belonging, respectively, in different conferences and districts. In passing upon eligibility of players, the district committee acts in a judicial capacity. A proper judicial approach involves reasonable notice (i.e., sufficient to permit an answer to charges made or issues raised), an opportunity for a fair hearing, and an unbiased decision based upon the evidence presented. ARTICLE XIII Penalties SECTION 1. Suspension.-Any school that violates any of the eligibility rules or regulations in the plans of competition of this League may be sus­pended from further competition in the League for a period of from one to three years in the contest in which the infraction is made, upon presentation to the State Executive Committee of sufficient evidence of said infraction. Football and basketball eligibility cases arising inside the district shall be decided by the appropriate football and basketball district committee, as provided in Article XII and in Rule 6 of the Basketball Plan and of the Football Plan. If, in the opinion of the district committee, the offense is of sufficient gravity to warrant suspension from the League, the district com­mittee shall make such recommendation to the State Executive Committee and transmit its findings of fact in the case or cases, which the State Execu­tive Committee shall consider in passing upon whether or not the offending school shall be suspended. Nothing in this section or in Article XII shall be interpreted to limit the power of the State Executive Committee in making investigations and initiat­ing proceedings against any member school whenever, in the opinion of the Committee, there is sufficient evidence at hand to justify such action. SEC. 2. Mandatory Penalty.-A school that continues to use a contestant who has been declared ineligible shall be suspended from the League for a period of from one to three years in the contest in which the infraction is made, and all contracts with the member schools in this contest become at once null and void. SEC. 3. May Not Play Suspended Teams.-No school in this League shall engage in any contests or scrimmage with a suspended school, and any school violating this rule shall be suspended. This prohibition applies, of course, only to the contest in which the school is suspended. Scrub teams and "B" teams of League members are governed by this rule. Schools under suspension in any contest will be listed in the Interscholastic Leaguer Official Notices column. SEC. 4. Records.-A school shall produce its records upon request by an appropriate executive committee, and refusal to do so shall constitute grounds for suspension from one to three years. SEC. 5. Minimum Penalty.-The minimum penalty for using an ineligible contestant is forfeiture of the contest in which the ineligible contestant par­ticipated. ARTICLE XIV Annual Meetings The annual meeting of representatives of member schools shall be held at the State Meet of the several conferences. At this meeting, matters pertaining to the League shall be discussed and recommendations made to the Legislative Council regarding any changes in the rules. Each member school present shall be entitled to one vote at this meeting, which shall be cast by the superintendent or principal or the duly authorized delegate from the member school. ARTICLE XV Amendments Amendments to the Constitution of the Interscholastic League may be initiated either by the Legislative Council or by the State Executive Com­mittee. Amendments shall be made by majority vote of the Legislative Council, provided that all major amendments, as determined by the Legisla­tive Council. shall then be submitted for ratification to a vote of the member schools. All changes in eligibility rules shall be submitted to member schools and shall require one year's notice. It is the responsibility of the Legislative Council to determine when an amendment is a major or a minor change in League policy. The Legislative Council shall not act upon any matters in­volving University policy. ARTICLE XVI Limitation of Awards No member school of this League shall be permitted to issue (and no pupil shall be permitted to receive) awards for participation in interschool competition in excess of $15 (or equivalent in value) per year; except that additional symbolic awards not to exceed $2 each may be presented for each additional interschool activity. This rule shall apply only to the following contests: baseball, basketball, bowling, volleyball, boxing, foot· ball, golf, rodeo events, swimming and diving, tennis, track and field, weight lifting, wrestling, essay writing, speech events, mathematics, music events, journalism, one-act play, shorthand, typewriting and spelling. Contests which are not conducted on an interschool basis shall not come under the jurisdiction of this rule. (The Amateur Rule will apply to all ath­ letic contests.) Acceptance of scholarship awards given upon enrollment in a college or university is not considered as a violation of this rule. Penalty for violation of this rule shall be forfeiture of eligibility for one year. En· forcement of this rule shall rest with the State Executive Committee, and violation of the provisions herein may be used as grounds for suspension. This rule shall not be interpreted to prohibit the acceptance of symbolic awards such as medals and cups as tokens of achievements to contestants in meets or tournaments provided the awards are made by the organization conducting the meet or tournament. This rule shall not ·be interpreted to prohibit the acceptance of certificates, provided they are printed on paper, do not exceed 9'' x 12" in size, and are not framed or laminated, and are given by the school or by the District Executive Committee. a. This section applies only to awards given by the school, or awards received by a pupil from any source for participating in interschool contests. Awards, rewards, gifts or other valuable consideration received for participating in athletic contests other than interschool events are to be governed by the provisions of the Amateur Rule. b. Special awards may be accepted, as long as the total value of aU awards from all sources (school, district committee, individual or organization) shall not exceed the maximum allowed in the Awards Rule, except those allowed in the last paragraph of the Awards Rule. c. Educational trips shall not be interpreted as a violation of the Awards Rule, pro­vided the trips are financed and sponsored solely by the school board. Spring Meet Plan The Spring Meet Plan, as set forth in this section of the Constitution and Contest Rules, provides for the detailed organization and administration of the Spring Meet contest program beginning in the district and progressing through the region to the State Meet. 1. Eligible Schools.-No school shall be eligible for the district meet unless it is a paid-up member of the League. 2. Conferences.-Spring Meet conference assignments will correspond to the district assignments in basketball. The district chairmen for boys' basket­ball have been designated by the State Executive Committee as the organiz­ing chairmen for the Spring Meet districts. District Meet 3. Districts.-The state shall be divided into districts for each confer· ence, and competition shall extend to a state championship in the con­tests and events listed in Rule 22 of this plan. The State Executive Com­mittee may merge or rearrange districts for improvement of the competi­tive set-up. Junior high schools will not be assigned to high school districts for Spring Meet. If there is a junior high school member in an area where there is no junior high school district organized, that junior high school can not be as­signed to a district. Junior high school district winners do not qualify to any higher meet. In some areas, there are large elementary schools containing seventh and eighth grades. These school units are eligible to be assigned to a junior high school district, upon application to the junior high school executive commit­tee and the approval of the State Executive Committee. 4. District Organization.-The last date for organizing the district for Spring Meet shall be February 2. The chairman of the boys' basketball dis­trict executive committee shall serve as the temporary chairman of the dis­trict and he shall call a meeting of all participating schools in the district, preferably during November but in no case later than February 2. At this meeting a district executive committee shall be created com­posed of faculty representatives from the participating high schools. The district executive committee shall not alter or change the Spring Meet schedule in any way. For illustration, suppose a school begins in the fall the preparation /or 61 given contest expecting of course to be able to compete in it at the district meet. On arriving at the meet, however, it is found that the committee decided in January or February that this contest was not to be offered. A dispute immediately ensues as to notice, the committee claiming that it gave notice and the school contending that the notice was not received. In order to prevent such disputes and disappointment of contestants and to encourage schools to begin their preparation early in the fall, the rules do not permit the executive committee of a given meet to change the schedule of contests, nor to alter their respective values in counting points toward all-round championships. 5. Duties of the District Executive Committee.-lt shall he the duty of the district executive committee to enforce eligibility rules in the district; to select the director general ; to select the site and date for the meet; to ar­range for holding district meet for high schools; to arrange for financing the meet; to canvass schools for entries to such contests; to see that only those schools on the official list furnished by the State Office are permitted to enter; to cooperate with the schools in effecting and promoting a district organization; to correspond with the State Office with regard to the interests of the work; to adjudicate disputes arising within the district subject to provisions of Article XII; and in general to work toward making the con­tests worthwhile in and by themselves, regardless of subsequent contests. It shall he the duty of the director general of the meet to select the judges and directors of the contests; to have available all the contest mate­rials furnished by the State Office; to work out the contest schedule and to have immediate responsibility for seeing that the meet is conducted in an orderly manner. In planning the schedule for literary and academic contests at both dis­trict and region, it is recommended that Poetry Reading, Prose Reading, Persuasive Speaking, Informative Speaking and Debate he scheduled dur­ing the first session of the meet. The next session should include Number Sense, Slide Rule and Science, with a short intermission between. Ready Writing and Journalism contests should he set for different hours, as well as Shorthand and Typewriting, with short intermissions between. Although the director general is expected to exert every effort to notify all member schools in the district regarding the date of the meet, each school is responsible for ascertaining the date. See Article VI, Section 3 which describes junior high school meets. 6. Reports.-The director general at the close of a given meet shall compile a list from the reports furnished him by the individual contest directors and shall forward it to the director general of the next higher meet. 7. Entries.-The superintendent or designated administrator of a school shall he responsible for entering the contestants in the district meet 10 days before the day of the met. A substitution may he made on the literary and academic entry list at the district meet, provided the school has an entry in the contest and provided the substitute is certified as eligible and the sub­stitute's name must appear on the school's original entry list. Schools are urged to certify one alternate in each literary contest at the district meet. This section does not apply to tennis, golf, track and field. See special rules govern­ing these contests. A school winning representation to the next higher meet should send im­mediately to the director general of that meet an entry list in due form giving the name of the school, the name of the contest, and the names of the con­testants with certification of eligibility. In the lite;rary and academic contests, the district director general's report, mailed to the regional director, constitute a schoof s official entry in the regional meet. No individual school entry blank is necessary in the literary contests. Entries to the region meet shall be in the office of the regional director on the Monday preceding the date of the meet. It is the responsibility of the superintendent qualifying contestants to the next higher meet to ascertain the date, time and place of the meet. 8. District M eets.-Contestants selected by member schools are entitled to enter the district meets in events in Rule 13 of this section, to which they are respectively eligible. Entries, including alternates, in the district meet must be filed with the director general 10 days prior to the meet. 9. Contest Supplies.-Supplies, such as blanks, tests, etc., necessary for conducting meets, shall be furnished from the State Office, upon requisition by the district director general. It is the responsibility of the director gen­eral to request this contest material from the League Office far enough in advance of the contest date to insure delivery of the material before the contest. 10. Substitutions.-ln case a contestant qualifying in a meet finds that he will be unable to attend the next higher meet, it shall be the duty of his superintendent or designated administrator to notify the director general and the next place winner in the contest, who shall become eligible to represent his district or region as the case may be. No substitution is allowable in indi­vidual contests. Local school authorities may make a substitution to fill a vacancy on a team, as in debate, or in a one-act play cast. For substitution in track and field, tennis and golf refer to special rules governing these contests. 11. Championship Optional.-There may be an all-round championship awarded at the district meet, at the discretion of the executive committee of the meet. Points won by an elementary school cannot be counted toward all-round championship in high school meet and vice versa. 12. Points by Default.-Points taken by default count toward all-round championship. A winner by "default" is one against whom no opposition is entered; a winner by "forfeit" is one whose opponent has entered but, for one rea­son or another, fails or refuses to continue the contest. A winner by default is awarded first place points. 13. Schedule of Points.-ln district meets and in elementary school meets, the championship in the respective conferences and in the elemen­tary school meets, shall be awarded to the school which wins the highest number of points and at the same time satisfies the requirements of Rule 15 of this article. Only the events listed in this section may be counted toward the all-round championship. Attempt to change the schedule of points in conference meets has caused more dis­satisfaction than any other one thing. District committees which arbitrarily change the schedule are uniformly overruled by the State Executive Committee upon appeal by any dissatisfied school. In determining the all-round championship, points shall be awarded on the followin g basis: Third Winner Runner-up Place Debate ····-----­---·-­-----------------­-·----­ ----------------­-----­ 20 15 Oral Reading ___ -----------­------------­--------------­-----­ 10 7 5 Informative Speech -----------------------­-­------------------­---­ 10 7 5 Golf (Team) . _ ------------------­---------··-----------------------­ 15 10 5 Golf (Single Medalist) -------­-------­ ______ __________ _____ __ __ 10 7 5 Journalism* __ ----­-----------------------­-----------­----------­------­ Number Seme (Arithmetic) __ ----------­-------------------­ 15 10 5 One-Act Playt __________ _________________ -----­----------­--------­ 20 10 5 Persuasive Speaking -------------­-------------------------­-------­ 10 7 5 Picture Memory ------------------------­-----------------------­---­ 7 5 2 Playground Ball (High School) ----------------------­------­ 20 10 5 Playground Ball (Junior) -----------------------------­-------­ 15 10 5 Poetry Interpretation ------------­---------------­----­-----------­ 10 7 5 Prose Reading _______ -------------­--------------­---------------­---­ 10 7 5 Ready Writing-----· ----·-----·----------------­--·--­---­·· --------­--­ 15 10 5 Science --­·---·­ ·--· -···--········ ··---­···-·-·-----·· -------· ·-----­ 15 10 5 Shorthand .. . ___ _.. --····-----··­ ____ .. .... ....... .. __________ _ 15 10 5 Slide Rule ___ __ ___··-·-··-­-··­·· ··-----···· ··------­----­-------­---­ 15 10 5 Spelling ···-···---­--­. ··-----···-······----­------­------·· ····----­----­ 10 7 5 Story Telling ·---·--­·· ··-···--·····--···-------·· --------------------­--­ 7 5 2 Tennis (Senior Doubles) ······--··­------·· ·-·-­·-· -· ·---· -----­ 15 10 Third Winner Runner-up Place Tennis (Senior Singles) ______ ____­--------­--------­----------­-15 10 Tennis (Junior Doubles) __ ------------­-----· ·-·············--­ 5 3 Tennis (Junior Singles) ------------­---­--·-······ ·--­----------­ 3 2 Track and Field (High School) -------­--­-·········--------­ 30 15 10 Track and Field (Junior) --------·-······················--· --­ 15 10 5 Typewriting -----­--­---------···-­----­-----···-···--·· ··--­----­-------­15 Volleyball __________ _____________ __ ________ _____ __ ______ __ ______ ___ _______ _ 15 10 10 5 5 14. Allocation of Points.-In computing points toward all-round cham­pionship, points as above scheduled are awarded in each conference. For illustration: The first place winner in ready writing is listed above as re­ceiving 15 points. This means that the winner of first place in each confer­ence in ready writing is awarded 15 points, and so on with regard to each contest listed, and each place, as per schedule. The same number of points is awarded for winners in the grade school contest as in the high school contest, where the same named contests are used in both divisions. Elementary school points count only in the elemen­tary school meet and high school points count only in the high school or district meet. In spelling and picture memory points are given on the team score. 15. No Points for last Place.-In no contest or event shall second or third place be counted if it is a last place, as determined by actual partici­pation in the contest. In case there are three entries in debate (for illus­tration) and one team defeats each of the others, the losers must be matched to determine second place, and this principle holds in any tourna­ment, except in volleyball and tennis. If a school participates in the drawing it shall be considered "actual participation" in the contest. 16. AU-Round Champwnship Requirement.-No school shall be eligible to the all-round championship that does not place in at least three different contests of those above enumerated and in both athletic and non-athletic contests. In track and field a school has not "placed" unless it wins at least third place in the meet as determined by total points. 17. Division of Points Among Schools Tied.-In case two schools are tied for first place, add first and second place points, and divide the sum equally between the two schools which are tied, awarding no second place * No points allocated because district meet Journalism Contests are not conducted in all districts. See Section 7, Journalism Contest Rules. t One-Act play casts transferred out of their district are to be awarded points in their "home" district. For detailed instruction, contact the State Office. points, the school ranking next to the two schools tied receiving third place points; in case two schools are tied for second place, add second and third place points, and divide equally the sum between the two schools which are tied, and award no third place points; and so on. In case two schools are tied for first place and two tied for second place, add first place points to half of second place points and divide equally between two schools tide for first place. Add all third places points to half of second place points and divide equally between the two schools tied for second place. Award no third place. Regional Meets 18. Qualification.-District winners in each contest qualify to the re­gional meet from each conference as listed below: One Conference B and A Debate Team (composed of either boys or girls or one boy and one girl) One Girls' Debate Team (Conferences AA, AAA, AAAA) One Boys' Debate Team (Conferences AA, AAA, AAAA) One Prose Reading (Girl) One Prose Reading (Boy) One Poetry Interpretation (Girl) One Poetry Interpretation (Boy) One Persuasive Speaking (Girl) One Persuasive Speaking (Boy) One Informative Speaker (Girl) One Informative Speaker (Boy) One One-Act Play One Girls' Tennis Doubles Team (Senior Division) One Boys' Tennis Doubles Team (Senior Division) One Girls' Tennis Singles Player (Senior Division) One Boys' Tennis Singles Player (Senior Division) Two Ready Writers Two Science Two Track and Field Two Number Sense Two Slide Rule Two Boys' Golf Singles Two Boys' Golf Teams Two Journalism (see revised qualifying procedure in Journalism Con­ test plan) Three Shorthand Three Typewriting Names of the regional centers and officers will b_~ published in the Inter­scholastic Leaguer. Entries in the regional meet shall be in the office of the regional director on Monday preceding the day of the meet. Although the director general is expected to exert every effort to notify all member schools in the region of the date of the regional meet, the prin­cipal or superintendent of each school having qualified representatives is responsible for ascertaining the date of the meet. 19. Duties of the Regional Executive Committee.-Each region of this organization as designated in the Interscholastic leaguer shall be under the general charge of an executive committee to be appointed by the State Executive Committee, and shall consist of a director general as chairman, a director of literary contests, a director of athletics, a director of one-act plays, and three school administrators appointed by the State Executive Committee. The public school administrators on the Regional Executive Committee shall have jurisdiction on all disputes arising at the Regional Meet. See Article XII. The foregoing shall constitute the voting members of the respective com­mittees. It shall be the duty of such committees to have immediate charge of the contests in a given center; and to schedule final contests within date limits specified in the calendar. The director general shall have general charge of arrangements for the contests and appoint such other contest directors as are necessary. Furthermore, it is the duty of the regional executive committee to ar­range the programs of their respective meets solely in the interest of the schools and participants, using just as little school time as possible, and necessitating just as little expense and travel as possible for pupils, their teachers and coaches. 20. Regional Meets.-lt shall be the duty of the regional executive committee to hold regional contests in accordance with the schedule in Rule 18 of this section. All entries in the regional meet shall be in the office of the regional direc­tor on Monday preceding the day of the meet. 21. Supplies.-The State Office will mail all supplies for the regional meet, such as blanks, tests, etc., necessary for the holding of the meet, to the regional director. State Meet 22. State Meet.-Winners from the regional meet shall be entitled to enter the State Meet held annually at The University of Texas on the first Thursday, Friday, and Saturday of May. Contestants qualify from each re­ gion to the State Meet as listed in this section from each conference. One Conference B and A Debate Team (Composed of either boys or girls or a boy and a girl) One Boys' Debate Team (Conferences AA, AAA, and AAAA) One Girls' Debate Team (Conferences AA, AAA, and AAAA) One Prose Reading (Girl) One Prose Reading (Boy) One Poetry Interpretation (Girl) One Poetry Interpretation (Boy) One Persuasive Speaking {Girl) One Persuasive Speaking {Boy) One Informative Speaker (Girl) One Informative Speaker {Boy) One One-Act Play One Girls' Tennis Doubles Team {Senior Division) One Boys' Tennis Doubles Team (Senior Division) One Girls' Tennis Singles Player {Senior Division) One Boys' Tennis Singles Player (Senior Division) Two 1ournalism Two Ready Writers One Boys' Golf Singles One Boys' Golf Team Two Track and Field Two Science Two Shorthand Two Typewriting Two Number Sense Two Slide Rule 23. Lodging.-The State Executive Committee will undertake to pro­vide paid lodging for all contestants and faculty representatives, as specified in this article, at the final meeting of the League. The large number of con­testants and faculty representatives renders it impossible to furnish lodging to parents, visitors, and those not specified in Rule 22. The State Office cannot provide any free lodging for contestants and sponsors. 24. Certification.-Entries to the State Meet shall be in the State Office not later than 10 days before the State Meet. The regional director gen­eral shall report the regional winners in all contests as entrants at the State Meet. Each school qualifying contestants in track and field shall sub­mit an entry blank, giving the full name of the contestant and the event in which he is entered. See the track and field section for special rules governing entries for the final meet. Contest Rules Rules in Literary Contests: Speech Debate Purpose of the Contest The purpose of this contest is to train the student to analyze a problem, to conduct thorough and adequate research, and to utilize the best principles of argumentation and evidence to present the most effective case for or against a given proposition. Debate provides invaluable training in critical thinking, quick responses, defending worthy ideas and attacking invalid ideas. It teaches the student to tolerate other points of view. Above all, debate provides training in leader­ship that is not available in any other aspect of the school curriculum. Debate exists only in democratic societies, and no democratic society can exist without debate. 1. The Propositwn.-The proposition for debate during the 1966-67 school year follows: Resolved: That the foreign aid program of the United States should be limited to non-military assistance. Entries 2. Representation.-The debating contest in the League shall be con­ducted in one division in conferences B and A Spring Meet districts and in two divisions in each of the other conferences. In conferences B and A, a school may enter one team, composed of two boys, two girls, or a boy and a girl. In conferences AA, AAA and AAAA, a school may enter in its district meet two teams, one of boys and one of girls. In case there are not more than four schools entered in a district meet, each school may double its representation with approval of district committee. 3. Eligibility.-Each debater entered must be eligible under Article VIII of the Constitution. Furthermore, only pupils in high school are eligible for this contest. 4. Substitutions.-After a given tournament has begun, no substitutions shall be allowed on a team which begins the tournament. See Rule 10, "Sub­stitution," Spring Meet Plan. Preparation 5. Coaching for Debate.-Aside from the bulletins furnished by the State Office, and other reading matter, the assistance furnished contestants in pre­paring debates shall not exceed the following: (a) aid in outlining the argu­ments; (b) citing sources of information; and ( c) suggestions as to delivery. Whenever a debater quotes at any length the words of another, the fact must be plainly stated. Conduct of Conkst 6. Eliminations.-The district championship may be decided by tourna­ment or round-robin, as the district committee directs. It is suggested that the debate sponsors in each district hold a preliminary planning meeting. See Rule 17, debate. At the Regional and State Meets the championship shall be determined by tournament procedure. 7. Choice of Sides.-ln all debates the affirmative and negative sides shall be determined either by mutual consent or by lot. If either team wishes to do so, the side must be determined by lot. It is suggested that the director or his assistant place negative and affirmative on slips of paper and have the team draw the side from a receptacle. Sides may also be determined by the flip of a coin. The choice of sides shall be made as soon as practicable after opponents for the next round are determined. In the tournament procedure, the side may be designated on the bracket prior to drawing, i.e., Team No. 1 affirma· tive, vs. Team No. 2 negative; Team No. 3 affirmative, vs. Team No. 4 negative, etc. In this method the drawing determines the side as well as the position on the bracket. 8. The Time and Order of Speeches.-Time and order of speeches shall be as follows : CONSTRUCTIVE Affirmative, 10 minutes. Negative, 10 minutes. Affirmative, 10 minutes. Negative, 10 minutes. REBUTTAL Negative, 5 minutes. Affirmative, 5 minutes. Negative, 5 minutes. Affirmative, 5 minutes. In rebuttal either team may present its speakers in reverse order of appear­ance in the constructive speech. If this is to be done, it is suggested that the team intending to do so inform both the judge and their opponents before the debate begins. 9. Timekeeper: Signal Standards.-The timekeeper shall announce to the debaters PRIOR to the contest the types of time signals he will give. Either time cards or hand signals may be used. If hand signals are used, the following signals (by fingers) are suggested: Constructive Speeches: (First four 10-minute speeches) After 5 minutes have elapsed, give a signal of 5 fingers. After 7 minutes have elapsed, give a signal of 3 fingers. After 9 minutes have elapsed, give a signal of 1 finger. After 10 minutes have elapsed, the timekeeper should stand. Rebuttal Speeches: (Last four 5-minute speeches) After 2 minutes have elapsed, give a signal of 3 fingers. After 4 minutes have elapsed, give a signal of 1 finger. After 5 minutes have elapsed, the timekeeper should stand. If timecards are used, the timekeeper may use the above time signal or elect to indicate the exact time in minutes. If a complete set of timecards is used (numbered from 10 to STOP) , the timekeeper will hold these cards so that the debaters will have a constant check on the time remaining them in each speech. During each of the Constructive Speeches, (that is, the first four 10-minute speches), when the speaker begins to talk, hold the card marked "10" so that the speaker may see it. When the speaker has talked for one minute, turn to the card marked "9" which indicates to him that he has 9 minutes remaining, etc. When the speaker has spoken for 9 minutes, you will display the card marked "l." When the speaker has spoken for 91h minutes, display the card marked "1h·" At the end of 10 full minutes of speaking, display the card marked "STOP." During the rebuttal speeches (that is, the last four 5-minute speeches), when the speaker begins to talk, hold the card marked "5" so that the speaker may see it. When he has spoken for one minute, turn to the card marked "4"; then "3"; etc. You may also give the "lh" card signal in rebuttal speeches. When a speaker uses all of his allotted time, in either the Constructive or Rebuttal Speeches, the timekeeper should stand. Duties of Contest Director 10. Coaching During a Debate.-In all contests the debaters shall be sep­arated from the audience and shall receive no coaching while the debate is in progress. It is suggested that at least one empty row of seats separate the debaters from the audience. By "coaching" is meant viva voce or other prompting either by the speaker's colleague or by any other person while the debater has the floor. A debater may, however, refer to his notes and materials. 11. lnterruptions.-The contest director should permit no interruption of a speaker during a debate. No cheering shall be permitted during the debate, and the presiding officer shall see that this rule is strictly enforced. 12. f udges.-The judges for the debating contests may be an odd number of judges or a single critic judge, selected on the basis of capability and im· partiality. The judge, or judges, for the district contests shall be chosen by the district executive committee, subject to approval of a majority of the schools concerned. The regional directors of debate shall select competent and unbiased judges for judging the regional tournaments. For the final contest at the University the judges shall be chosen by the State Director. The judges shall sit apart during a contest in order to hear the speakers from different parts of the room. 13. Schools Represented Not to Be Known by the f udges.-So far as possible, the judges shall not know the school a debating team represents, the contestants to be designated as the "affirmative" or the "negative." 14. Debates Shall Be Public.-All matched contests in debate among members of the League shall be open to the public. This provision, of course, is not meant to prohibit charging of admission fee. 15. Instructions to the f udges.-A copy of the instructions, provided by the State Office, shall be given to each judge. The director of the contest is charged with the responsibility of enforcing these instructions and only the most flagrant delinquency in this matter will be considered grounds for protest. 16. Protests.-Protests must be made before the decision of the judges is announced; decision of the judges is final. No argument with the judges will be permitted. 17. Planning Meeting.-Speech sponsors in each district are urged to hold a preliminary planning meeting in advance of the organizing date for district contests. Recommendations resulting from this meeting concerning site, judging, and other contest procedures may be made to the district di­rector general and district contest directors. Individual Speech Contests The purpose of each of the individual speech contests is to stimulate the ability of the student to communicate ideas and information to an audience. In the informative speaking and persuasive speaking contests, these ideas are essentially those of the speaker, derived from his background of research on current events. In poetry interpretation and prose reading, the student is challenged to ascertain and then communicate the ideas of an author, based on his understanding and research. General Instructions 1. fudging (All individual speech contests). Judging may be by an odd number of panel judges or by one critic judge. In any event, the contest director should make every attempt to secure com­petent judges, who have had training in the field of speech. A copy of the judging instructions (provided by the State Office) will be given to each judge. Contest directors are responsible for explaining these instructions fo the judges. 2. Ranking the Contestants. At the close of the contest, the judge or judges shall rank the speakers by numbers: 1, 2, 3", etc. In the case of panel judging, a speaker ranked first by a majority of the judges shall be awarded first place. Ballots should be counted in the presence of the contest director. In the event that no speaker is ranked first by a majority of the judges, the contestant the sum of whose ranks is least shall be awarded first place. Other places shall be determined in the same manner. If, however, two contestants receive a majority of seconds or better, and the sum of ranks are equal, the tie shall be broken by the use of judges' pref­erence. For example, if two contestants are tied for any place by virtue of each receiving identical sum of ranks as in this sample: Judge A Judge B Judge C First speaker 2 5 3 Second speaker 4 2 4 then it should be noted that Judge A ranks the first speaker above the second speaker; Judge B ranks the second speaker above the first speaker; Judge C ranks the first speaker above the second speaker. This results in Judge A Judge B Judge C First speaker 1 2 1 Second speaker 2 1 2 should a three-way tie occur, it will be necessary to break the tie by a method of chance (flipping a coin, etc.). 3. Timekeeper and Signal Standards: A timekeper shall be provided for each contest. The timekeeper shall announce to the contestants, prior to the contest, the types of time signals he will give. The timekeeper's signals should always indicate the time re­maining for the speaker, i.e., proceed from 7 to 1. A timekeeper may use either hand signals or time cards to indicate to the speaker the remaining time. The following hand signals are recommended if timecards are not used: (signal with fingers) After 3 minutes have elapsed, give a signal of 4 fingers. After 5 minutes have elapsed, give a signal of 2 fingers. After 6 minutes have elapsed, give a signal for 1 finger. After 7 minutes have elapsed, the timekeeper will stand. If timecards are available, the timekeeper may use the above time signals or elect to indicate the exact time in minutes. When the speaker begins to talk, he would hold the card marked "7" so that the speaker may see it. When the speaker has talked for one minute, he would turn to the card marked "6," which indicates that he has 6 minutes remaining, etc. At the end of the full 7 minutes he would stand, thus indicating that the total al­lotted time has been consumed. The speaker may complete the sentence on which he is speaking without disqualification. Informative Speaking Purpose of the Contest The purpose of this contest is to stimulate an active interest in current affairs at the state, national and international levels, and to learn to present extemporaneously in a clear and impartial manner the facts about a subject as they appear in the best available sources of information. This contest is an exercise in clear thinking and informing the public on the issues and concerns of the American people. The objective is information, interestingly told, and should not include an attempt to change the listener's mind except as the information itself may do so. This contest is especially suited to the younger and less experienced stu­dent who needs mostly to become informed about current issues and public affairs before he is ready to advocate a solution. Entries 1. Divisions.-Senior boys and senior girls. 2. Representation.-Each member school in all conferences may enter one boy and one girl in the appropriate division. If no more than four schools are entered in either division in the district, schools may double representa­tion with permission of the district executive committee. 3. Eligibility.-Each contestant must be eligible under Article VIII of the Constitution and Contest Rules. Only pupils in high school are eligible for this contest. , Preparation 4. Sources.-Students should prepare for this contest by reading a daily newspaper, and any of the many news magazines, as well as listening and watching radio and television news broadcasts. Schools will be notified of available publications and lists of topics through the Leaguer. These maga­zines are particularly helpful: Time, Newsweek, Vital Speeches of the Day, Our Times, Scholastic, U. S. News and World Report. One of the most valuable newspaper sources is Section 4, "The News of Week in Review," in the Sunday edition of The New York Times. 5. Topics.-Topics for informative speaking shall be based on current news events. They shall include topics from state, national and international levels. They will be chosen from the general areas of political, social, eco­nomic, educational, and cultural interests. Sample topics will be published from time to time in the Leaguer. Sample topics may be obtained from the League Office. The topic shall be worded so as to require the student to in­form his audience. He should avoid attempts to persuade the audience or judges. Conduct of the Contest 6. Drawing.-The League Office shall furnish the director in charge with topics in a sealed envelope. The director shall clip up the circular containing topics, leaving one topic on each slip. These slips shall be placed in a re­ceptacle and each contestant shall be required to draw out five slips. He may then take as his topic any one of the five slips so drawn. After the con­testant has made his selection and the director in charge has duly recorded it, four of the five slips which he has drawn shall be placed back in the re­ceptacle and the slips mixed before the next contestant draws; and so on. If preliminaries are necessary, the process shall be repeated for selection of topics for the final contest. (Another set of topics will be furnished for areas holding preliminaries.) The director of the contest, or his representa­tive, shall announce distinctly, and the judges shall understand clearly, the topic each contestant has chosen. See Rule 12, "Announcement of Topics." The contest director is responsible for destroying all unused topics. 7. The Preparation Period: Procedure and Timing.-It will be found convenient to provide at least two rooms for the contestants in informative speaking. From the room in which the drawing occurs, the first speaker is admitted to the preparation room. A preparation room monitor shall be on duty to make certain that the contestants work quietly in preparing their speeches. After the contestant draws a topic, he should not discuss it with others. If possible, a different preparation room may be assigned for each speaker so that he may have complete privacy. At the end of half an hour the contestant is sent on to the contest room to deliver his speech, the director having in the meantime, admitted other speakers at about five-minute intervals to the preparation room, and so on until the contest is completed. 8. Restrictions in Preparation Room.-Speakers may use magazines, newspapers, and other printed source materials to assist in preparing their speeches. Typed, mimeographed or hand-written materials may not be car­ried to the preparation room, except, however, a card index file which has been prepared by the student for the sole purpose of convenience in finding references to specific topics may be used. 9. Restriction on Notes.-The speaker may not use notes contammg more than 100 words when he delivers his speech. It is suggested that the student learn to outline his speech in an organized manner so that maximum utilization of the notes may be achieved. 10. Length of Speeches.-lnformative speeches shall not be longer than seven minutes. There shall be no minimum time. Students are to be en­couraged to speak to the topic and not to "pad" in order to achieve a mini­mum time. 11. Timekeeper and Signal, Standards.-A timekeeper shall be provided for each contest. He shall notify the speaker by prearranged signal of the re· maining alloted time. The speaker may complete the sentence on which he is speaking without disqualification, after he has consumed his allotted time. Duties of the Contest Director 12. Announcement of Topic.-The director in charge of the contest, or his representative, shall announce the title drawn by each speaker. The director must see that the judge or judges have the topics before speakers begin. The practice of having each speaker announce his own topic before beginning to speak should be discouraged. 13. lnterruptions.-Contest directors must not permit any interruption of the speakers during the contest. Cheering is not permitted. 14. fud ging.-Judging may be by an odd number of panel judges or by one critic judge. A copy of the judging instructions (provided by the State Office) will be given to each judge. Contest directors are responsible for ex· explaining these instructions to the judges. See Rule 1, Individual Events, General Instructions. 15. Preliminaries.-ln case there are more than nine entries in any meet in this event, there shall be held a preliminary which shall reduce the num­ber for the final contest to six or less. In case this is necessary, a new set of topics shall be prepared for the final contest. 16. Ranking Contestants.-See Rule 2, Individual Events, General In­structions. Persuasive Speaking Purpose of the Contest The purpose of this contest is to train the student to analyze a current is­sue, determine a point of view for himself, and then to organize and deliver extemporaneously a speech that seeks to persuade his listeners to agree with his viewpoint. The objective is to reinforce the views of listeners who already believe as the speaker does, but even more so, to bring those of neutral or opposite views around to the speaker's beliefs or proposed course of action. This contest is somewhat more challenging than the companion contest in informative speaking and should be entered by the more experienced speakers. Students who excelled in the informative speaking contest pre­ viously might look upon this contest as a progression to a greater challenge. It should appeal to those in particular who have a strong argumentative urge and who wish to advocate reforms or outline solutions for current problems. Entries 1. Divisions.-Senior boys and senior girls. 2. Representation.-Each member school in all conferences may enter one boy and one girl in the appropriate division. If no more than four schools are entered in either division in the district, schools may double representation with permission of the district executive committee. 3. Eligibility.-Each contestant must be eligible under Article VIII of the Constitution and Contest Rules. Only pupils in high school are eligible for this contest. Preparation 4. Sources.-Students should prepare for this contest by reading a daily newspaper, and any of the many news magazines, as well as listening and watching radio and television news broadcasts. Schools will be notified of available publications and lists of topics through the Leaguer. These maga­zines are particularly helpful: Time, Newsweek, Vital Speeches of the Day, Our Times, Scholastic, U.S. News and World Report. One of the most valu­able newspaper sources is Section 4, "The News of Week in Review," in the Sunday edition of The New York Times. 5. Topics.-Topics for persuasive speaking shall be based on current news events. They shall include topics from state, national and international levels. They will be chosen from the general areas of political, social, eco­nomic, educational,' and cultural interests. Sample topics will be published from time to time in the leaguer. Sample topics may be obtained from the League Office. The topics will be worded so as to elicit persuasive speeches rather than informative speeches. The topics will require a contestant to con­vince or persuade the audience and judges to accept his point of view. The contestant takes a stand for or against a particular proposition. Conduct of the Contest 6. Drawing.-The League Office shall furnish the director in charge with topics in a sealed envelope. The director shall clip up the circular containing topics, leaving one topic on each slip. These slips shall be placed in a re­ceptacle and each contestant shall be required to draw out five slips. He may then take as his topic any one of the five slips so drawn. After the contestant has made his selection and the director in charge has duly recorded it, four of the five slips. which he has drawn shall be placed back in the receptacle and the slips mixed before the next contestant draws; and so on. If preliminaries are necessary, the process shall be repeated for selection of topics for the final contest. (Another set of topics will be furnished for areas holding preliminaries.) The director of the contest, or his representa­tive, shall announce distinctly, and the judges shall understand clearly, the topic each contestant has chosen. (See Rule 12, "Announcement of Topics.") The contest director is responsible for destroying all unused topics. 7. The Preparation Period: Procedure and Timing.-It will be found con­venient to provide at least two rooms for the contestants in persuasive speak­ing. From the room in which the drawing occurs, the first speaker is ad­mitted to the preparation room. A preparation room monitor shall be on duty to make certain that the contestants work quietly in preparing their speeches. After the contestant draws a topic, he should not discuss it with others. If possible, a different preparation room may be assigned for each speaker so that he may have complete privacy. At the end of half an hour the contestant is sent on to the contest room to deliver his speech, the director having in the meantime admitted other speakers at about five-minute intervals to the preparation room, and so on until the contest is completed. 8. Restrictions in Preparatwn Room.-Speakers may use magazines, newspapers, and other printed source materials to assist in preparing their speeches. Typed, mimeographed or hand-written materials may not be car­ried to the preparation room, except, however, a card index file which has been prepared by the student for the sole purpose of convenience in finding references to specific topics may be used. 9. Restrictwns on Notes.-The speaker may not use notes containing more than 100 words when he delivers his speech. It is suggested that the student learn to outline his speech in an organized manner so that maximum utili­zation of the notes may be achieved. 10. Length of Speeches.-Persuasive speeches shall not be longer than seven minutes. There shall be no minimum time. Students are encouraged to present their speeches succintly without attempting "to fill" to achieve a minimum time. 11. Timekeeper and Signal Standards.-A timekeeper shall be provided for each contest who shall notify the speaker by prearranged signal of the re· maining allotted time. The sp~aker may complete the sentence on which he is speaking without disqualification, after he has consumed his allotted time. See Rule 3 Individual Events, General Instructions. Duties of the Contest Director 12. Announcement of the Topic.-The director in charge of the contest, or his representative, shall announce the title drawn by each speaker. The di­rector must see that the judge or judges have the topics before speakers be­gin. The practice of having each speaker announce his own topic before be­ginning to speak should be discouraged. 13. lnterruptions.-Contest directors must not permit any interruption of the speakers during the contest. Cheering is not permitted. 14. Judging.-Judging may be by an odd number of panel judges or by one critic judge. A copy of the judging instructions (provided by the State Office) will be given to each judge. Contest directors are responsible for ex· plaining these instructions to the judges. See Rule 1, Individual Events, General Instructions. 15. Preliminaries.-In case there are more than nine entries in any meet in this event, there shall be held a preliminary which shall reduce the num­ber for the final contest to six or less. In case this is necessary, a new set of topics shall be prepared for the final contest. 16. Ranking Contestants.-See Rule 2, Individual Events, General In­structions. Poetry Interpretation Purpose of the Contest The purpose of this contest is to train the student to ascertain the meaning of poetry and to communicate that meaning to the listener. Another basic goal of oral interpretation is to stimulate the reader's appreciation of litera­ture. Oral interpretation might also be defined as creative reading. The reader communicates the connotative meanings of poetry (as he interprets them) in addition to the simple denotative meaning of the words being read. One level is that of simple communication, in which the major purpose is to convey the idea accurately. Another level is that of artistic performance, in which the reader attempts to communicate the inner feelings, the emotions and the ideas inherent in the literary work through the medium of oral reading. The oral interpreter might ask himself these questions: 1. How can I, the reader, determine the meaning of the poem? 2. What techniques can I use to give expression to this meaning and thereby induce someone else to appre· ciate the poet's art? 3. How can this best be accomplished within the frame· work of oral reading? Entries 1. Divisions.-Senior boys and senior girls. 2. Representation.-Each member school in all conferences may enter one boy and one girl in the appropriate division. If no more than four schools are entered in either division in the district, schools may double representa· tion with permission of the district executive committee. 3. Eligibility.-Each contestant must be eligible under Article VIII of the Constitution and Contest Rules. Only pupils in high school are eligible for this contest. Preparation 4. Preparation.-The contestant must prepare three selections, one selec­tion from each of the following three categories: a. Works by the following selected poets: W. H. Auden, Robert Bridges, T. S. Eliot, Thomas Hardy, Ralph Hodgson, Gerard Manley Hopkins, A. E. Housman, Stephen Spender, Dylan Thomas, William Butler Yeats. b. Works by the following selected poets: Langston Hughes, Stanley Kunitz, Claude McKay, Marianne Moore, John Crowe Ransom, Kenneth Rexroth, Carl Sandburg, Wallace Stevens, John Updike, Richard Wilbur. c. Works by the following selected poets: Robert Browning, William Cullen Bryant, Lord Byron, Samuel T. Coleridge, Oliver Wendell Holmes, John Keats, Henry Wadsworth Longfellow, Percy Bysshe Shelley, Alfred Lord Tennyson, John Greenleaf Whittier. Recordings of many of the above poets' works are available. (All are re­corded except Bridges, Hodgson in category a; McKay and Updike in cate­gory b; Bryant, Holmes, and Whittier in category c.) Each selection may be one poem, a cutting of a poem, or a combination of several poems. Each selection, including the introduction, must not exceed seven minutes. Inclusion of an introduction is optional with the contestant. Poetry Interpretation is the art of reading aloud from the printed page. The term "interpretation" is used to designate the process of communicating orally the intellectual and emotional content of a poem while reading the actual poem itself. The contestant will bring to the contest in a folder or a small notebook one typed or handwritten copy of each of the three selections he has prepared himself to interpret. 5. Bibliography.-The philosophy and techniques of oral reading apply both to the poetry interpretation and prose reading contests. Current text­books that should be helpful to contestants and sponsors include: Communicative Reading, (second edition} Otis J. Aggert and Elbert R. Bowen, New York: The Macmillan Company, 1963, $6.00. The Oral Interpretation of Literature, Chloe Armstrong and Paul D. Brandes, New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1963, $5.95. The Art of Interpretation, Wallace A. Bacon, New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Inc., 1966. Literature for Interpretation, Wallace A. Bacon and Robert S. Breen, New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1961, $4.25. The Oral Study of Literature, Robert Beloof, Chester Clayton Long, Sey­mour Chatman, Thomas 0. Sloan, Mark S. Klyn, New York: Random House, 1966. Oral Interpretation, Paul N. Campbell, New York: The Macmillan Com­pany, 1966. Theory and Technique of Interpretation, Martin Cobin, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1959, $4.95. Interpretation for Our Time, Baxter M. Getting, Dubuque, Iowa: William C. Brown Company Publishers, 1966, $5.75. Oral Interpretation, (third edition), Charlotte I. Lee, New York: Hough­ton Mifflin, 1965, $6.25. Skill in Reading Aloud, Joseph F. Smith and James R. Linn, New York: Harper and Brothers, 1960, $5.00. Interpretation, Wilma H. Grimes and Alethea Smith Mattingly, Belmont, California: Wadsworth Publishing Company, Inc., 1961, $5.95. Conduct of Contest 6. Drawing for Places.-The contestants will draw for speaking order. 7. Selecting the Category.-The director in charge of the contest will place in a receptacle three slips on which are written the names of the three categories that the contestants have prepared--one to a slip. In the presence of the contestants one of the judges will draw one slip from the receptacle. The contestants will be bound by this one drawing of the judge, i.e., in any one contest they will all present selections belonging to one category. 8. Rooms.-It is suggested that a contestant not hear the other contestants who speak BEFORE him. In conducting this contest, two rooms will be needed: one room in which the contestants will remain after they have drawn for places, and one room for holding the contest. 9. Restrictions.-A typewritten or handwritten copy of the selections must be made and placed in some type of stiff-backed folder which is to be held by the contestant during the contest. Reading from books or magazines is not permitted. 10. Length of Speeches.-The total time for presentation (including op­tional introduction) shall not exceed seven minutes. 11. Timekeeper and Signal Standards.-A timekeeper shall be provided for each contest who shall notify the contestants of the time remaining of their total allotted time. He shall announce PRIOR to the contest the types of time signals he will give. See Rule 3, Individual Events, General Instructions. Duties of Contest Director 12. Programs.-The contest director shall conduct a drawing for speaker order among the contestants. 13. lnterruptions.-No coaching shall be permitted during the contest. The contest director, or his monitor, shall prevent any interruption of a speaker during a contest. No cheering is to be permitted. 14. fudging.-Judging may be by an odd number of panel judges or by one critic judge. A copy of the judging instructions {provided by the State Office) will be given to each judge. Contest directors are responsible for ex­plaining these instructions to the judges. See Rule 1, Individual Events, Gen­ eral Instructions. Sponsors may request copies of judging instructions from the State Office. 15. Preliminaries.-In case there are more than nine entries in this event, there shall be held a preliminary which shall reduce the number for the final contest to six or less. If preliminaries are necessary, one of the judges shall draw a category as before, and all contestants will be bound by this drawing. 16. Ranking Contestants.-See Rule 2, Individual Events, General lrr­structions. 17. Protests.-Protests must be made to the contest director before the decision of the judges is rendered; decision of the judges is final. Prose Reading Purpose of the Contest The purpose of this contest is to stimulate the student to find the meaning of printed prose and to communicate that meaning orally to his listeners. Participation in the contest should also assist the student to develop critical techniques in the evaluation of prose. Prose reading provides a challenge to the student in the process of adapt­ ing written prose to oral discourse. The student is able to enhance the mini­ mal denotative meaning of the printed word with the subtleties of vocal connotations and thus provide the listener with aesthetic pleasure in addition to meaning. The contest should be a natural outgrowth of regular classroom activity and lend itself to in-class preparation. Entries 1. Divisions.-Senior boys and senior girls. 2. Representation.-Each member school in all conferences may enter one boy and one girl in the appropriate division. If no more than four schools are entered in either division in the district, schools may double representa­tion with permission of the district executive committee. 3. Eligibility.-Each contestant must be eligible under Article VIII of the Constitution and Contest Rules. Only pupils in high school are eligible for this contest. Preparation 4. Preparation.-The student should prepare selections for a contest in oral prose reading. Prose reading is neither a contest in dramatic interpre­talion nor acting. The categories are designed to test the ability of a student to read orally a selection from one of three different categories of prose in the manner of contemporary courses in oral reading. Each student must prepare three selections, one selection in each of the following three categories: a. Public Address. This category includes serious public speeches dealing with significant affairs or problems, either contemporary or histori­cal, such as are found in the magazine Vital Speeches of the Day and in the annual publication Representative American Speeches. Student speeches written for oratorical contests, or those selections formerly used in Senior Declamation, are excluded from this category. b. Written Commentary. This category includes editorials, syndicated columns, formal essays or those with primarily reasoned or logical appeals, and radio and television commentary. Examples include: Erwin D. Canham, Kenneth Crawford, Roscoe Drummond, Joseph C. Harsch, Arthur Krock, Walter Lippmann, Ralph McGill, Edward P. Morgan, James Reston, Carl Rowan, Eric Severeid, C. L. Sulzberger, William H. Stringer, Walter Kronkite, etc., as well as "quality" edi­torials in various newspapers and magazines. c. Literary Prose. This category includes short stories, informal essays, biography, autobiography, historical narratives, and other fiction. Cuttings from plays and any other dramatic types of reading that require acting are excluded from this category. Selections from the Bible are excluded from this contest. Students should avoid selections which require acting techniques to be effective. The contestant will bring to the contest in a folder or a small notebook one typed or handwritten copy of each of the three selections he has pre· pared himself to read effectively. The contestant will hold the folder or note· book during his presentation. 5. References.-The sponsor may request copies of judging instructions from the State Office. 6. Biblwgraphy.-The following collections of speeches and indices are available for use in category a: The Speakers Resource Book, Carrol C. Arnold and Douglas Ehninger, Chicago: Scott, Foresman and Company, 1961, $3.25. American Public Addresses, 1740-1952, A. Craig Baird, editor, New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., 1956, $5.50. Representative American Speeches, A. Craig Baird, New York: The H. W. Wilson Company (annually, 1938 to date) , $3.00. Speech Index: An Index to 64 Collectwns of World Famous Orations and Speeches for Various Occasions, Roberta Briggs Sutton (compiler), New York: The H. W. Wilson Company, 1935. Speech Index 1935-1955, Roberta Briggs Sutton, New York: The Scare­crow Press, Inc., 1956, $8.50. American Speeches on Twentieth Century Issues, New York: Harper and Row, Publishers, 1962, $5.50. Vital Speeches of the Day [a magazine], 1 Wolf's Lane, Pelham, N. Y. Representative American Speeches, 950 University Avenue, N. Y. 10052. Time, Rockefeller Center, New York, N. Y. 10020. Newsweek, 350 Dennison Avenue, Dayton 0. 45401 Conduct of the,Contest 6. Drawing for Places.-The contestants will draw for speaking order. 7. Selecting the Category.-The contest director will place in a receptacle three slips on which are written the names of the three categories that the contestants have prepared-one to a slip. In the presence of the contestants one of the judges will draw one slip from the receptacle. The contestants will be bound by this one drawing of the judge, i.e., in any one contest they will all present selections belonging to one category. 8. Rooms.-lt is suggested that a contestant not hear the other speakers who speak BEFORE him. In conducting this contest, two rooms will be needed: one room in which the contestants will remain after they have drawn for places, and one room for holding the contest. 9. Restrictions.-A typewritten or handwritten copy of the selections must be made and placed in some type of stiff-backed folder which is to be held by the contestant during the contest. Reading from books or magazines is not permitted. 10. Length of Speeches.-The total time for presentation (including op· tional introduction) shall not exceed seven minutes. 11. Timekeeper and Signal Standards.-A timekeeper shall be provided for each contest who shall notify the contestants of the time remaining of their total allotted time. He shall announce PRIOR to the contest the types of time signals he will give. See Rule 3, Individual Events, General Instructions. Duties of the Contest Director 12. Programs.-The contest director shall conduct a drawing for speaker order among the contestants. 13. /nterruptions.-No coaching shall be permitted during the contest. The contest director, or his monitor, shall prevent any interruption of a speaker during a contest. No cheering is to be permitted. 14. fudging.-Judging may b('! by an odd number of panel judges or by one critic judge. A copy of the judging instructions (provided by the State Office) will be given to each judge. Contest directors are responsible for ex· plaining these instructions to the judges. See Rule 1, Individual Events, General Instructions. 15. Preliminaries.-ln case there are more than nine entries in this event, there shall be held a preliminary which shall reduce the number for the final contest to six or less. If preliminaries are necessary, one of the judges shall draw a category as before, and all contestants will be bound by this drawing. 16. Ranking Contestants.-See Rule 2, Individual Events; General Jn. structions. 17. Protests.-Protests must be made to the contest director before the decision of the judges is rendered; decision of the judges is final. Optional Junior High School Speech Contests The junior high schools in any junior high school district may elect. to hold any of the regular speech contests including debate, extemporaneous (informative) speaking, persuasive speaking, poetry interpretation, and prose reading at the regular District Meet. The winners of these district contests may not advance beyond the district level. Junior High School-Elementary School Contest Oral Reading Purpose of the Contest The oral reading contest (formerly the contest in declamation) is designed to provide junior high school and elementary school contestants with a con· test in oral reading and to prepare them for the contests in oral interpretation and prose reading conducted in high school. The term "oral reading" is used to clarify the basic purpose of the contest, which is to convey the mean· ing of a printed selection to an audience by reading orally from a manu· script. Although memory was once stressed as a method of delivering poetry, the majority of current contests in high schools and colleges today require reading from a manuscript, so this contest has been revised to conform to contemporary classroom and tournament practice. Entries 1. Divisions.-There shall be two divisions in oral reading: junior boys and junior girls. 2. Representation.-Each member school shall be entitled to enter one speaker in each division in the district meet. If no more than four schools are entered in either division schools may double their representation in that division with permission of the district executive committee. 3. Eligibility.-Each oral reader must be eligible under Article VIII of the Constitution. Furthermore, only pupils in elementary and junior high schools are eligible for this contest. Preparation 4. a. Elementary.-Students shall read from manuscript selections of standard poetry. Each selection may be one poem, a cutting of a poem, or a combination of several poems. Dramatic or humorous readings are excluded. The State Office does not issue a prescribed list of poems for this contest. b. Grades Seven and Eight.-Same as elementary. c. Grade Nine.-Students shall read from a manuscript selections of standard prose. Each selection may be a single prose reading, a cutting from a longer prose selection, or a combination of several prose writings. Dra­matic or humorous readings are excluded, The State Office does not issue a prescribed list of prose writings for this contest. Conduct of the Contest 5. Procedure, Rooms.-The order of speaking in all preliminary contests shall be determined by lot. After the contestants have drawn for places in the contest, they should be placed in a room other than the contest room. They should appear singly in the order determined by lot. Speakers may remain in the audience after they read, if they so desire. 6. Length of Readings.-The total time for presentation shall not exceed five minutes. There is no minimum time limit. 7. Timekeeper and Signal Standards.-A timekeeper shall be provided for each contest, who shall notify the contestants of the time remaining of their total allotted time. He shall announce PRIOR to the contest the types of time signals he will give. See Rule 3, Individual Events, General Instructions. When the timekeeper stands, signifying that all of the contestant's allotted time has been used, the speaker shall be allowed to finish the few words of the sentence on which he is speaking at the time the final signal is given. Contestants who continue speaking after completing the sentence shall be disqualified by the presiding officer. Duties of the Contest Director 8. No Cheering.-ln order to guard against "rooting," no cheering shall be permitted during a contest, and the chairman shall see that this rule is strictly enforced. All oral reading contests shall be open to the public and an admission fee may be charged. 9. No Coaching.-No speaker shall be coached or prompted in any man· ner during the delivery of the selection. 10. ]udging.-Panel or critic judges shall be secured to judge all the contests. The judges for the district contest shall be chosen by the district execu· tive committee, subject to the approval of a majority of the schools con· cerned. See Rule 1, Individual Events, General Instructions. 11. Preliminaries.-1£ there are more than nine entries in any one divi· sion, preliminaries should be arranged by the director in charge, reducing the number in the final contest to six or less. 12. Protests on Eligibility of Selections.-Protests on the eligibility of selections must be made, before the decision of the judges is rendered, to the director in charge of the contest. If the protest is on the nature of the selec­tion, the source book from which the selection was taken must be produced and handed to the judges for their decisions as to whether the selection is poetry or prose, etc. In like manner, other protests on eligibility will be re­ferred by the director to the judges. The decisions of the judges on these matters are final. 13. Ranking the Contestants.-See Rule 2, Individual Events, General In­structions. Journalism Program and Contests DR. MAX R. HADDICK Director of f oumalism Box 8028, University Station Austin, Texas 78712 1. Interscholastic League Press Conference.-The journalism contests make up one portion of the League's competitive, critical and instructional program sponsored jointly by the League and the School of Journalism, The University of Texas. The Interscholastic League Press Conference co­ordinates the program. ILPC membership is optional for League member schools and is not required for participation in the journalism contests. ILPC membership is required for participation in the entire program of school newspaper improvement (See Section 6) . 2. Membership.-Any high school or junior high school in the state is eligible for ILPC membership if it publishes a student newspaper and is a member of the League (see Article III, Constitution). ILPC membership entitles a school to all ILPC services outlined in Section 6. Deadline for enrollment in ILPC is December 1 and all inquiries and requests for enroll­ment must be made to the Director of Journalism, Interscholastic League, Box 8028, University Station, Austin, Texas 78712. 3. Direction.-The journalism contests and ILPC program are supervised by the Director of Journalism, Interscholastic League, and an ILPC Execu­tive Committee consisting of the ILPC director and four members of the journalism faculty of The University of Texas. All communications regard­ing either the contests or the ILPC program should be addressed to the Director of Journalism, Interscholastic League. Three student officers-a president, vice-president, and secretary-are elected from ILPC member schools at the State Convention each March to serve until the following March convention. Student officers are responsible for helping evaluate ILPC policies, assisting with the State Convention and performing other duties that may be designed by the ILPC Executive Com­mittee. 4. Fees.-Enrollment in the ILPC requires a $3 membership fee to de­fray, in part, the expense of providing special services for member schools. The fee must be paid at the time of enrollment, and no later than the De­cember 1 membership deadline. No fee, other than the Interscholastic League membership fee, is required of schools desiring to participate only in the journalism contests. 5. Submission of School Papers.-ILPC members are required to mail one copy of each issue of their school newspapers, preferably at time of pub­lication, to the Director of Journalism, Interscholastic League. 6. !LPG Special Services.-ILPC offers to its members a number of special services to help improve the quality of scholastic journalism and journalism instruction in the public schools of Texas. The "High School Press" column in each issue of the Interscholastic Leaguer provides a vehicle for discussion of journalistic problems, seeking or reporting new and success­ful ideas and suggestions, answering individual questions that might have widespread application, and reporting members' activities and achievements. The ILPC provides sample contest material and helps plan and conduct special journalism workshops in many areas of the state for student staff members. Also, with the assistance of the journalism faculty, The University of Texas, consultation and advice on special problems are available to all members throughout the school year. Also: a. RATINGS--In the spring, all ILPC member newspapers are rated on the current school year's issue on file in the ILPC office (See Section 5). For the ratings, all papers are grouped according to method of publication (mimeographed, printed, or page in local paper) and, for high schools, by enrollment (average membership for last four grades in high school). Junior high school papers are rated separately, but grouped according to method of publication; high schools publishing a "page in local paper" are all rated in one separate group, regardless of enrollment. Within each grouping, certificates of rating are issued in four degrees: Award of Distinguished Merit to the outstanding papers in each class. Award of Achievement to papers which fall just short of the first degree of excellence. Award of Honor to papers of high caliber which have shown continued excellence throughout the year. Award of Merit to papers which have made contributions to the school for which they were published by maintaining a basic level of journalistic quality. No rating nor rating certificate will be given to members failing to sub­mit at least five file copies of their publications prior to Feb. 1 of the cur· rent school year. On request, papers publishing fewer than five issues by the Feb. 1 deadline will be rated on those actually published. b. CRITICISM SERVICE-ILPC members desiring a detailed criticism of their papers must pay an additional optional fee of $5 (in addition to the $3 membership fee) to defray the cost of securing competent critics. ILPC members may request this service at any time prior to the December 1 mem· bership deadline, and must submit extra copies of the issues on which the criticism is desired. No more than three different issues may be submitted for criticism, but the criticism may be made on fewer than three if requested by the journalism adviser. All criticism issues must be submitted together, but separate from the ILPC file copies of the paper (See Section 5), and must be plainly marked "For Criticism." To expedite critical work, criticism copies should be submitted as early as possible, no later than February 1. c. PAMPHLETS-Specially prepared pamphlets, providing suggestions, instructions and information on a variety of journalistic topics, are provided free of charge to ILPC members. Pamphlets are distributed to members periodically throughout the school year with new ones being prepared, and old ones being revised or reprinted, as the occasion demands. A list of avail­able pamphlets is provided ILPC members each fall. d. LENDING LIBRARY-The DeWitt Reddick Journalism Library is maintained for use by members free of charge, except for postage. Books may be borrowed for a period of 20 days, with four additional days allowed for mailing, and a fine of five cents per day is charged for overdue books. The library bibliography or addendum is mailed to ILPC members each fall. e. INDIVIDUAL ACHIEVEMENT AWARDS CONTEST-A contest is sponsored each spring for individual work published in ILPC member papers during the school year. Contests are conducted in news, editorial, sports, feature and featurette writing, photography and illustrating. Students com­pete in six divisions, corresponding to the five basketball conferences, plus a junior high school division. Individual gold (first place), silver (second place), and bronze (third place) medals are awarded in each contest in each division. Entries must be received in the ILPC office no later than March 1 and detailed contest information will be provided ILPC members at least six weeks prior to the contest deadline. f. STATE CONVENTION-The annual ILPC State Convention is held in Austin each spring on a date selected by the ILPC executive committee. The convention program is arranged to include workshops, talks and dis­cussions concerning scholastic publications. Convention participation is open to representatives of any school newspaper in the state, regardless of whether it is affiliated with ILPC or has contestants participating in the State Meet journalism contests. All delegates are responsible for their own trans­portation to Austin, and for their lodging, meals and other expenses. ILPC ratings and Individual Achievement Awards Contest winners are announced at the convention each year and ILPC student officers are selected for the following school year. 7. Spring Meet Contests and Classes.-The Interscholastic League Spring Meet journalism contests shall he conducted at district, regional and State Meet levels. District level contests shall he conducted only in those districts where it is warranted by unusually heavy concentration of participation. Such districts shall he designated by the Director of Journalism and listed in the 'Official Notices" column of the January issue of the Interscholastic Leaguer; such publication shall he considered official notice. Where no district meet journalism contests are conducted, journalism con­testants shall advance directly to the regional meet. In districts having district meet journalism contests, only the qualifying contestants shall advance to the regional meet (See Section 14). Schools participating in the Spring Meet journalism contests shall be divided into five classes-conferences AAAA, AAA, AA, A and B. Con­ference assignments will correspond to the district assignments in basketball. 8. Acceptance Card.-In order to determine the districts in which district meet journalism contests are to he held (see Section 7), each school plan. ning to participate in the Spring Meet journalism contests must file a Jour­nalism Acceptance Card with the Director of Journalism. Acceptance cards will he mailed to schools in September; they must he signed by the principal or superintendent and returned to the League Office no later than December 1, 1966 (postmark deadline). After the Acceptance Card deadline the Di­rector of Journalism will prepare a list of eligible schools and provide copies for each district and regional journalism contest director. A school must file an Acceptance Card to be eligible to compete in the Spring Meet journalism contests. 9. Representation.-Each League member high school filing an Accept· ance Card shall be entitled to enter two contestants in the lowest Spring Meet journalism contest conducted for its conference and district. 10. Eligibility.-Each student entering the journalism contests must ful· fill the eligibility requirements set forth in Article VIII of the Constitution. 11. Certification.-Eligibility certification for Spring Meet journalism contestants is made as follows: a. In schools scheduled to participate in district meet journalism contests the superintendent or principal shall he responsible for entering the contestants in the district meet 10 days prior to the day of the meet. (See Section 7, Spring Meet Plan.) b. Schools not scheduled to compete in district meet journalism con· tests must certify contestants directly to their regio,nal journalism director. This certification must be in the form of a letter from the superintendent or principal naming the two contestants and alternates, if any, and certifying their eligibility under these rules and Article VIII of the Constitution and Contest Rules. This certification must reach the regional journalism director no later than Monday preceding the day of the regional meet, in compliance with Section 20, Spring Meet Plan. The deadline for the 1966--67 school year is Monday, April 17, 1967. Journalism contestants qualifying at the district level shall be certified directly to the next higher meet by the district meet director general under Section 6, Spring Meet Plan, and by their principal or superintendent. (See Section 7, Spring Meet Plan.) 12. Nature of the Contests.-The Interscholastic League Spring Meet journalism contests at district, regional and State Meet levels shall consist of five events: 1. Feature writing; 2. Editorial writing; 3. Newswriting; 4. Copyreading; and 5. Headline writing. Once a contestant has participated in any one of the contest events there shall be no substitutions. The time and points allowed for each contest part are: Contest Event First Second Third Fourth Fifth Feature writing (30 min.) ---­-----­---· 75 63 51 39 27 Editorial writing ( 45 min.) --­--------­ 100 85 70 55 40 Newswriting (45 min.) ------­--­-------­ 100 85 70 55 40 Copyreading ( 30 min.) --­-­--­---------­ 75 63 51 39 27 Headline writing ( 30 min.) ----······ ·· 60 50 40 30 20 Under no circumstances shall additional points or places be awarded in any contest event. In no contest event shall second, third, fourth or fifth place be counted if it is a last place, as determined by actual participation in the contest event. If a school participates in the drawing it shall be considered "actual participation" in the contest. 13. District Meet.-The journalism contests in the specified districts (See Section 7) shall be a part of the League district meet, governed by the same regulations that apply to other district contests. 14. Qualification.-The two students in each conference scoring highest and second highest in total points for all events of the contest shall qualify to the next higher meet. Team scores will also be tabulated and the schools whose single contestants or pairs of contestants make the highest combined totals will be announced as first, second and third place team winners in their conference. A team victory in any of the five conferences shall not be construed as entitling the winning team to enter the next higher meet; only the two individuals scoring highest and second highest in each conference shall be entitled to advance to the next higher meet. 15. Regwnal Meet.-The regional meet journalism contests are a part of the League regional meet, governed by the same regulations that apply to other regional contests. The contests are conducted as outlined in Section 12, above, and qualification to the next higher meet is identical to the procedure outlined in Section 14, above. 16. State Meet.-The State Meet journalism contests and scoring system are the same as described in Section 12, above. Supervision of these events will be under the direction of the ILPC Executive Committee. In each conference, the individual scoring the highest total of points shall receive a gold individual medal; the second place contestant shall receive a silver medal; and the third-ranking contestant shall receive a bronze medal. The school with the highest team total in the contests in each conference, whether earned by one or two contestants, shall be awarded a permanent first place team plaque. 17. Administration and fudging of Journalism Contests.-The director general of the district and regional meets shall appoint a journalism contest director to conduct and supervise the journalism contests. For the district meet, contest materials will be sent from the League Office upon requisition by the director general (See Section 9, Spring Meet Plan). For the regional meet contests, materials will be sent directly to the journalism contest di­rector by the Director of Journalism. A "Journalism Contest Director's Handbook" will also be provided the contest director of each meet. Two types of scoresheets will be provided for contest directors. Scoresheet "X" provides a master list of all contestants in each conference, the contest number assigned to each and a record of individual points scored in each event of the journalism contest. Scoresheet "Y" is a summary sheet on which are listed the five highest scoring individuals in each event of the journalism contest, the five highest scoring individuals in over-all scoring, and the three highest scoring teams in each conference. Each contestant in each conference shall be assigned a number prior to beginning the contest. The assigned numbers will be the only identification on the contest papers and will be retained for each event of the contest. Judges must not have access to the master list of number assignments (score· sheet "X") until judging has been completed for all events in the contest. Judges for each event of the journalism contest shall be secured by the journalism contest director, subject to approval by the Director of Jour· nalism. It is recommended that no judging committee have fewer than three members, but a judging committee may be asked to judge more than one event of the journalism contests. Journalism sponsors accompanying their contestants to the meet may serve on judging committees, provided no sponsor is assigned to judge contest papers from the same conference in which his contestant is competing. Contestants may not use hooks, typewriters, dictionaries or notebooks during any part of the contests. Number Sense Contest 1. Divisions and Representation.-There shall he two divisions in this contest, one for elementary schools and one for high schools. In elementary school meets, each school shall he permitted to enter three contestants. In district meets, each high school shall he permitted to enter three con· testants in its appropriate conference. 2. Eligibility.-Each pupil entered in the number. sense contest must be eligible under the rules set forth in Article VIII of the Constitution. 3. Contest Problems.-The contest problems shall he furnished from the State Office to the director general in a sealed envelope which shall not he opened until the contestants are assembled and ready to begin. The problems shall he of the same general nature as those contained in the League bulletin entitled "Developing Number Sense." 4. Conducting the Contest.-During the contest, only the director of number sense, and a committee of three graders appointed by the director general to grade the papers, shall he permitted to remain in the room. The director in charge shall number the folded sheet, and keep memoranda of the name, address, and school of each contestant to correspond to the num· hers respectively assigned, so that the papers at the close of the test may he readily identified. The contestants shall he instructed not to unfold the test sheets until the signal is given for the contest to begin. After exactly ten minutes another signal shall he given, and each contestant shall then he re­quired to rise and fold his test sheet and he ready to deliver it to the person designated to collect the sheets. Each contestant shall be instructed to write his answer down immediately following the problem without attempting to solve the problem on paper, in accordance with instructions on the test sheet. This is a test in mental arithmetic, and only the results of calculations ar­rived at without the use of pencil and paper should he accepted. The director of the contest may disqualify a contestant for violating these instructions. 5. Determining the Winner.-At the close of the ten-minute period, all of the papers shall he collected and immediately placed in the hands of the graders, who shall carefully grade the papers, awarding each contestant five points for each problem solved correctly. The sum of the points thus awarded shall be considered the gross grade of the contestant. From the gross grades five points shall be deducted for each problem not solved correctly or skipped. Those problems occurring after the last problem solved correctly or attempted are not considered skipped and hence no deduction for them is made. Only the answers to the problems should be written on the paper. No other writing is permitted. An answer once written must be allowed to stand. Answers may not be crossed out. Erasures are not permitted. First place goes to the contestant making the highest net grade, second place to the contestant making the next highest grade, third place to the next highest and so on. In case of a tie, a tie-breaker test shall be given as soon as possible. An illegible figure shall be considered an error, and the same test for determining legi· bility shall be applied as is prescribed in the spelling rules. All fractions in test papers must be reduced to lowest terms. All improper fractions must be expressed as whole numbers plus proper fractions; for example, an answer of 40/6 must be written in the form of 6 2/3, and 64/20 must be written in the form of 3.2 or 3 1/ 5. Decimal answers are permitted for starred problems and for those unstarred problems whose answers are exactly expressible as decimals. Starred problems on test sheets require only approximate answers, i.e., they permit 5% error; unstarred problems re· quire exact answers. All teachers having entrants in the contest and all contestants shall be permitted to examine papers before the final scores are announced. 6. Assistance.-The bulletin entitled "Developing Number Sense" may be ordered from the League Office. The bulletin contains a thousand or more number sense problems, which may be used in classroom drills. For price of the bulletin, see Official List of League Publications, Appendix III. The League also furnishes practice test sets. Three special new practice tests will be used at the fall and winter invitational meets, and can be obtained only by schools having such meets. 7. Graders.-A committee of competent and unbiased graders shall be appointed by the director general to grade the papers produced in the con· test and report the grades to the director of the contest. 8. Qualification.-District winners in each conference qualify for regional meets and regional winners for the State Meet in accordance with schedules provided in Rules 18 and 22 of the Spring Meet Plan. In district meet, in the event there is a tie for second highest score, the following rules will apply: a. The rules for computing points in the event of a tie shall apply. b. All contestants whose score equals the second highest score achieved shall be certified for participation in the regional meet. Competition for the elementary school and junior high school closes with the district meet. One-Act Play Contest LYNN MURRAY Acting State Drama Director Box 8028, University Station Austin, Texas 78712 It is the purpose of the one-act play contest: (a) to satisfy the competitive spirit with friendly rivalry among schools, emphasizing high quality per· formance in this creative art; (b) to foster appreciation of good acting, good directing, and good drama; ( c) to promote interest in that art form most readily usable in leisure time during adult life; ( d) to learn to lose or win graciously, accepting in good sportsmanship the judge's decision and his criticism with a view to improving future productions; and (e) to encour­age the adoption of educational theatre as an academic unit in school cur­ricula. 1. CONTEST ENTRY PROCEDURES a. Representation.-Each member high school of the League is entitled to enter a play company in the district contest of its appropriate con· ference. If no more than two schools are represented in a district, each school may double its representation in the district play con· test with the approval of the District Executive Committee. b. Student Eligibility.-Each member of a one-act play company shall be eligible under Article VIII of the Constitution and Contest Rules. Only students in high school are eligible for this contest. c. Enrollment.-Schools desiring to enter this contest must complete an entry form (mailed each year to all schools from the State Office), countersigned by the principal or superintendent, and return it to the State Office before the December 1 entry deadline. d. Qualification for Participation in a Higher Contest: 1). District winners qualifying for participation in regional contests may be assigned to area contests for the purpose of reducing the number of schools at the regional contest. 2) . The director of the winning company shall mail immediately to the director general of the next higher one-act play contest a properly completed Eligibility Notice. 3). The State Executive Committee may merge or rearrange dis­tricts for the improvement of the contest. e. F acuity Director: 1). A director of one-act play must be a regular member of the fac­ulty or a perwn formally designated as a director upon recom­mendation of the superintendent and approval of the school board. 2). Directors may not accept nor solicit aid from college or univer· sity faculty members, ex-professional or professional actors, di­rectors, designers, or costumers in the preparation of the play, or in coaching the actors, designing props, costumes, scenery, or in directing the contest play.* £. Penalties for Failure to Participate in Contest: 1). Disqualification from the one-act play contests for the current academic year will result if a school fails to meet the entry dead­line or fails to meet the title entry deadline. 2). Suspension from the one-act play contests for the following year will result if a school fails to participate in the district one-act play contest after making an official entry. Schools may file a written report to the State Executive Committee stating their reasons for withdrawal. g. Dates and Deadlines: 1). Request for Play Approval Deadline.-All requests for permis· sion to produce plays not on the Approved List of Plays must be submitted, along with an exact copy of the play to the League Play Appraisal Committee, no later than February 13. 2). Request for Additions to Set Deadline.-All requests for addi­tions to basic sets must be submitted, along with appropriate scale drawings or models and descriptions, no later than Feb­ruary 13. 3). Title Entry Deadline.-The title of the play selected for contest use must be submitted to the State Office no later than March 3. 4). District, area, or regional play contests may be scheduled at times separate from other League contests. 5). No deviations from nor exceptions to any official League dead­line will be made. * This provision is not intended to prevent directors from taking members of their companies to the several drama conferences and workshops conducted by the League and by numerous Texas colleges and universities. Neither does it prevent use of a critic judge at a local intra-school contest so long as three or more casts participate in the contest. 2. CONTEST PLAY SELECTION AND ELIGIBILITY a. Title Selection.-All plays on the Approved List of Plays may be used in League contests, but each must conform in all details to play con­test regulations. 1) . Directors intending to select plays not on the List must submit a request, accompanied by a copy of the script, to the State Office for approval prior to February 13. 2). No consideration will be given to a request for approval of cut­tings from plays unless it is accompanied by a copy of the script which clearly indicates the exact scene or scenes to be used. 3). Plays listed in the Handbook For One-Act Play Directors as in· eligible, or plays which are predominantly musical or choral speaking in nature may not be selected for use in contests. 4). Plays may be selected which require recordings for incidental sound and music effects. 5). Plays used in contests must not offend the moral standards of the community nor be in bad taste. Directors will revise or reject all scripts which in any way fail to meet these qualifications. h. Contest Play Eligibility.-The contest manager is required to declare ineligible any play which violates any one of the following rules. He shall notify the judge of such ineligibility before the judge makes his decision. No play which is declared ineligible by the contest manager may be included in final ranking nor be considered for any honors, and no member of the company of an ineligible play may he placed on all-star casts. 1). Eligibility Notice.-No play may be performed unless the direc· tor can produce the Official Eligibility Notice that the title is duly approved and recorded by the State Office. 2). Royalty Receipt.-The director must produce written evidence that the royalty payment has been paid, if royalty is required. If the director is producing scenes from a long play or an orig· inal play he must produce written evidence that permission for production has been obtained from the publisher or author. The League assumes no responsibility for payment of royalties or obtaining permisssion from the publisher or author to pro­duce plays or scenes from plays. 3). Number in Company.-No play may he performed which uses more than ten individuals in the cast. Double casting is permis­sible. No more than three additional individuals may serve as crew members or alternates. 4). Time Limit.-No play may exceed forty minutes in performance time. Length of playing time shall be determined by time elaps­ing from the opening curtain, or from the beginning of music or action in front of the curtain, to the closing curtain. Time for scene changes during the progress of the play shall be included in the forty-minute time limit. 5). Sets and Props.-No play will be performed in contest which violates any of the following provisions concerning sets and props: The basic set shall be the one which is available at the contest site. The basic set to be used for all one-act play contests will consist of a standard box set, or arrangements of wing and backdrop draperies, or a curtain cyclorama, with such door, window, and small step units as are necessary. If additions to the basic set, such as drops, platforms, scrim, set pieces, curtains or draperies or flat scenery except as noted above, are desired, a full description of each item along with drawings or models of the complete set as proposed, rendered to scale, must be submitted to the State Office on or before Feb­ruary 13. (Additions to the basic set do not include stage prop­erties. Refer to Article VII, Sec. 25, for definition of stage prop­erties.) No consideration will be given to any request unless it is accompanied by the drawings or models prepared as described. The letter from the State Office approving set additions must be presented by the director to the contest manager. Set additions not officially approved by the State Office can not be used in one­act play contests. District, area, regional, and state one-act play contest managers will supply only standard stage properties. Individual play directors may provide unusual stage properties not available at the contest site. Arrangements for the use of such properties must be made in advance with the contest man­ager. All hand properties must be furnished by individual play directors. (Refer to Art. VII, Sec. 26, for definition of hand properties.) 6). Firearms or Explosives.-No real gun, rifle, or pistol may be used in any way, regardless of whether or not the firing pin is re­moved. Toy or wooden model firearms may be used. Discharge of a firearm, cap pistol, or any explosive offstage is not per­mitted. 7). Scene Changes and Lapses of Time.-No director may use more than ten minutes to set and ten minutes to strike all sets, lights, properties, or sound effects for any contest production. Only sixty seconds is allowed to make a scene change during a performance. Either a blackout or closing a curtain may be used to indicate lapses of time, flashbacks, or scene changes. 8). Prompting.-No prompting of actors will be allowed during the performance by anyone off-stage or out of the acting area. 9). The Director During the Contest Performance.-No director will be permitted in backstage or off-stage areas during the con­test performance of his play. 3. CONTEST PLANNING PROCEDURES AND JUDGING a. Planning Meeting.-One-act play directors in each district are urged to hold a preliminary planning meeting in advance of the organizing date for district contests. Recommendations resulting from this meet­ing concerning site, judging, and other contest procedures may be made to the district director general. b. Contest Procedures.-lt is the responsibility of the one-act play con­test manager, appointed by the district director general, to organize and conduct the contest in accordance with League rules and the "Guide for Contest Managers." 1) . Schedule.-The order of performance will be determined by a drawing conducted by the contest manager. Adjustments in or­der of performance may be made to avoid conflict with other contests, or for other reasons deemed valid by the manager. The manager shall establish a rehearsal and performance sched­ule before the contest, and directors shall be advised of the schedule as soon as possible thereafter. 2). Timekeeper.-The contest manager shall appoint a responsible adult to serve as timekeeper who will record the beginning and closing times of each play. Under no circumstances will the judge or the contest manager serve as timekeeper. c. fud ging. 1) . Types of Judging: a). Critic judging. It is specifically recommended that one expert critic judge be used to judge all one-act play con­tests. He shall prepare a critique on each play and present it as advised by the contest manager. The critique will not be presented until after the manager has announced the re­sults of the contest. b) . Panel judging. When it is not possible to secure the serv­ices of an expert critic judge, a panel of three, five, or more judges may be called. If this type of judging is used, the judges must sit apart during the contest. They must arrive at a decision without conferring with each other or any other person. If panel judging is used, the League Play Ranking Plan will be the only one used by the judges and tabulated by the contest manager in determining the results of the contest. In keeping with the educational function of this contest, the panel should not be allowed to give a critique or otherwise evaluate the plays or contestants after the contest. 2). Selection of Judges.-Judges for the district contest will be se­lected by the District Executive Committee; judges for area and regional contests will be selected by the managers of these con­tests; and judges for the State Contest will be selected by the State Executive Committee. 3) . Instructions to Judges.-Before the contest begins, the manager will give to the judge or judges a copy of the judging standards. The manager will fully explain them and other contest proced­ures insofar as they concern the judging, decisions, and the critique. The contest will not begin until the manager has per­formed this duty faithfully. 4). Decision of the Judge or Judges.-The decision of the judge or judges is final. Picture Memory Contest 1. Divisions.-There is only one division in this contest and it is open to children in the fourth and fifth grades. 2. Representation.-Each member school in the League having two or more pupils in the fourth and fifth grades is permitted to enter a team in picture memory. To the picture memory team of two shall be added one member for each 20 pupils (or fraction thereof) in excess of 10 enrolled in the eligible grades on the basis of total enrollment up to the opening of the spring semes­ter. Thus, if the total enrollment in the eligible grades is 10 or less than 10, the team is composed of two pupils; 11 through 30 pupils, inclusive the team is composed of three pupils; 31 through 50 pupils, the team is composed of four pupils, etc. (Pupils passing from an ineligible grade, third, or to an ineligible grade, sixth grade, at mid-term should not be counted in the total enrollment in the fourth and fifth grades.) In no instance may a school enter more than five contestants. 3. Eligibility.-Only pupils in the fourth and fifth grades who are eligi­ble under Article VIII of the Constitution may be entered in this contest. 4. Conducting the Contest.-The director of picture memory shall pro­vide contestants with sheets of paper divided into three columns, headed "picture," "artist" and "nationality." Horizontal lines shall be numbered one through 33 (or, if 17 pictures are used, one through 17). Typing paper or notebook paper may be used. Each contestant shall draw a number from the director of the picture memory contest and write that number in the upper right-hand corner of each sheet of his test paper. The director shall keep an accurate list of the names of the contestants and the number each has drawn. This list shall be used for identification of the test sheets after the contest. The director shall appoint two monitors to supervise the contest, and they shall stay in the room while the contest is being held and report to the di­rector any attempt on the part of any pupil to copy from any other or from any source during the contest. The director shall disqualify any pupil who attempts to copy from any source. The director, or person designated by him, shall exhibit to the contestants either 33 pictures from the prescribed list, or 17, chosen at random and shall keep an accurate list of the pictures, the artists, and the nationality in the order in which they are exhibited. These sets of pictures are changed every two years in September of "odd" years [E.G. 1965, 1967]. The district director is responsible for securing the pictures which are to be exhibited. The contest director should consult the Official Notices Col­umn of the LEAGUER for corrections, if any, in the list. Contestants shall be instructed to write down the name of the picture in the first column, name of the artist in the second column, and the nationality of the artist in the third column. Only the last name of the artist need be used. Either pen or pencil is permissible. Contestants should use only one side of the paper. After the test has been given, the test sheets shall be collected by the di­rector and the list of the pictures in the order in which they have been ex­hibited attached thereto, and test sheets and list turned over to a committee of graders who shall grade the sheets. The director shall then identify each test sheet by contestant's name and school. A list of the 100 per cent contestants shall then be made which shall be publicly announced during the elementary school meet. The team grades shall be computed (See next paragraph), and a first, second and third place winner declared. The team grade shall be determined by adding together the scores made by all members of a given team and dividing the sum by the number of in­dividuals composing the team. 5. Grading the Test Sheets.-A perfect paper is graded 100. From 100 deduct one point for each error made, if 33 pictures are used. Deduct two points for each error if 17 pictures are used. In grading, the answers shall appear exactly as they are given in the of­ficial picture list available from the State Office. Misspellings shall be counted as errors. 6. Judges.-No teacher who has a contestant in the contest shall be per­mitted to serve either as a monitor or as a member of the grading committee. 7. Available Aids.-The Interscholastic League has issued a bulletin which treats appreciatively each of the pictures in the list, and gives the official spelling and titles for the contest. It is titled "Picture Memory Bul­letin" and sells for 25 cents per copy. Each pupil entering the contest should have a copy of this bulletin. 8. Selected Pictures.-The selections to be used as a basis for the contest in the current year are listed in the bulletin described in Paragraph 7 above. Schools planning to participate in this contest should purchase copies of the listed pictures from a reputable art printing company or dealer (Some of the r,ompanies are listed below). It is suggested that small prints of the selections be made available to each student (Publishers have these at a few cents per copy) . 9. Publishers.-The following publishers, listed in alphabetical order, supply prints included in this year's selection. Further details on prints, etc., are found in the bulletin described in Paragraph 7. List of publishers: Artext Prints, Inc., Westport, Conn. Hemphill's Book Store #3, 2243 Guadalupe, Austin, Texas. Hoover Brothers, Temple, Texas. Perry Picture Company, Malden, Mass. Texas Book Store, Box 7577, University Station, Austin, Texas. Note: The Texas Book Store, Hemphill's and Hoover Brothers have pack­ ets of the 40 pictures made up for immediate shipment. Write them for details on prices, etc. Pictures come in small sizes, for use by individual pupils, and larger (approximately 9 x 12) for use by contest director or for framing. Please specify which size you wish. · Ready Writing Contest 1. Representation.-ln the district meets, each high school shall be per· mitted to enter two contestants in its appropriate conference. In elementary and junior high school meets, each school shall be permitted to enter two contestants. 2. Eligibility.-Each pupil entered in this contest must be eligible under Article VIII of this Constitution. 3. The Composition. a. Its Nature.-The composition is to be expository in nature. Descrip· tive or narrative passages may be used, of course, to illustrate or reinforce an idea or point that is being explained, but they must be clearly subservient or incidental to the purpose of exposition. b. Its Length.-The composition should be approximately 1,000 words in length for high school contestants, approximately 750 words for junior high school contestants, and approximately 500 words for elementary school con· testants. Approximately shall mean 150 words above or below the preceding figures. 4. Method of Conducting the Contest.-Themes in this contest shall be written under the following conditions: a. Contestants in all divisions shall be assembled and distributed sparsely over the room. b. Uniform stationery shall be provided by the respective contestants, 8¥2 by 11 inches (letter size), and the composition must be written on one side in ink. c. The contestants shall be numbered consecutively, beginning with "l," the final number representing the total number of contestants engaging in the contest. Each contestant shall enter the number assigned him in the upper right-hand corner of the first sheet of his manuscript and enclose it in parentheses. He shall then write on a slip of paper his number, school, his own name and his postoffice address, and enclose this slip in an envelope, which shall be sealed and attached to his manuscript when it is turned in to the director. d. Topics for all divisions shall be furnished by the State Office to the director general, who shall trammit them in a sealed envelope to the di­rector on the day of the contest. Except in the State Division, three topics shall be furnished, all within the range of the average pupil's study, observation, and experience. The director, or person designated by him, shall copy all three topics on the blackboard and each contestant may select from this list the topic upon which he wishes to write. In the state division, all contestants shall be furnished a brief statement of two or three sentences which each con­testant shall be expected to analyze for its most significant point and which shall be considered in originating his own topic. e. Each contestant shall write the subject he has chosen in full about two inches below the top of the first sheet and begin the body of his com­position about an inch below the title. An inch margin should be allowed on the left of the page. The pages should be numbered in the upper left-hand corner, without parentheses, to distinguish the page number from the num­ber assigned the contestant. f. The director shall be responsible for preventing any communication between contestants, or any reference on the part of contestants to notes or books or printed matter of any character. He shall be the timekeeper for the contest, and when two hours have elapsed from the time he writes the subjects on the board, he shall collect all manuscripts; he shall give 15 minutes' warning of the time limit, even if the contest is held in a room where a clock is clearly visible to the contestants. 5. I udging the Contest. a. The Judges.-Three properly qualified and impartial judges (exclu­sive of teachers whose schools are represented in the contest in the class to judged) shall be selected by the director. b. Briefing the Judges.-At some convenient time before the contest be­gins, the director shall discuss thoroughly with the judges the criteria for evaluating the composition, making sure that they all have the same con­ception of those criteria and understand the relative importance to be ac, corded each. c. Instructions to Judges.-Each judge shall be given a copy of the fol­lowing instructions: (1) The Criteria for Evaluation.-The compos1t10ns are to be graded as to relative excellence in interest, organization, and correctness of style. While the judges are to take into consideration all three of these elements in selecting the most effective compositions, they shall stress the element of interest more than either of the other two, and the element of organiza­tion more than correctness of style. (a) Interest depends primarily upon substance, upon having something to say that is worth saying because of its acuteness of analysis or its origi­nality of thought. It depends next upon clarity, for no reader can be in­terested unless he understands exactly the writer's ideas or points. It de­pends finally upon the inclusion of specific details and examples which indi­vidualize the composition as an outgrowth of the writer's character and ex­ perience. (b) Organization has clarity as its main goal. The plan of the whole composition should be such that each part contributes to an understanding of the writer's main idea or thesis, no part being misleading or unrelated to that thesis. The organization of each paragraph should be directed to the logical and full development of one idea. ( c) Correctness of style is of two types. The first, and the one to be most stressed by the judges, is that based upon an attempt to achieve clarity of communication. Sentence structure, punctuation, grammar, and word usage which hinder clear communication are thus to be considered incorrect. A less important kind of incorrectness is that which is based upon mere convention. Errors in sentence structure, punctuation, grammar, word usage, and spell· ing which do not hinder clear communication but which fail to conform to standard usage constitute this type of incorrectness. (2) Rating the Compositions.-Each judge shall read all of the essays submitted in the class to be judged, and, without marking on the manuscripts, shall make notes upon the excellencies and deficiences of each paper. He shall then rank them in order of their excellence: 1, 2, 3, 4, etc. The three judges shall then discuss the essays which each has ranked first, second and third, any judge being permitted to alter his ranking as a result of the dis· cussion. Each judge shall then give his final ranging of all papers to the director, who will determine first, second, and third place from the vote of the judges in the manner prescribed for ranking speech contests. See Rule 2, General Instructions, Speech Contests. ( 3) Preparing the Criticism.-Before the results are announced, the judges shall prepare for the director a criticism of each essay, stating its good and bad points. The criticisms need not be long, and they should be specific rather than general. 6. Announcing the Results.-Before the assembled contestants and other interested parties, the director shall announce, at a time and place specified by him, the names and schools of the winners. 7. Hof.ding the Criticism.-lmmediately following the announcement of results the director and/ or the judges shall hold a critique on the contest. It may be profitable to read aloud the essay awarded first place, and then pre· sent for discussion the criticism of the judges. Second and third place winners will be eager to know what, in the opinion of the judges, prevented their papers from being considered as good as the one ranked first. The feelings of other contestants can be saved if relative rankings below third place are not revealed, and if the judges' criticisms are given with reference only to the numbers of the essays rather than the names of the contestants. Even those who were ranked low by the judges will appreciate hearing criticism of their papers if the person presenting the critique can arrange to talk privately with them. 8. Qualification.-District winners in each conference qualify for re­gional meets and regional winners for the State Meet in accordance with the schedules provided in Rules 18 and 22 of the Spring Meet Plan. 9. Essays suhmittted in League contests become the property of the League and may be printed and circulated or otherwise used by the League in promotion of the contests. The name of the author of the essay will not be disclosed if the author wishes to remain anonymous. Science Contest Introduction Purpose of Science Contest The science contest is designed to promote reading in science and will be based primarily, but not entirely, upon the list of recommended books and periodicals, suggested by a committee of science teachers, scientists and school administrators. Basing the contest on reading makes it possible for students with varied backgrounds to complete on equal terms. It is not necessary for contestants to read each book from cover to cover, because there is a considerable overlap of subjects. However, the most suc· cessful students will be those who have the best understanding of the basic principles, as well as knowledge of the history and philosophy of science. This type of contest will, it is hoped, appeal to a large number of pupils and will stimulate a great many Texas high school students to read critically and widely in worthwhile science books and periodicals. Nature of the Science Contest Each contest will consist of 50 objective questions, designed to test stu· dents' understanding rather than their ability to memorize details. For example, it will be more important to understand the significance of an experiment than to recall the date and the name of the experimenter. For the present, the science contest will emphasize biology, chemistry and physics, but may include such other topics as are covered in the recom· mended reading. Each contest will contain questions of graded difficulty. Some will be readily answered by all contestants, while others will challenge even the very best participants. The time allotted for each test is an hour to an hour and a half, but since the thoughtful evaluation of experimental results will be important, the con­test will not be a race. As much as two hours will be given contestants if needed. Contestants will compete only with others in the same conference. Science Contest Dates For convenience in scheduling, three separate district meet contest dates will be available. It should be especially noted that the dates for the district science contests are limited to three weekends, namely: March 31-April 1 April 7-8 April 14-15 The regional science contest will be on April 21-22, the State Meet science contest on May 4-5-6 .. Facilities Needed for Science Contest One of the attractive features of the contest is that it requires no special equipment or facilities in the high school, nor does it necessitate any special coaching by the teaching staff. Instead, it requires only the outlay of a rela­tively small sum of money for books and periodicals which ought to be in every high school library. Although most of the books selected were written for the general public or for college freshmen, they are not too difficult for the bright high school students. In fact, many of the books are included in the Traveling High School Science Library of the American Association for the Advancement of Science and the National Science Foundation. Preparing for the Science Contest What To Read First It is not necessary for contestants to read the recommended books from cover to cover, as they would a novel. The best procedure is to select the sub­ject that they know least about and to read the general book selected from that field. As each topic is considered, students should check to see whether there are great experiments in some of the books which cover the same topic and, if so, these should be read after the general account has been read. Next, stu­dents should check the publications covering recent advances in science and then read the articles which cover the topics under consideration. (See Rec· ommended Reading List.) Following this procedure in a progressive pattern, from the subject they know least about to the one they know second best and then to the one they know best, contestants will develop a broad knowledge of all. How to Read the Material Many students read textbooks passively, waiting to be informed, in the same manner they read novels or watch movies or television programs, ex· pecting to be entertained. At the end of the section, they usually wonder what it was all about and find that they have learned little, if anything. A more productive technique for exploring students is to read with the purpose of getting information about a specific topic, in much the same way things are looked up in an encyclopedia or a dictionary. It is best to form­ulate questions and then to seek answers to these questions in the book, or books. Questions are suggested by the chapter and section headings. For example: What is the structure of atoms? How does the atomic structure affect the chemical properties of the atom? What are the characteristics of light? What is the composition and structure of cells? How do cells reproduce? New questions should be formulated for each section; and after the section is completed, writing a short summary will help consolidate the pertinent facts. When reading about the experiments, it is important to understand the purpose of the experiment, why a specific procedure was followed, and why the conclusions drawn are justified by the experimental results. Science Contest Rules 1. Representation.-Each member high school in the League may enter three contestants in the district meet science contest in the particular con­ference to which the school belongs. 2. Eligibility.-Each contestant must satisfy the eligibility requirements set forth in Article VIII of the Constitution. Furthermore, only pupils in the ninth, tenth, eleventh, and twelfth grades shall be permitted to enter this contest. 3. Contest Questions.­ a. All contest questions, and corresponding answer keys, shall be pro­vided by the State Office to the director general in a sealed envelope which shall not be opened until after the contestants are assembled and ready to begin the contest. b. Contests will consist of objective-type questions designed to test understanding of basic principles in biology, chemistry and physics, the history and methods of science and the recent developments in science. They will also test the ability to evaluate experimental results. Early each school year the State Office will furnish inter· ested schools a list of recommended reading for the contest. Most, but not all, of the contest questions will be based on this reading. c. The regular contest shall consist of approximately 50 questions. It should be possible to complete these questions in an hour or an hour and a half, but since thoughtfulness and evaluation are more important characteristics of the scientist than speed, this contest is not meant to be a race and up to two hours will be permitted for its completion. On a given contest, some of the questions will be easy but others will be of graded difficulty, so that some will provide a challenge to even the best contestant. 4. Conducting the Contest and Determining the Winners.-All science contests shall be conducted under the following regulations: a. Contest graders, in addition to contest directors, shall be secured from competent and unbiased citizens. These should be chosen in advance of the meet to enable the graders to familiarize themselves with the contest rules and method of grading. Prior to the contest, "Instructions for Scoring the Science Contest" should be oh· tained from the University Interscholastic League, Box 8028, Uni· versity Station, Austin, Texas 78712. A sample test and its sample grading are included in these instructions which all graders should study and understand before the contest, in addition to reading the science contest rules appearing in the Constitution and Contest Rules. A copy of these instructions will accompany each set of science contest papers to enable the graders to re-read the rules during the contest and have for ready reference during the grading of the contest papers. b. Since the performance of contestants depends in part upon their comfort during the contest, care should be taken in the selection of the contest room and its equipment. The contest room shall be adequate in size for the comfort of all contestants and should be selected with quietness of location and excellence of lighting as prime factors. During the actual conduct of the contest, no other contest or activity shall be permitted to take pl.ace in the contest room. Periodic charts and other visual aids should be removed from view. Classroom armchairs or desks with accompanying arm­less chairs (not stools) are to be used, if at all available, for the contestants; these should not be of grade school size but should comfortably accommodate high school contestants. c. Subject to its availability, at a position easily seen by all con­testants, a large wall clock should be provided to indicate silently the remaining time in the contest. No oral time warnings, black­board indications, or any other type of time notations shall be em­ployed. If all contestants agree to its absence, the clock may be omitted. Remember, however, that the science contest is not a race. d. At least 30 minutes before the actual beginning of the contest, contestants, coaches, graders, and other interested individuals should be gathered together in the contest room, and the rules reviewed. Free questioning should be encouraged to see that all concerned are agreed as to the manner of conducting the contest, the point system of grading, and all other items concerning the contest. If a conference precedes a contest within 24 hours, and if the rules are reviewed at this conference, the pre-contest review may be eliminated. However, a question period immediately pre­ceding the contest should be permitted. e. When the contest is about to begin, all individuals except con­testants, the science contest director, and one grader shall be sent from the contest room and kept out of the contest room throughout the actual contest. The other graders (if there are any) or other individuals (if no graders are available for this duty) shall be stationed outside the contest room to act as sergeants-at-arms to effect quietness throughout the contest. f. The envelope containing the science contest literature shall be opened and the sheet or sheets for tabulation of results removed. These sheets provide a method of concealing the identity of the contestants. The contest director shall number the folded contest papers on the outside and keep memoranda on the above men­tioned result sheets of the name, address, and school of each con­testant to correspond to the numbers respectively assigned, so that at the close of the contest the papers may be identified readily. g. Clean scratch paper may be provided for the contestants if re­quested. h. The contestants orally shall be given the following last-minute instructions: ( 1) Write the letters corresponding to your answers in the ap­ propriate dotted blanks provided on the answer sheet. (2) No oral time warnings or blackboard time tabulations shall be given; if you desire to see the amount of remaining time in the contest, you may refer to the large electric clock or to your own watch. ( 3) If you finish the contest before the end of the allotted time, remain at your seat and retain your paper until told to do otherwise. You may use this time to check your answers. (4) Keep your papers folded at all times except when told to do otherwise; this is particularly important while the contest papers are being distributed and before the signal to begin the contest has been given. (5) If you are in the process of actually writing down an answer when the quitting signal is given, you may complete writing the answer. ( 6) You may place as many notations as you desire anywhere on the contest paper except on the answer sheet which is reserved for answers only. You may use additional scratch paper pro­ vided by the director general. (7) During the contest proper, no questions may be asked or answered. i. Hand out the contest papers by orally calling out the serial numbers and having each contestant identify his. Wam the contestants that the contest is about to begin. j. Give the signal starting the contest in a manner that is well under­ stood by all contestants. In a clear voice announce, "The contest is about to begin. Get ready. Unfold your paper now and begin." k. Give the "Instructions for Scoring the Science Contest" enclosed in the contest package, to the grader in order that he may refresh himself concerning the grading of the contest. l. Sixty minutes after the start of the contest, announce that papers may be turned in, but those desiring additional time should be given up to the maximum of two hours. m. Answer no questions concerning the contest at this time. n. After the contest exclude all individuals from the room except the science contest director and graders. This applies to contestants, coaches, parents, friends, and all other individuals. o. Remove the answer key from the contest envelope and grade the contest papers. Allow adequate time for careful, accurate grading of the papers; do not sacrifice accuracy for speed. Double check the grading to be sure that no errors have been made. p. Record the net scores on the outside of each contest paper. q. First place goes to the contestant making the highest net grade; second place goes to the contestant making the next highest net grade; third place to the next highest and so on. r. After all papers have been graded and no ties remain in the first three places, completely fill out the remaining blanks on the tabula­tion of results sheet. Prepare a list of winners and their schools. s. Gather all contestants, graders, coaches, and other interested parties in the contest room and announce the winners of the contest, that is, the names of the contestants winning the first three places, and their net scores. Contestants should be permitted to examine their papers if they desire, but they shouU not be permitted to retain them. Permit discussion concerning the contest. If it is evident that any errors have been made, correct them and be sure that all contestants are informed of the corrections. t. Gather all used contest papers so that none may be retained by the contestants, coaches or other interested parties. u. All unused contest papers, keys and completed tests must be re­turned to the State Office of The University Interscholastic League. v. The instructions for scoring may be retained for future use by science coaches. w. The tabulation of results sheet and the list of winners and their schools shall be given to the director general. 5. Grading the Contests.-Adequate time for careful, accurate grading shall be taken. Accuracy shall not be sacrificed for speed. The State Office will provide graders with a list of the correct answers; this list shall be included with each regular contest and contest envelope. The grading of all papers and the determination of the net grades shall be double-checked to reduce the possibility of errors. For the sake of uniformity and freedom of argument, all grading shall be done according to answers written on the answer key, unless the contest director desires to contact the state science contest director by telephone for a corrected answer. If the latter option is selected, the corrected answer must be received from the state science contest chairman as soon after the completion of the science contest as practical but in no case later than four hours after the completion of the contest. In the absence of a corrected answer from the state science contest chairman, all grading must be done according to the answers printed on the answer key, even in the case of an obviously incorrect answer if such ever is the case. Any telephone calls to the state science contest chairman will be made at neither his expense nor that of The University Interscholastic League. The papers of all contestants in the district, regional, and state science contests shall be graded uniformly on the following basis: a. All questions for which there is only one correct answer requested will receive 5 points if answered correctly, and no points if un­answered or if answered incorrectly. b. On questions where one or more correct answers are possible (the last ten questions of the contest), the following rules will apply: ( 1) If only one answer is correct and only one correct answer is given, then 5 points will be awarded. (2) If there are two correct answers and both of these are given, 5 points will be awarded. If only one of these is given, then only 2 points will be awarded. ( 3) If there are three correct answers and all three correct answers are given, then 5 points will be awarded. If only two of the correct answers are given, then 3 points will be awarded, and if only one correct answer is given, then only 1 point will be awarded. ( 4) If there are four correct answers and all four correct answers are given, then 5 points will be awarded. For three correct answers, 3 points will be awarded; for two correct answers, 2 points will be awarded; and for one correct answer, 1 point will be awarded. ( 5) If there are five or more correct answers, 5 points will be awarded if all the correct answers are given; otherwise, 1 point will be awarded for each correct answer, up to a maxi· mum of 4 points. ( 6) On all questions where there may be one or more correct answers, if any incorrect answers are given, 2 points are sub­tracted from the total score for each incorrect answer. (7) If a question is omitted, no points are given or subtracted. 6. Qualification.-First and second place district winners in each con· ference quality for regional meets and regional winners for the State Meet in accordance with the schedule provided in Rules 18 and 22 of the Spring Meet Plan. 7. Graders.-A committee of competent and unbiased graders shall be appointed by the director general of the meet to grade the papers produced in the contest and to report grades to the contest director. This committee generally should have three members, but in cases of very small numbers of contestants in any one contest, one or two graders may be all that are necessary. In cases where there are large numbers of contestants, more than three graders may he used. The contest director should choose the graders in advance of the meet and should use every effort to induce the graders to familiarize themselves with the rules. See Paragraph 4a. 8. Additwnal lnformation.-Any additional information concerning the science contest may be obtained from the University Interscholastic League, Box 8028, University Station, Austin, Texas 78712. Recommended Reading List American Scientist, January 1%6 through December 1966. Sigma Xi, 51 Prospect Street, New Haven, Connecticut 06511. $3.50. Scientific American, January through December 1966. Scientific American, 415 Madison Ave., New York, New York. 10017. Conant, James B., Harvard Case Histories in Experimental Science, 2 vols. Harvard University Press, 79 Garden St., Cambridge, Mass. 02138. 1957. Gamow, George, Matter, Earth, and Sky. 2d Ed. Prentice-Hall, Inc., Engle­wood Cliffs, N.J., 07632. 1965. Pauling, Linus, College Chemistry, 3rd Ed., W. H. Freeman & Sons, 660 Market St., San Francisco, Calif. 94104. 1964. Gabriel, Mordecai L., and Seymour Fogel, Ed., Great Experiments in Bi­ology. Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J. 07632. 1955. Shamos, Morris H. Ed., Great Experiments in Physics. Holt, Rinehart & Win­ston, 383 Madison Ave., New York, N.Y. 10017.1959. Rogers, Eric M., Physics for the Inquiring Mind. Princeton University Press, Princeton, N.J. 08540. 1960. Walker, Marshall, The Nature of Scientific Thought, Spectrum Books, Pren­tice-Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J. 07632. 1963. Whaley, W. George, et al, Principles of Biology, 3rd Ed. Harper & Row, New York.10017.1964. Shorthand Contest 1. Only Accredited Schools Eligible.-This contest is open only to schools accorded credit in shorthand by the Texas Education Agency, and follow­ing the time schedule required by the Agency, viz., single or double­period five days per week for 36 weeks during the year. 2. Representatwn.-Each school entering the contest shall be required to enter two, as a minimum. Schools having an enrollment of more than 30 in first-year shorthand on January 1 may add one additional pupil for every 30 or fraction thereof enrolled in excess of 30, provided not more than five are entered from any one school. Pupils having had regular instruction in shorthand prior to September 1, and pupils who will be graduated at midterm are not counted on this enrollment. (For "enrollment," see Art. VII, Sec. 19.) 3. Eligibility.-Only those pupils eligible under Article VIII of the Con­stitution shall be permitted to enter this contest, and only those who have had no regular instruction in shorthand prior to September 1, last. Section 13, Article VIII, does not apply to shorthand contestants, provided the con­testant is representing the high school nearest to his home accredited in shorthand. Only manual shorthand contestants are eligible to enter this contest. 4. Qualification.-District winners in each conference qualify for re­gional meets and regional winners for the State Meet in accordance with schedules provided in Rules 18 and 22 of the Spring Meet Plan. Individuals qualify to enter the next higher meet. 5. State Meet.-Those individuals qualified as indicated in paragraph 2 above, meet for a state championship tournament during the State Meet of the League. Contestants must have their machines set up in Business-Eco­nomics Building 502 between 10:00 a.m. and 10:30 a.m. on the morning of the contest. 6. General Rule.-The following points taken from the National Short­hand Reporters' Association rules for correcting shorthand contest transcrip­tion, are herein set down because they fit the particular requirements of the League shorthand meets: a. Every word omitted, inserted, or transposed, or in any way changed from printed copy shall be penalized. b. All transcripts must be typewritten, double spaced, and on only one side of the sheet. Lines should be about 65 strokes-though no error is charged for the length of a line in the transcript. Extra spacing between words is permissible; but words written together constitute an error. Transcribing on an electric typewriter is permissible. c. Misspelled words shall be penalized. The contestant is urged to bring a standard dictionary to the transcription period. The omis­sion of an apostrophe constitutes a misspelled word. Any word wrongly divided at the end of a line shall be penalized. Any j. In case of a tie, the contestant finishing in the shorter time is ranked above the other with the same percentage of accuracy. Should there be a tie of both accuracy and time, the neater paper is ranked above the other. k. Paper 81/2 x 14 shall be used. (Suggestion: No easy-erase paper should be used.) Ko-Rec-Type is definitely not permitted. The District, Regional, and State Directors must furnish paper for all contestants. Write only on one side of each page. Any paper typed on the reverse side will be penalized one error for each line. standard dictionary is an authority and this authority shall be presented in case of a dispute. d. Hyphenated words (when each is a dictionary word) are con· sidered as separate words; therefore, an error in each word will be penalized. Example: fourth-class mail forth-class 1 error forth class 1 error forth-closs 2 errors e. Figures are counted as they are read-"38" is counted as two words. Figures may be spelled. A mistake in one of the figures, therefore, shall constitute but one error. "1923" (nineteen hun­ dred twenty-three) is counted as four words. The writing of "1922" for "1923" should be one error only. The writing of "1823" for "1923" should be, similarly, one error. The writing of "1819" for "1923" should be three errors; and if every figure were wrong in the date, four errors should be charged. f. Errors are not charged both for the transcribing of wrong words and for the insertion of others on the same construction .. For in­ stance, the checker should count the number of words incorrectly transcribed and that will be the total of errors on that construc­ tion; but if the number of incorrect words the student transcribes on a particular construction exceeds the number of those he should have transcribed, he is charged always with the greater number. For instance, if he wrote "Secretary of State" for "the state," he should be charged two errors. It will be seen that he has prop· erly transcribed "state," the only errors being the transcription of "secretary of" for "the" and he is charged with the greater number, which is two. g. Any pencil or pen insertion or correction is to be counted as an error. Errors must be neatly erased before the corrections are inserted. No strikeout is permissible. Inserts may be written be­ tween lines by using the diagonal as an indicator. h. Underline the title of a book, a booklet, a magazine, or a news­ paper or type it in solid capitals. Enclose in quotation marks the titles of essays, magazine articles, lectures, term papers, and titles of chapters in books. 1. Capitalize the name of specific departments. Example: Our Personnel Department has been moved to a new building. Almost any personnel department could use these sug­ gestions. 7. Punctuation.-The following rules shall be observed in checking the transcripts: a. Punctuation marks, including hyphens, will be dictated; and the contestant will be held responsible for them. The word comma will be written into the dictation material, and the two syllables in the word will be counted in marking the copy for dictation. The same will be true of all other dictated punctuation marks. b. Paragraphs will be dictated, and the contestant will be held re· sponsible for them. The word paragraph will be written into the dictation material, and the three syllables in the word will be counted in marking the copy for dictation. 8. Paragraphing.-Paragraphs shall be indented five spaces. One error shall be counted for every irregularity. 9. Salutation and Complimentary Closing.-The salutation must occupy a line by itself and be placed flush with the left margin. The placement of the complimentary closing is optional. No penalty will be assessed for its place· ment. 10. Marking of Errors.-Words omitted should not be written; indicate omission by vertical lines between typed lines. Circle errors when possible --one or two words. 11. Contestants Numbered.-Each contestant shall be given a number, which is placed on his contest sheet, so that the identity of the individual is withheld from the judges until the awards are made. 12. Length of Test.-All tests must be exactly five minutes in length. W armup tests must be given, but just one official test may be counted in any district, regional, or in the State Meet. Official material must not be prac· ticed before the test. The director must signify the beginning of the official test. 13. Computation.-The percentage of accuracy is determined by divid­ing the total number of correct words by the total number of words dictated. (Example: If the dictation is given at 70 words a minute for five minutes, the total number of words dictated will be 350. If there are 14 errors in the trans­cript, subtract 14 from 350, which will give 336 correct words; divide 336 by 350; this will give 96, the grade or the percentage of accuracy on this paper.) The time limit on the various transcription rates must be as follows: at 80 words, 45 minutes; at 90 words, 55 minutes; at 100 words, one hour. The contestants may, however, tum in their transcriptions before this time limit has expired. If there is a tie, the time element is considered in the final rating. For instance, one of the students may have needed 18 minutes to transcribe the material in the example given above, while another re­quired only 14 minutes. The one finishing in the 14 minutes is ranked above the other. For this reason, close attention must be given to time; even seconds are important. 14. Seating Arrangement.-Two students from the same school shall not be allowed to sit next to or near each other during the transcription period. 15. Test.-All contestants, regardless of classification of school, shall take the same test at the same time. After all papers are graded and rated, they should be sorted and ranked according to class. 16. Rate of Dictation.-The contest material shall be dictated in the re­spective meets at the following rates per minute: district meets, 80 words per minute; regional meets, 90 words per minute; State Meet, 100 words per minute. 17. Craders.-College students who have been especially trained in check­ing and rating papers according to the Constitutwn and Contest Rules of the Interscholastic League may help grade contest papers. Teachers with entries make good graders. Each teacher having an entry or entries and his con­testant or contestants will be permitted to examine the contestant's or con­testants' papers and the top five papers in his conference at a time designated by the director before final scores are announced officially. 18. Dictators.-Every possible effort should be made by directors to se­cure only experienced dictators for the contest. An experienced dictator is a shorthand teacher. The dictator should be permitted to read the dictation material through before starting the test. No teacher having entries in the contest shall be allowed to dictate the test or remain in the transcription room during the transcription period. Contestants should be told which are the warmup drills and which is the contest proper. The material must be dictated evenly-that is, according to the desig­nated markings for each 15 seconds; however, a phrase should not be broken for the sake of exactness in timing. The dictator should be careful in the enunciation of word derivatives. 19. Spelling of Proper Nouns.-When proper names are used in copy, the spelling of the proper name may be optional when the sounds are the same-­Thompson for Tompson, Smyth for Smith, etc. 20. Directors.-Directors having entries in the contest shall not be per­mitted to be in the room during the administering of the test. The contestant or contestants of any director who violates this rule shall be disqualified. Directors must read and follow all printed rules. They must refrain from exercising their personal opinions. Shorthand and typewriting contests must be scheduled at different times­at least one and one-half hours apart. It is advisable to have the typewriting contest precede the shorthand contest. Contest must be started at the time scheduled; late contestants forfeit the right to enter. Under no circumstances is a test to be delayed for a contestant who is scheduled in other contests at that same time. Before the contest, the director should get the names of all contestants entering and should provide adequate space for each contest; this place must be a quiet one. Two persons shall be appointed to check the dictator for variations in the printed copy. These may not be teachers with entries. If a teacher contests the grading of his student's paper, the director shall send that paper along with the five highest in rank immediately to the state director-before the final scores are announced in that particular conference. Thus a more equitable over-all rating will be effected throughout the State. After the official announcement of winners has been released, no change can be made in the first five places. Directors will receive contest material from the director general who receives it from the League Office. Slide Rule Contest 1. Representation.-Each member high school in the University Inter· scholastic League is permitted to enter three contestants in the district meet slide rule contest in the particular conference to which the school belongs. 2. Eligibility.-In addition to satisfying the eligibility requirements for literary contestants as set forth in Article VIII of the Constitution and Con· test Rules, only pupils in the eighth, ninth, tenth, and eleventh grades in the eleven-grade school systems and only pupils in the ninth, tenth, eleventh, and twelfth grades in the twelve-grade school systems shall be permitted to enter this contest. 3. Contest Problems.­ a. All regular contest and tie-breaking contest problems and correspond­ing answering keys shall be provided by the State Office to the director general in a sealed envelope which shall not be opened until after the con­testants are assembled and are ready to begin the contest. b. The contest shall include all manner of problems involving only the following slide rule operations: multiplication, division, squares, cubes, square roots, cube roots, and placement of decimals. c. The regular cont~st shall consist of 75 problems of such difficulty that no individual is expected to complete them in the 30 minute time allotted for the contest. On a given contest, the problems will be arranged such that there will be 15 problems that are simple, followed by 60 problems of any difficulty. As a contestant progresses to the regional and State Meet, he may expect to encounter an increase in the degree of difficulty of problems. d. The tie-breaking contests shall consist of 15 problems similar to those found in the regular contests. The time allotted for these tie-breaking con­tests is 10 minutes. These tie-breaking contest problems automatically ac­company the regular contest problem envelopes, exception, see Sq. 4. Slide Rules Permitted.-Any type of standard slide rule without special accessories is permitted in the contest, whether it is straight or circular, wooden, plastic, or metallic. If the contestant desires, he may use more than one slide rule during the contest provided that each rule used is of standard make with no special accessories, such as additional indicators or special scales or markings. The use of any non-standard slide rule or non-standard equipment is prohibited. In the selection of a slide rule, let it be borne in mind that a quality instrument together with proficiency in its operation usually results in a winning combination, all other things being equal. 5. Conducting the Contest and Determining the Winners.-All slide rule contests shall be conducted under the following regulations: a. Contest graders in addition to the contest directors, shall be secured from competent and unbiased citizens. These should be chosen in advance of the meet to enable the graders to familiarize themselves with the contest rules and methods of grading. In advance of the contest, "Instructions for Graders of the Slide Rule Contest" should be obtained from the University Interscholastic League, Bureau of Public School Service, The University of Texas, Austin, Texas 78712. The sample test and its sample grading are in­cluded in these instructions which all graders should study and understand before the contest, in addition to reading the slide rule contest rules appear. ing in this Constitution and Contest Rules. A copy of these instructions will accompany each set of slide rule contest papers to enable the graders to re· read the rules during the contest and have for _ready reference during the grading of the contest papers. b. Since the performance of a slide rule contestant depends largely upon his comfort during the contest, care should be taken in the selection of a contest room and its equipment. The contest room shall be adequate in size for the comfort of all contestants and shall be selected with quietness of location and excellence of lighting as prime factors. During the actual conduct of the slide rule contest, no other contest or other activity shall be permitted to take place in the contest room. Tables or desks with accompanying armless chairs (not stools) are to be used, if at all available, for the contestants; these should not be of grade school size but should comfortably accommo· date high school contestants. Since a very small minority of the contestants prefer classroom armchairs to desks or tables, a few classroom armchairs should be provided in addition to the desks or tables. c. Subject to its availability, at a position easily seen by all contestants, a large electric clock shall be provided to indicate silently the remaining time in the contest. No oral time warnings, blackboard indications, or any other type of remaining time notations shall be employed. If all the contestants agree to its absence, this clock may be omitted. d. At least 30 minutes before the actual beginning of the contest, the contestants, coaches, graders, and other interested individuals shall be gathered together in the contest room, and the rules shall be reviewed. Free asking of questions shall be permitted to see that all concerned are agreed as to the manner of conducting the contest, the point system of grading, the method of breaking ties, and all other items concerning the contest. If a con· ference precedes a contest within 24 hours, and if the rules are reviewed at this conference, a pre-contest review may be eliminated. However, a ques· tion period immediately preceding the contest shall be permitted. e. When the contest is about to begin, all individuals with the exception of the contestants, the slide rule contest director, and one grader shall be excluded from the contest room; throughout the actual contest, only these individuals last mentioned may remain in the contest room. The other graders (if there be any) or other individuals (if there be no available graders for this duty) shall be stationed outside the contest room to act as sergeants·at-arms to effect quietness throughout the actual conduct of the contest. f, The envelope containing the slide rule contest literature shall be opened and the sheet or sheets for tabulation of results shall be removed. These sheets provide a method of preserving the identity of the contestants. The contest director shall number the folded contest papers on the outside and keep memoranda on above mentioned result sheets of the name, address, and school of each contestant to correspond to the numbers respectively assigned, so that at the close of the contest the papers may be identified readily. g. The contestants shall he given orally the following last-minute in­structions: ( 1) Write your answers above the line following the word equals. (2) No oral time warnings or blackboard time tabulations shall be given ; if you desire to see the amount of remaining time in the contest, you may refer to the large electric clock or to your own watch. ( 3) If you finish the contest before the end of the allotted time, re­main at your seat and retain your paper until told to do other­wise. You may use this time to check your answers if you desire. ( 4) Keep your papers folded at all times except when told to do otherwise; this is particularly important while the contest papers are being distributed and before the signal to begin the contest has been given. ( 5) If you are in the process of actually writing down an answer when the quitting signal is given, you may complete writing down the digits of your answer; however, you will not be permitted to determine the decimal placement unless you already know its location before the quitting signal is given. ( 6) In solving combination problems involving successive steps, it is permissible for you to write down any successive results. In fact, you may place as many notations as you desire anywhere on the contest paper with the exception of the answer spaces which are reserved for answer only. You may not use any additional scratch paper. (7) Use either the actual decimal point to indicate decimal place­ment or you may use powers of ten. Both methods may be used on the same paper. If the answer is a whole number it may be written without a decimal point indicated hut with its location under­stood to be at the right side. (8) Remember that if you skip a problem, you will be penalized one point. (9) During the contest proper, no questions may be asked or an­swered. h. Hand out the contest papers by orally calling out the serial numbers and having each contestant identify his. Warn the contestants that the con­test is about to begin. i. Give the signal starting the contest in a manner that is well understood by all contestants. In a clear voice announce, "The contest is about to begin. Get ready. Unfold your paper now and begin." j. Give the "Instructions for Graders of the Slide Rule Contents," en· closed in the contest package, to the grader in order that he may refresh himself concerning the grading of the contest. k. Exactly 30 minutes after the beginning signal has been given, give the signal ending the contest. Announce clearly, "Stop. Fold your papers immediately and turn them in to me." I. Answer no questions concerning the contest at this time. m. Exclude all individuals from the room with the exception of the slide rule contest director and the graders. This applies to contestants, coaches, parents, friends, and all other individuals. n. Remove the answer key from the contest envelope and proceed to grade the contest papers. Allow adequate time for careful, accurate grading of the papers; do not sacrifice accuracy for speed. Double check the grading to be sure that no errors have been made. o. Record the net scores on the outside of each contest paper. p. First place goes to the contestant making the highest net grade; second place goes to the contestant making the next highest net grade; third place to the next highest and so on. q. In the event two or more contestants are tied for first, second, and/or third place in the regional or State Meet, call into the room those contestants involved in the ties and give them the 10 minute tie.breaking contest pro· vided in the contest envelope. Follow items Sa through Sp listed above insofar as they apply to the tie-breaking contest, permitting each contestant to be identified by the same number as that which he used for the regular contest. In the event a tie still remains after the first tie-breaking contest has been given and graded, an additional tie-breaking contest shall be given to only those concerned with the remaining tie; the slide rule contest director shall determine the lS additional problems to be given on this additional 10 minute tie-breaking contest; if he wishes, he may take lS problems from the regular 30 minute contest for the additional tie-breaker. This process shall continue until no ties remain in the first three places of the contest. As a matter of interpretation, if two individuals are tied for first place on the regular 30 minute contest, the one receiving the higher net grade on the tie­breaking contest receives first place and the other receives second place in the general contest. If two individuals are tied for third place on the general 30 minute contest, after distribution of first and second place, either by no ties existing or by the results of the tie-breaking contest, the individual making the higher grade on the tie-breaking contest shall receive third place, and the other individual shall not place at all. No ties in first, second or third place shall be resolved in district competition. r. After all papers have been graded and no ties remain in the first three places, completely fill out the remaining blanks on the tabulation of results sheet. Prepare a list of winners and their schools. Exception, see Rule 5p. s. Gather all contestants, graders, coaches, and other interested parties in the contest room and announce the winners of the contest, that is, the names of the contestants making the first three places and their net scores. Contest­ants should be permitted to examine their papers if they desire, but they are not permitted to retain them. Permit discussion concerning the contest. If it is evident that any errors have been made, correct them and be sure that all contestants are informed of their correction. t. Gather all used contest papers so that none may be retained by the con­testants, coaches, or other interested parties; these shall be destroyed. u. The instructions for graders shall be retained for future use of the slide rule coaches. v. The tabulation of results sheet and the list of winners and their schools shall be given to the director general. 6. Grading the Contests.-Adequate time for careful, accurate grading shall be taken. Accuracy shall not be sacrificed for speed. The State Office of the University Interscholastic League will provide the graders with a list of the correct answers; this list will be included with each regular contest or tie-breaking contest envelope. The grading of all papers and the deter­mination of the net grades shall be double-checked to reduce the possibility of errors. This checking is best done by having the graders exchange papers and grade them a second time in such a way as to avoid being influenced by the first grading. If the two differ the graders should confer and agree on a final grade for the paper. For the sake of uniformity and freedom from argument, all grading shall be done according to answers written on the answer key, unless the contest director desires to contact the slide rule chairman by telephone for a corrected answer. If the latter option is selected, the corrected answer must be received from the state slide rule chairman as soon after the completion of the slide rule contest as practical but in no case later than four hours after the completion of the contest. In the absence of a corrected answer from the state slide rule chairman, all grading must be done according to the answer printed on the answer key, even in the case of an obviously incorrect answer if such ever is the case. Any telephone calls to the state slide rule chairman will be made at neither his expense nor that of the University Interscholastic League. The papers of all contestants in the district, regional, and state slide rule contest and in all tie-breaking contests shall be graded uniformly on the following basis: a. The first significant digit is defined as that digit other than zero which first occurs in the number. The first significant digit of 83.4 is 8. The first significant digit of 0.00428 is 4. b. Three significant digit accuracy shall be required on each problem. If the answer of a problem has just one or two significant digits, the addition of two or one zeros should be used to indicate accuracy to three significant figures. If the answer is 25, to indicate three significant figures it should be written as 25.0. If the answer is 0.04, to indicate three significant figures it should be written as 0.0400. c. The gross grade is the addition of positive points. The negative or sub­tractive grading system shall not be used except in the two cases mentioned in Paragraphs 6e and 6m below. d. The maximum point value for any answer is 5 points; the maximum amount that can be subtracted for any one answer is 1 point as indicated in Paragraphs 6e and 6m below. e. If the first significant digit in the contestant's answer is incorrect ac· cording to the range of acceptable answers given in the answer key, no posi· tive credit shall be given for this problem; in this case 1 point shall be de· ducted from the contestant's gross grade. See Paragraph 6m below. f. If only the first significant digit in the answer is correct according to the range of acceptable answers given in the answer key and if the decimal point is placed correctly, a value of 3 points shall be given for the problem. g. If only the first two significant digits in the answer are correct accord· ing to the range of acceptable answers given in the answer key and if the decimal point is placed correctly, a value of 4 points shall be given for the problem. h. If each of the first three significant digits in the answer is correct ac· cording to the range of acceptable answers given in the answer key and if the decimal point is placed correctly, a value of 5 points shall be given for the problem. i. If only the first significant digit in the answer is correct according to the range of acceptable answers given in the answer key and if the decimal point is placed incorrectly or omitted when necessary, a value of 1 point shall be given for the problem. j. If the first two significant digits in the answer are correct according to the range of acceptable answers given in the answer key and if the decimal point is placed incorrectly or omitted when necessary, a value of 2 points shall be given for the problem. k. If each of the first three significant digits in the answer is correct according to the range of acceptable answers given in the answer key and if the decimal point is placed incorrectly or omitted when necessary, a value of 3 points shall be given for the problem. I. An answer must be written in the space provided to the right of the problem before any credit shall be given for the problem; in this case where the answer has been written but in the incorrect place, the problem shall be counted as having been skipped; see Paragraph 6m below. m. The sum of the points awarded for each problem shall constitute the gross score of the contestant. From the gross score, 1 point shall be deducted for each problem skipped and I point shall be deducted for each answer in which the first significant digit is incorrect according to the range of answers given in the answer key; the latter previously had been mentioned in Para· graph 6e. Those problems occurring after the last problem solved or at­tempted are not considered skipped; hence no deduction shall be made for them. In the case of Paragraph 6e where an attempt at a solution has been made or where the solution has been determined but neither the attempt nor the solution are written in the proper place for answer, the problem shall be considered skipped and one point shall be deducted. n. An illegible figure shall be counted as an incorrect digit. To determine whether or not a figure is illegible, place a blank piece of white paper on either side of it, thus separating it from its context, and then if the grader cannot identify the figure, it shall be counted as an incorrect digit. 7. Qualification.-District winners in each conference qualify for re­gional meets and regional winners for the State Meet in accordance with the schedules provided in Rules 18 and 22 of the Spring Meet Plan. 8. Craders.-A committee of competent and unbiased graders shall be appointed by the director general of the meet to grade the papers produced in the contest and to report grades to the contest director. This committee generally should have three members, but in cases of very small number of slide rule contestants in any one contest, one or two graders may be all that are necessary. In cases where there are large numbers of slide rule con­testants, more than three graders may be used. The contest director should choose the graders in advance of the meet and should use every effort to in­duce the graders to familiarize themselves with the rules. See Paragraph Sa. 9. Assistance.-a. Approximately 60 slide rule practice tests for use in teaching of slide rule operations and in preparing the contestants for the slide rule contests are available from the University Interscholastic League, Bureau of Public School Service, Box 8028, University Station, Austin, Texas 78712. Answer keys are available for each practice set. The cost of each test and its answer key is found in the League publication lists. It is con­templated that each year additional slide rule practice tests will become available. Write the University Interscholastic League for an index of and information concerning these practice tests. b. In addition to the manuals available from the manufacturers of slide rules, the following publications are recommended for additional aid in slide rule instruction: Dana and Hillyard, "Engineering Problems Manual," fifth edition, 1958. McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., 330 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10018. $3.95 per copy. This printed book contains 29 pages of slide rule instruction in addition to 384 pages of elementary general engineering problems and tables. Leach and Beakley, "The Slide Rule," 1953, The Macmillan Company, New York, $1.65 per copy. This book contains 44 pages of slide rule practice problems and instructions. Machovina, "A Manual for the Slide Rule,'' first edition, 1950. McGraw­Hill Book Company, Inc., 330 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10018. 95 cents per copy. This printed book contains 64 pages of slide rule instruction in addition to approximately 12 pages of slide rule practice problems. An excellent discussion of decimal placement appears in this book. Brown and Rylander, "Beginners' Slide Rule Manual," Bureau of Publie School Service, Extension Building 103, Box 8028 University Station, Austin, Texas 78712. 50 cents per copy', postpaid. This publication consists of 55 pages of slide rule instructions, illustrations and practice problems. Thompson, "The Standard Manual of the Slide Rule" second ed., August 1952. Van Nostrum Co., 250 4th Ave., New York, New York 10003. $3.25. This book contains 215 pages, illustrations, problems and answers. Johnson, "The Slide Rule," 1949. Van Nostrum Co., 250 4th Ave., New York, New York 10003. Cost $3.50. Written by the Dean of the College of Engineering at Tulane University, this 242-page book offers a broad cover­age of the C.D., Cl, S.T., ST and L scales, with many illustrations, problems and answers. Arnold, "The Slide Rule," 1954. Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J. 07632. Cost $3.95. This book offers a thorough coverage of the use of a mod­ern slide rule for those interested in a more advanced text. Containing 206 pages with answers to odd numbered problems, the text has been written with engineering application as illustrations. Harris, "Slide Rule Simplified,'' second edition, 1961, The American Technical Society, 848 East 58th St., Chicago, Illinois. Cost $1.50. This book contains 242 pages of elementary instruction, problems and answers. c. The use of slides and sound motion pictures is of great assistance in giving adequate slide rule instruction. The following two 16mm sound-on· film motion pictures are available from the Visual Instruction Bureau, The University of Texas, Austin, Texas 78712: SO 1950 "The Slide Rule," 25 minutes showing time, black and white; $1.90 rental charge. This film explains the parts and markings of a standard 10-inch straight slide rule as well as the use of the C and D scales for multi­plication, division, or a comhination of the two. SO 1949 "The Slide Rule," 21 minutes showing time, black and white; $1.90 rental charge. This film explains percentage, proportion, squares and square roots in the use of a standard 10-inch straight slide rule. d. Large scale demonstration slide rules frequently are available upon permanent loan or moderate charge from the following manufacturers of slide rules: Kueffel and Esser Company, Hoboken, New Jersey. Pickett and Eckel, Inc., 1111 South Fremont Avenue, Alhambra, Cali­fornia. 10. Additional lnformation.-The League office will furnish, upon re­ceiving .05 for postage, a pamphlet entitled "Instructions to Slide Rule Graders." Any additional information concerning the slide rule contest may also be obtained from the University Interscholastic League, Bureau of Public School Service, Box 8028, University Station, Austin, Texas, 78712. Spelling and Plain Writing Contest 1. Divisions.-Divisions shall be made on a grade basis m 12-grade systems, as follows: (a) Grades V and VI; (b) Grades VII and VIII; (c) Grades IX and above. 2. Representation.-Each member school is entitled to enter a team of two in each division for which it has eligible grades.* Thus an elementary school having the usual eight grades may enter two teams, one in the divi­sion for Grades V and VI and one in the division for Grades VII and VIII. A high school may enter only one team; i.e., in the IX and above division. A team may be composed of two boys, two girls, or a girl and a boy. 3. Eligibility.-Each pupil entered in the spelling contest must be eligible under the rules set forth in Article VIII of the Constitution. 4. Word Sources.-The sources from which words shall be taken for this contest in the respective divisions follow: Grades V and VI: League Spelling List, Grades V and VI, and state adopted texts in Grades III and IV, taking words from each text for the contest list. *In case a school has only one pupil in the eligible grades of a given division, the team may be completed by a pupil selected from the next lower grade. Grades VII and VIII: League Spelling List, Grades VII and VIII, and state adopted texts for Grades V and VI, using only words from the state adopted texts in these grades and taking words from each text for the contest list. High School: League Spelling List for High School, and state adopted texts for Grades VII and VIII,t using only the words from the state adopted texts in these grades and taking words from each text for the contest list. The Spelling Bulletin contains all three of the League spelling lists-see Appendix III. 5. Test Lists.-The State Office of the League shall furnish three lists to the director general of each meet, the words therein given to be written from dictation by contestants in spelling, as follows: a. Grades V and VI list shall be made up from sources prescribed above for this division, 90 words to be pronounced at the rate of five words per minute. b. Grades VII and VIII list shall be made up from sources prescribed for this division, 120 words, pronounced at the rate of six words per minute. c. Grades IX-XII list shall be made up from sources above prescribed for this division, 120 words, pronounced at the rate of six words per minute. These three lists shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope and delivered to the director of spelling by the director general on the day set for the spelling contest. The seal of the contest envelope should be broken by the pronouncer in the presence of the spelling contest director, thirty minutes before the con· test actually starts. The pronouncer should devote this initial period to fa­miliarizing himself with the words on the contest list and verifying the pronunciation or meaning of any words with which he is not thoroughly familiar, keeping in mind that Webster's Third International Dictionary, unabridged, is to be used. 6. Equipment.-The contestant shall come to his appropriate division provided with ordinary "wide line" notebook paper ( 8% x 11), and with either lead pencil or pen and ink. 7. Homonyms.-The pronouncer should be careful to distinguish between words which sound alike but have different meanings. Thus, if he pro· nounced the word "bass," he should be careful to say "bass drum," or "bass voice," to distinguish it from "base," meaning "low or mean." 8. Monitors.-The monitors of the contest may, at the option of the di· rector, be appointed to see that the contest is conducted fairly. Contestants should be separated from each other as far as space in the room permits, and t It will be noted that words from state adopted texts are in the nature of a review. any attempt on the part of a contestant to copy from another should be noted by the monitors or pronouncer, who shall report to the director, who may disqualify the contestant. 9. /dentification.-ldentification of spelling papers shall be by number. The spelling director shall keep a list of all contestants, address, school, class, and division in which each is competing, and shall number the entries con­secutively, assigning each contestant his appropriate number, which the con­testant shall be instructed to place on his paper, in the upper right-hand corner. 10. Graders.-The papers shall be gathered up immediately after the close of the contest by the pronouncer and be delivered to the director of spelling, or person acting for him. The director will appoint competent judges to grade the spelling papers, none of whom shall be connected with any of the schools entered in the contest. 11. Team Grade.-The team grade is determined by deducting from 100 one point for each error made by each member of the team. 12. Winning Team.-The team making the highest grade is given first place; the team making next highest grade is given second place; and the team making next highest grade is given third place; and points are awarded according to schedule in Rule 13 of the Spring Meet Plan. It is the duty of the director of spelling to mail all papers graded 100% in the district meet to the State Office for re-grading and award. Only the 100% papers should be sent, and they must be sent within 10 days after the district contest is concluded in order to be eligible for award, which consists of the League Certificate of Excellence in Spelling and Plain Writing. In submitting these papers to the State Office, it is necessary for the di­ rector of spelling to identify each paper by writing thereon the name and address of the contestant, the name of the school represented and the class and division in which the pupil competed. Also it is suggested that each child who has achieved 100% be instructed to write his complete name and home (mailing) address upon his paper­ The State Office must have these in order to send each contestant the certifi­ cate which he has earned. The director of spelling shall include his own name and address with papers sent to the State Office. 13. The Spelling List.-The publication referred to in these rules as "The Spelling List" is The University of Texas Bulletin entitled "Word List for the Interscholastic League Spelling Contest." The price is 10 cents per copy, 75 cents per dozen, and $5 per hundred, postpaid. Instructions to Graders 1. The correct spelling of a word consists in writing legibly the letters which compose it in their proper order. Legibility, and not handwriting s'tyle, is to be emphasized. If two of three judges rule that a letter is legible, it should be considered correct. Letters must be joined to form words. 2. The first authority is the spelling list, which follows in nearly every case the first spelling given in the third edition of Webster's International Dictionary. 3. In case any word is misspelled in any edition of the spelling list, that word is not to be considered in grading the spelling papers. 4. The following faults* in handwriting shall be considered errors: a. An undotted "i" or "j" or an uncrossed "t." (A "Parker" "r" is admissibl@ if it passes legibility test; also "final t.") b. A looped "i" or an unlooped "e" or "I." c. An "n" or "m" not curved at the top. d. A small letter beginning a word which rises as high as the two or three-spaced letters in the word or which rises as much as one space above the other one-spaced letters in the word shall be con­sidered a capital. e. An "o" not closed, or looped at the top. f. Furthermore, any malformed letted or illegible letter, if consid­ered out of its context, is considered a miss. A freakish affectation in writing, such as putting a circle instead of a dot over an "i" is considered a miss. [Note.-To determine whether or not a given letter is legible, place a blank piece of paper on either side of it, thus separating it from its context, and then see whether or not the character may be identified.] 5. The misuse of an apostrophe or hyphen is considered a miss, and a mistake in capitalization is also considered a miss. 6. Words are to be pronounced in regular order in the lists furnished, and any word omitted is a miss. In cases where all papers omit the same word, it * This list of faults has been compiled from a study of thousands of papers submitted in the State contests in spelling, and insistence by teachers on students correcting these faults will do much, it is hoped, to improve the legibility of their pupils' writing. For illustration of these faults, see a special circular entitled "Writing Errors and Plain Writing Guide." t For illustration of malformed letters which are considered errors, see "Writing Errors and Plain Writing Guide," a circular sent upon request and upon receipt of 5¢ for postage. is considered evidence that the pronouncer failed to give this word, so it is not considered a miss. 7. Contractions and possessive forms may be written with all letters con­nected or may be written separately. Either is correct. Story Telling Contest 1. Divisions.-There is only one division in this contest and it is open to children in the second and third grades in elementary school meets. 2. Representation.-Any member school having an eligible contestant is entitled to enter one contestant in the elementary school meet. 3. Eligibility.-In addition to being eligible under Article VIII of the Constitution, only pupils in the second or third grades are eligible in this contest. 4. Director.-The elementary school director general is authorized to appoint a director of story telling. It is the responsibility of the director general to request materials for holding the contest from the State Office. 5. The Story Teller.-The director of story telling may serve as story teller, or appoint a duly qualified person to act in this capacity. 6. Stories.-Stories to be told the contestants for reproduction before an audience will be furnished by the State Office of the League. The stories will be sent in a sealed envelope to the director general, who shall transmit them to the person who is to act as story teller on the day of the contest. Several stories will be sent, from which the story teller may select one. For practice, teachers should use stories from any good children's books. Stories should be approximately three minutes in length. 7. Conducting the Contest.-The pupils who are entered in the contest shall be assembled in a room near the auditorium in which the contest is to be held half an hour before the contest is scheduled to begin. The story teller shall then tell or read the story to the contestants, after having them draw for places on the program. Contestant No. 1 shall then be admitted to the stage of the auditorium and shall tell the story in his own way. When con­testant No. 1 has finished, contestant No. 2 shall be admitted to the stage to tell the story, and so on until all the contestants have delivered their stories. The director of the contest shall disqualify any contestant who delivers a story other than the one presented by the story teller. The story teller shall tell the story to the contestants only once. 8. No prompting.-No contestant shall receive prompting of any kind. He is supposed to make up the plot in his own way if he forgets it. 9. Judges and fudging.-A qualified critic judge may be used or three or other odd number of judges may be chosen on the basis of competence and impartiality by the director of the contest. The judges shall be instructed to rank all the contestants on the following: a. Spontaneity, b. Originality, c. Naturalness of the delivery. The ranks given by the judges shall be com­puted by the director on the same basis as that prescribed in the Rule 2, In­dividual Speech Events, General Instructions. First, second, and third place winners shall be announced. The judges shall not be permitted to hear the story as it is told to the contestants. 10. Ranking the Contestants. At the close of the contest, the judge or judges shall rank the speakers by numbers: 1, 2, 3, etc. In the case of panel judging, a speaker ranked first by a majority of the judges shall be awarded first place. Ballots should he counted in the presence of the contest director. In the event that no speaker is ranked first by a majority of the judges, the contestant the sum of whose ranks is least shall be awarded first place. Other places shall be determined in the same manner. If, however, two contestants receive a majority of seconds or better, and the sum of ranks are equal, the tie shall be broken by the use of judges' pref· erence. For example, if two contestants are tied for any place by virtue of each receiving identical sum of ranks as in this sample: Judge A Judge B Judge C First speaker 2 5 3 Second speaker 4 2 4 then it should be noted that Judge A ranks the first speaker above the second speaker; Judge B ranks the second speaker above the first speaker; Judge C ranks the first speaker above the second speaker. This results in Judge A Judge B Judge C First speaker 1 2 1 Second speaker 2 1 2 Should a three-way tie occur, it will be necessary to break the tie by a method of chance (flipping a coin, etc.). Typewriting Contest 1. Only Accredited Schools Eligible.-This contest is open only to schools which are accorded credit in typing, according to the current issue of the Texas Education Agency Bulletin, entitled, "Standards and Activities of the Division of Supervision," and which follow the time schedule required by the State Department, viz., single or double-period five days per week for 36 weeks during the year. 2. Representation.-Each school entering the contest shall be required to enter two, as a minimum in the district meet. Schools having an enrollment of more than 30 in the first year typing on January 1 may add one additional pupil for every 30 or fraction thereof enrolled in excess of 30, up to five en­tries. No school shall enter less than two or more than five contestants. Pupils having had regular instruction in typing prior to September 1, and pupils who will be graduated at mid-term are not counted on this enrollment. (For "enrollment," see Art. VII, Sec. 19.) 3. Eligibility.-;-Only those pupils eligible under Article VIII of the Co~­stitution shall be permitted to enter this contest, and only those who have had no regular instruction in typing prior to September 1, last. Section 12, Article VIII, does not apply to typing contestants, provided the contestant is representing the high school nearest to his home accredited in typing. Each teacher entering a contestant must be certain that the contestant has had no typing instruction before September 1, last. 4. Qualification.-District winners in each conference qualify for regional meets and regional winners for the State Meet in accordance with schedules provided in Rules 18 and 22 of the Spring Meet Plan. Individuals are quali­fied to enter the next higher meet. 5. State Meet.-Those individuals qualified as indicated in the foregoing paragraph meet for a state championship tournament during the State Meet of the League. Contestants must have their machines set up in Business­Economics Building 502 between 2 and 4 p.m. the afternoon preceding the contest. The contestant, coach, or someone designated by either of them should check the machine to determine that it is in good working condition. 6. General Rule.-The following rules shall govern all League typewriting meets. Every word omitted, inserted, misspelled, or in any way changed from the printed copy shall be penalized. (See Rule 7 for rewritten or transposed material.) Each error due to faulty machines is to be penalized. (See Rule 23 for exception.) An error in the printed copy may be corrected or copied as printed. 7. Rewritten or Transposed Matter.-ln rewritten or transposed matter not more than one error shall be charged for the rewriting or transposition, and one error shall be charged for each error in the original and the re­written material. 8. Contestants Numbered.-Each contestant shall be given a number and that number placed on his contest sheet, so that the identity of the indi-· vidual is withheld from the judges until the awards are made. 9. length of Test.-District, Regional and State Meets.-Each contestant will be given two tests of five minutes each. After the first five-minute test, each contestant will proofread hi~ test as the director reads the copy aloud. At the end of the ~econd test, time will be a!Iowed for each contestant to proofread his second test as the director reads the copy aloud and to score his first and second tests. (1£ a student indicates his errors, he should be taught to circle the word in which an error is made.) The contestant will then select the test which in the opinion of the contestant is the better and hand the se­lected paper to the director for final grading. The alternate paper will also be turned in and destroyed by the contest director. At no time will the spon­sors be permitted to enter the room during the administering of the tests~ Sponsors will not be permitted to examine the discarded papers. However, each sponsor will be permitted to examine his contestant's paper (which has been graded by the committee appointed by the director) and the top five papers in his conference at a time designated by the director before final test results are announced. Typists must cease at the closing signal, even if a word is not complrted. No error is counted for the incomplete word. If the contestant continues lo write, his paper shall be penalized one error. 10. Computation by Strokes and Accuracy.-From the gross number of strokes in the printed test material, deduct 50 strokes for each error made. The net number of words will be found by dividing the net number of strokes by five (the average number of strokes for each word). Divide the result by five or ten (the length of the test) to get the net rate per minute. Or, divide the gross number of strokes by five. This will give you the gross number of words written. From this figure, deduct the penalty-IO times the number of errors. Divide this result by five or ten (the length of the test) to get the net words per minute. 11. Final Rating.-The final rating, however, shall be based upon both speed and accuracy. To the net words per minute shall be added the per· centage of accuracy for the final score. To find the percentage of accuracy, divide the total words written into the total net words written. Example: The student writes 700 words with three errors; correct words written 670 (700 minus 30), divided by total words, 700, equals .9571; move the decimal point two places to right-95.71, which is the percentage of accuracy. In this example the student's speed is 67 (670 divided by 10). The speed, 67, plus the percentage of accuracy, 95.71, equals the student's score, 162.71. The rankings must be based upon this score. 12. Size of Page.-A page 81/z x 14 shall be used. The District, Regional, and State Directors must furnish paper for all contestants. (Suggestion: No easy-erase paper should be used.) Write only on one side of each page. Any paper typed on the reverse side will be penalized one error for each line. 13. Spacing.-All work shall have double spacing. One error shall be counted for every line not properly spaced. 14. length of line.-Each line, except the last line in a paragraph, shall contain not less than 61 strokes nor more than 76. Space counting begins at the left margin. Do not count a space after the last word of a line. One error shall be counted for each line not qualifying. The five spaces indented at the beginning of a paragraph are counted in measuring the strokes of the line. 15. Paragraphing.-Paragraphs shall be indented five spaces. One error shall be counted for every irregularity. When the contestant fails to indent five spaces for paragraph indention and an error is made in the first word in the paragraph, he will be penalized for two errors. 16. length of Page.-Each page, except the last, shall contain at least 33 lines of writing. Only one error is charged for a "short" page-not one error for each line the page is short. A contestant may use a warning mark for the bottom of the page. 17. Marking of Errors.-Each error shall be indicated by drawing a circle around the word in which an error is made. 18. Spacing after Punctuation.-Two spaces follow all end punctuation marks. All other points have one space, except a dash, which has no space either before or after it. (A dash is made by two strokes of the hyphen.) Either one or two spaces may be used after the colon. a. Count a word as an error if the punctuation after it is typed incor­rectly. b. Count a word as an error if the spacing after it is incorrect. c. Count only one error against one word, no matter how many errors it may contain. d. Count as part of a word: (a) the space that follows a word, (b) a punctuation mark that might follow a word, ( c) the space or spaces that follow the punctuation mark. Only 1 error is counted even if all these are incorrect. Example: girlwent to 1 error grlwent to 1 error girlwont to 2 errors girlwentto school 2 errors girlwontto school 2 errors When you have a double adjective modifying a noun (Example: first­ class registered mail) and there is an error in both adjectives, follow the examples below when grading. Example: frst-class registered 1 error frst class registered 1 error frstclass registered 1 error first-doss registered 1 error frst-closs registered 2 errors frst-closs regestered 3 errors Hyphenated words (when each is a dictionary word) are considered as separate words; therefore, an error in each word will be penalized. Example: fourth-class mail forth-class 1 error forth class 1 error furth-closs 2 errors 19. Faulty Shifting and Cut Letter.-1£ only a part of a letter is seen, an error shall be charged. A lightly struck letter or character is no error if the entire character is visible. Any letter so near the edge of the paper that the whole letter does not appear on the paper shall be penalized--one error for each word. Each raised or lowered capital shall be penalized one error. (See Rule 23 for exception.) 20. Strikeovers and Erasures.-A strikeover or an erasure is an error and shall be penalized. 21. Margin.-Any irregularity in the left-hand margin is an error and shall be penalized. 22. Division of words at the End of a Line.-Any word wrongly divided at the end of a line shall be penalized. Any standard dictionary is an au­thority. This authority shall be presented to settle a dispute. 23. Spacing of Letters.-One error shall be charged for each word in which any letter does not occupy its proper place vertically and/or hori­zontally. If the error is due to key alignment of the machine, and not to poor stroking, it should not be counted against the student. A careful study should be made of the entire test to determine whether or not a letter out of align· ment appeared in like position each time it was struck. For example: If the letter "p" is slightly raised or lowered in the word "speed" but is in its proper place both vertically and horizontally in all other instances in the copy, an error shall be counted against the student; but if the letter "p" is slightly raised or lowered in every instance, it would indicate faulty key alignment of the machine; and no error shall be counted against the student. 24. Equipment.-Only manually operated machines are permitted. Ma­chine may have elite or pica type. Machine must have standard bell. (A con­testant may furnish his own table if he wishes to do so.) 25. Starting Time.-AII tests must start at the time set in the official pro· gram. Warmup tests must be given but just one official test may be counted in any meet. Definite signals for the beginning and ending of the official test must be agreed upon and given. 26. Test.-All contestants, regardless of classification of school, should take the same test at the same time. The official material must not be prac­ticed before the test; this material must be opened in the presence of the contestants. 27. Graders.-It is the responsibility of the contest director to get the papers graded, and he may select the graders he needs. The teachers who have contestants make the best graders. Each teacher having an entry or en­tries and his contestant or contestants will be permitted to examine the con· te~tant's or contestants' papers before final scores are announced officially. 28. Directors.-Directors having entries in the contest shall not be per­mitted to be in the room during the administering of the test. The contestant or contestants of any director who violates this rule shall be disqualified. Di­rectors must read and follow all rules. They must refrain from exercising their personal opinions. The director of the contest may select assistants to help get ready for the tests. While the final warmup test and the official test are given, only the director and one person appointed by the director (not a director or teacher with an entry) shall remain in the room. The director of each contest or his appointee shall make a final review of papers before they are examined by the teachers and their contestants. If a teacher contests the grading of his student's paper, the director shall send that paper along with the five highest in rank to the state director-before the official results are announced in a particular conference. After official announcement of win­ners has been released, no changes can be made in the first five places. Directors will receive contest material from the director general of the meet who receives it from League Headquarters, Austin. Rules for Music Competition NELSON G. PATRICK Director of Music Introduction Rules and regulations for two types of music competition are outlined in this section. Each contest is designed as a culminating activity for a year's work in music instruction in the public schools. Instrumental and vocal competition for high schools and junior high schools will be conducted at Regional Music Competition. Administrators and music teachers are encouraged to read these sections carefully to determine the value which may be received from motivating music instruction through competition. The State Director of Music Activities for the Interscholastic League is eager to be of assistance to the music teachers in providing teaching aids and suggestions which will make musical instruction more effective. Music competition will be organized, promoted and administered in the same manner as are other phases of the League program. Rules of a technical nature pertaining to the administration of music con­tests are studied and needed changes recommended to the Legislative Council by a Music Advisory Committee. This group counsels with the Director of Music Activities during an annual meeting held the second week in June. Music educators in each region from schools which are parpicipating in the League program elect one representative to this committee. Repre· sentatives serve for for a term of two years. Even numbered regions elect delegates on even numbered years and odd numbered regions elect delegates on odd numbered years. Proposed changes in eligibility rules or rules affecting school policy shall be submitted to the Legislative Council of the League for study. For legis· lative procedure, see Articles IV, XIV and XV of the Constitution. General Regulations CODE: Participation in League competition implies that each member school shall observe all the implications of fair play, courtesy and sports· manship. Achieving the ultimate in excellence of a performance shall be the goal instead of winning. The competition is designed to motivate music education throughout the year. Directors shall use the competition to en· courage and teach music appreciation, technical facility, stage deportment, audience deportment and good citizenship in general. Competition should assume and maintain a regular position as an agency for education and character building in the general educational philosophy of the public schools. Disqualification from Music Competition for the current academic year and the following year may result if a school fails to adhere to the rules and regulations as stated in this bulletin. Suspension of a Region from the music competition for the following academic year may result if a Region fails to conduct the Regional Music Contest according to the rules and regulations as stated in this bulletin. 1. Participation.-No school shall participate in the Interscholastic League competition whose acceptance card is not on file in the League office by September 1, and whose membership dues are not paid for the current year. Each individual school unit of a system must file an acceptance card in order to become eligible for participation. Article Ill, Section 1, defines eligibility for League membership. Cards acknowledging receipt of acceptance cards will be sent out by the State Office. If you do not receive such a card within a reasonable time, con­tact the State Office. Note: New schools intending to enter music contests may become eligible by notifying the State Office by letter prior to the deadline September 1. 2. Classification.-Participating schools shall be assigned for competition for the school year 1966-1967 as follows: AAAA-High schools with an average membership of 1050 or more stu­dents in grades 9-10-11-12. AAA-High schools with an average membership of 450-1049 students, inclusive, in grades 9-10-11-12. AA-High schools with an average membership of 225-449 students, inclusive, in grades 9-10-11-12. B---High schools with an average membership of 114 or fewer students in grades 9-10-11-12. CCC-Junior high schools with an enrollment of 650 or more students in grades 9 and below at the time of application for membership. CC-Junior high schools with an enrollment of 300-649 students in grade 9 and below at the time of application for membership; and, school units composed of grade 8 and below with 649 or more students. C-Junior high schools with an enrollment of 299 or fewer students in grade 9 and below at the time of application for membership; and, school units composed of grades 8 and below with 649 or fewer students. Note 1: Assignment to conferences as outlined in this section is mandatory and schools must participate in the conferences to which they are assigned in all events. Note 2: The addition of students resulting from the use of composite groups as provided for in Section 12 will not affect classification in any way. Note 3: Second bands, orchestras and choral groups may participate in the competition provided 1) Second Group indication is entered on the Music Acceptance Card and is on file in the State Office by September 1 of each school year; 2) A parent group has been entered and is eligible to compete in Music Competition; 3) Second Groups will compete as "second groups" and not with a lower or other classification; 4.) Second Groups must compete in the same contest as the parent organization. Music must be selected ac­cording to instructions in the Prescribed Music List Bulletin. (For 1965­66-67 Competition, this information will be found in the Supplement to the Prescribed Music List for school years 1963-1964--1965-1966.) 3. Regions.-Texas shall be divided into Fifteen Regions for Music Com­petition. Region I-Armstrong, Bailey, Briscoe, Carson, Castro, Childress, Cochran, Collings­worth, Crosby, Dallam, Deaf Smith, Dickens, Donley, Floyd, Gray, Hale, Hall, Hansford, Hartley, Hemphill, Hockley, Hutchinson, Lamb, Lipscomb, Lubbock, Motley, Moore, Ochiltree, Oldham, Parmer, Potter, Randall, Roberts, Sherman, Swisher, and Wheeler. Region II-Archer, Baylor, Clay, Cooke, Cottle, Denton, Fisher, Foard, Hardeman, Haskell, Jack, Johnson, Jones, King, Knox, Montague, Palo Pinto, Parker, Shackelford, Stephens, Stonewall, Tarrant, Throckmorton, Wichita, Wilbarger, Wise and Young. Region III-Collin, Dallas, Delta, Ellis, Fannin, Grayson, Hopkins, Hunt, Kaufman, Lamar, Navarro, and Rockwall. Region IV-Anderson, Angelina, Bowie, Camp, Cass, Cherokee, Franklin, Gregg, Harrison, Henderson, Marion, Morris, Nacogdoches, Panola, Rains, Red River, Rusk, Shelby, Smith, Titus, Upshur, Van Zandt, and Wood. Region V-Brewster, Culberson, El Paso, Hudspeth, Jeff Davis, and Presidio. Region VI-Andrews, Borden, Coke, Crane, Crockett, Dawson, Ector, Gaines, Garza, Glasscock, Howard, Irion, Kent, Loving, Lynn, Martin, Midland, Mitchell, Nolan, Pecos, Reagan, Reeves, Runnels, Scurry, Sterling, Taylor, Terrell, Terry, Tom Green, Upton, Ward, Winkler, and Yoakum. Region VII-Brown, Burnet, Callahan, Coleman, Comanche, Concho, Coryell, East· land, Erath, Hamilton, Hood, Kimble, Lampasas, Llano, Mason, McCulloch, Menard, Mills, San Saba, Schleicher, Somervell, and Sutton. Region VIII-Bastrop, Bell, Bosque, Brazos, Burleson, Falls, Fayette, Freestone, Hill, Lee, Limestone, McLennan, Milam, Robertson, Travis, and Williamson. Region IX-Grimes, Harris, Houston, Leon, Madison, Montgomery, Polk, San Jacinto, Trinity, Waller, and Walker. Region X-Chambers, Hardin, Jasper, Jefferson, Liberty, Newton, Orange, Sabine, San Augustine, and Tyler. Region XI-Bandera, Blanco, Dimmit, Edwards, Frio, Gillespie, Kendall, Kerr, Kinney, LaSalle, Maverick, Medina, Real, Uvalde, Val Verde, and Zavalla. Region XII-Atascosa, Bexar, Caldwell, Comal, Gonzales, Guadalupe, Hays, and Wilson. Region XIII-Austin, Brazoria, Calhoun, Colorado, De Witt, Fort Bend, Galveston, Jackson, Lavaca, Matagorda, Victoria, Washington, and Wharton. Region XIV-Aransas, Bee, Duval, Goliad, Jim Wells, Karnes, Kleberg, Live Oak, McMullen, Nueces, Refugio, San Patricio, and Webb. Region XV-Brooks, Cameron, Hidalgo, Jim Hogg, Kenedy, Starr, Willacy, and Zapata. Competition shall be held in each region, and organizations and indi­viduals shall compete in regions to which they are assigned. The State Executive Committee shall appoint in each region an executive committee composed of seven school administrators. These members shall serve three-year overlapping terms. Each committee shall elect its own chairman who shall serve a one-year term or continue in office until a successor has been appointed; however, he may be reelected. 4. Duties of Regional Executive Committee.-The regional executive committee shall have general charge of the organization and management of the regional competition. It shall be the duty of this committee: a. To appoint band contest chairmen, vocal contest chairmen and orches­tra contest chairmen to administer the respective contests. b. To make all arrangements for the regional competition relative to place, time, judges, entries, and finance. c. To enforce all rules and regulations, to settle all disputes and all ques­tions of eligibility arising within the region according to Articles XII and XIII of the Constitution and Contest Rules. d. To investigate and check the eligibility of contestants. e. To canvass schools for entries and to cooperate with schools in effecting and promoting regional competition. f. To correspond with the State Office with regard to the interests of the work. g. To work in general toward making the regional competition worth· while in and by itself. h. To distribute all awards, ratings and judges' comments to the partici­pating schools. i. To file a list of the schools participating in the contest in the State Office 20 days prior to the contest date. j. To file a complete financial report with the State Office, on or before June 1. k. To certify to the State Office the results of all contests within five days of the close of the contest. 1. To administer the music contests according to the rules and regulations as stated in this bulletin. m. To disqualify from the Music Competition for the current academic year and the following year any school which fails to adhere to the rules and regulations of music competition as stated in this bulletin. n. To contract, and file in the State Office, duplicate copies of the record­ing agreements of each regional contest in which the recordings are made. 5. Expenses of the Regional Committee.-The regional executive com­mittee has authority to outline and put into operation a plan for financing its own meetings. 6. Duties of Contest Chairmen.-lt shall be the duty of the vocal contest chairman, the orchestra contest chairmen and the band contest chairmen to : a. Submit to the Regional Executive Committee recommendations rela­tive to the time, place, judges, entries, financing and general plans for the regional competition. b. Conduct the music contest according to the rules and regulations as stated in this bulletin. c. Certify to the State Office results of all regional contests within five days of the close of the contest. d. Send carbon copies of judges' comments for band, orchestra, and choir contests to the State Office within five days following the close of these con­tests. Note: Failure to comply with these responsibilities may result in the suspension of the region for the following academic year by the State Execu­tive Committee. 7. Eligibility. a. All eligibility regulations outlined in Article VIII of the Constitution of the Interscholastic League shall apply to League music competition. Super­intendents or principals shall certify the contestants at the time of their entry into the regional competition. (Note: Article VIII, Section 8, Section 11, Section 12, and Section 14 apply only to the specific contests stated herein.) b. No one shall be eligible to take part in any League music contest or event who has received money or other valuable consideration for teaching music or for officiating in any music event. 8. Regional F ees.-Each regional executive committee shall have the authority to assess and collect such fees as are decided advisable for the operation of the regional competition. Proper officers may lie designated by the executive committee to receive and dispense these fees. 9. Rebate to the Regional M eet.-All funds collected by the executive committee from concessions, admissions and fees at the regional competition in excess of the amount necessary to defray the incidental expenses of the meet may be prorated up to 100 per cent to the participating schools on the basis of 10 cents per mile both ways. 10. Selection of !udges.-Each regional executive committee shall have the authority to select and contact judges for the regional competitions. The executive committee shall set the amount of fee paid to any judge. Regional executive committees are requested to adhere to the following principles when employing judges: a. A band, orchestra, or choral judge must reside outside the region in which he is being employed to officiate. Solo and ensemble judges may be selected from other zones within the same region. b. A judge should be currently teaching, conducting or performing in the field in which he is employed to judge. c. A judge must have a college or conservatory background in music. d. A judge should be required to have either studied a "Handbook for Judges" or have attended at least one of the workshops for judges. e. A judge may not evaluate an organization in regional competition for which he has served as clinic·conductor during the current year. f. If a judge gives a rating other than Division I, he is expected to ex· plain on the comment sheet what the student or groups should do to improve the performance. g. The judge shall call to the attention of the Contest Chairman any ir­regularities of procedure on the part of the participant, prior to au­ditioning the contestant. No rating or comments will be given a con­testant who fails to follow the established procedures unless directed to do so by the Contest Chairman. h. Judges shall report any act of discourtesy by a participant or music director to the Contest Chairman, who shall forward the report to the Regional Executive Committee for action. 1• A judge may not accept a judging invitation from a region or zone in which he formerly resided, unless three years have elapsed since the time of last residence. j. A judge invited to adjudicate in organization events (band, orchestra or choir) may not accept an invitation to judge in the same capacity in the same region, unless two years have elapsed following the last judg­ing assignment. k. Judges shall be instructed not to confer before ratings are placed on judging sheets and those sheets are collected for tabulation. 11. Judging Standards.-The performance of the soloist, ensemble or organization on the stage or field at the time of the contest is the only factor which can be considered in determining ratings. All regions shall be guided by the bulletin, Standards of Adjudication, published by the University In­terscholastic League in establishing basic standards of judging. Each com­peting soloist, ensemble or organization shall be assigned a rating desig· nating the excellence of its performance as follows: Division I, Superior. The best conceivable performance for the event and the class of participants being judged; worthy of the distinction of being recognized as a first place winner. Division II, Excellent. An unusual performance in many respects but not worthy of the highest rating due to minor defects in performance or ineffective interpretation. A performance of distinctive quality. Division III, Average. An average performance, but not outstanding. Showing accom­plishment and marked promise, but lacking in one or more essential qualities. Division IV, Below Average. A below average performance, not worthy of a higher rating because of basic weaknesses in most of the fundamental factors. Division V, Poor. Much room for improvement. The director should check his meth· ods, instrumentation, etc., with those of more mature organizations. Chart for Computing Ratings Three Judges--Five Ratings Rating I Rating II Rating III Rating IV RatingV 1-1-1 1-2-2 1-3-3 1-4-4 1-5-5 1-1-2 1-2-3 1-3-4 1-4-5 2-5-5 1-1-3 1-2-4 1-3-5 2-4-4 3-5-5 1-1-4 1-2-5 2-3-3 2-4-5 4-5-5 1-1-5 2-2-2 2-3-4 3-4-4 5-5-5 2-2-3 2-3-5 3-4-5 2-2-4 3-3-3 4-4-4 2-2-5 3-3-4 4-4-5 3-3-5 12. Composite Groups.-When students from grades lower than the high school are combined with high school students to form a competing high school unit (conferences AAA, AA, A and B); or, when students from grades lower than the junior high school are combined with the junior high school students to form a competing junior high school unit (conferences CCC, CC and C), the resulting group is known as a composite group. The following statements shall govern the use of composite groups: a. Composite bands are permitted in conferences AAA, AA, A, B, CCC, CC and C, only. b. Composite choral groups are permitted in conferences AAA, AA, A, B, CCC, CC and C, only. c. Composite orchestras and string orchestras are permitted in all con­ferences. d. Combined orchestras and string orchestras, i.e., orchestras and string orchestras from similar school units ... two or more junior high schools or two or more schools composed of the eighth grade and below from the same school system ... are permitted in conferences CCC, CC and C, only. e. No student may be permitted to perform in an organization classed lower than his school classification, i.e., a high school student may not perform in a junior high school group, etc. f. No student shall compete in two bands, two orchestras or two choral groups of the same type. 13. Additional Competition.-Member organizations may enter a maxi­mum of two music meets within the 12-month period of September 1, through August 31, in addition to the University Interscholastic League regional competition. 14. Observe Rules.-Each school shall observe faithfully all rules con­tained in Article VIII of the Constitution. In case an ineligible contestant is used in any competition, knowingly or unknowingly, the minimum penalty shall be forfeiture of the rating. 15. Protests.-All protests must be made to the proper committee within 24 hours after the organization performs, except that protest based on the alleged ineligibility of a contestant may be made at any time; provided, it is made immediately upon discovery of the facts on which the protest is based. Protests must be made in writing and signed by a superintendent or princi­pal. A protest based on a judge's decision will not be considered. 16. Entries.-All entries must be made out in compliance with Rules 21, 30 and 37 of this section and postmarked as directed no later than 30 days preceding the first day of the competition. Entry forms may be ordered from the State Office at a nominal cost. The Regional Executive Committee cannot certify entries which are postmarked later than 30 days prior to the first day of the event. Failure to receive official printed entry blanks does not consti­tute an exception to this rule. 17. Au·ards.-The following schedule of awards is mandatory as the standard to be used in regional competition. No ratings or awards other than those herein provided for shall be given. A school that accepts ratings or awards other than those herein provided for shall be subject to suspension by the State Executive Committee upon recommendation of the regional ex. ecutive committee. The awards referred to in this section are manufactured by the Herff.Jones Company, and may be purchased by respective Regional Executive Commit· tees at the bid prices quoted by the State Office. This contract has been ne­gotiated on competitive bids submitted to the State Executive Committee. Awards may be replaced if lost, damaged, or stolen, by the Regional Executive Chairman. Proof of rating and replacement costs must be submit· ted with the request for replacement. A Marching Trophy may be presented to a band which earns a Division I rating in marching provided this band does not qualify later for either a Special Award Plaque or a Sweepstakes Trophy. An Event Award Plaque may be presented to any band, orchestra or choir which achieves a Division I rating in either concert or sight reading pro· vided this organization does not qualify for the Special Award Plaque. A Special Award Plaque may be presented to any band, orchestra or choir which achieves a Division I rating in both concert and sight reading. This award may not be presented to bands which qualify for the Sweepstakes Trophy. A Sweepstakes Trophy may be presented to any band which earns a Di­vision I rating in concert, sight reading and marching. Any organization achieving a Division II rating in any event is entitled to receive an Organization Certificate. These certificates are supplied by the State Office. A Gold Solo Medal may be presented to a Class I soloist who achieves a Division I rating. A Silver Solo Medal may be presented to a Class II soloist who achieves a Division I rating. A Bronze Solo Medal may be presented to any soloist who earns a Division I rating in Class III competition. A Gold Twirling Medal may be presented to a Class I twirler who achieves a Division I rating. A Bronze Twirling Medal may be presented to a Class III twirler who achieves a Division I rating in Class III competition. A Gold Twirling Medal may be presented to each member of a Class I twirling ensemble which achieves a Division I rating. A Bronze Twirling Medal may be presented to each member of a Class III twirling ensemble which achieves a Division I rating. A Gold Ensemble Medal may be presented to each member of a Class I ensemble which achieves a Division I rating. A Silver Ensemble Medal may be presented to each member of a Class II ensemble which achieves a Division I rating. A Bronze Ensemble Medal may be presented to each member of Class III ensemble which achieves a Division I rating. lndivUlual Certificates may be presented to any soloist or ensemble of any class who achieves a Division II rating. These certificates are supplied to the contest chairman by the State Office. Special Rules Governing Solo Competition 18. Qualification.-Any soloist who meets the ellgibility requirements referred to in Rule 7 and complies with the specific regulations in this sec­tion may be entered in solo competition in the regional competition. All soloists must compete for ratings. 19. Membership.-All soloists competing in approved solo events must be members of a band, orchestra or choir currently eligible to compete in the regional music contest. Piano solo competition shall be conducted in conjunction with the solo contest. (Exception: Where there is no organized parent group in the school pro­viding a place for a particular soloist as listed previously, that student may enter the competition provided a music acceptance card has been filed, mem­bership fees have been paid and an affidavit is executed by the principal or superintendent stating that there is no parent organization in the school. This affidavit must be attached to the duplicate of the official entry blank.) 20. Classification.-Solo events will be grouped in four divisions: band, orchestra, vocal and miscellaneous. Three classes of competition will be held in the band, orchestra and vocal divisions and for piano in the mis­cellaneous division: Class I solo competition may be entered by any student. Selections to be performed must be taken from the lists prescribed for Class I competition. No other numbers will be permitted. Class II solo competition may be entered by any student in grades 9, 10, 11 or 12 who has not previously earned a Division I rating in Class I or Class II competition. Students in the ninth grade and below may enter Class II competition at any time regardless of the rating previously earned. Se­lections to be performed must be taken from the lists prescribed for Class II competition. Class III solo competition may be entered by any student in the ninth grade or below who has not previously entered Class I or Class II competi­tion. (It is recommended that vocal students in the ninth grade and below enter Class III competition.) Twirling will be conducted in Class I and Class III competition only. 21. Entry.-An individual entry-evaluation blank must be prepared in its entirety, including the title of the solo, for each solo entry in a regional competition. This form must be mailed to the regional contest director and postmarked no later than 30 days preceding the announced date of the com­petition. In addition, two copies of a master solo-ensemble form (No. 9) must be executed listing each soloist and each member of an ensemble. These forms must be mailed to the Regional Executive Chairman accompanied by a check covering the prescribed entry fees. All entries must be postmarked at least 30 days before the first day of the competition. 22. Selections.-The required selections to be performed by all classes of soloists will be published in the early fall preceding the competition. Students who do not perform numbers appearing on the prescribed lists will be prohibited from entering the competition. In the event that a soloist does not conform to program requirements as listed on the entry blank after the entry has been certified, that soloist shall not be eligible to receive either an award or a rating. No student may repeat a solo which he has performed in previous League competition. Twirling competition will be conducted in accordance with requirements listed under special sections in this bulletin. 23. Limitation.-No student may exceed the maximum number of solo and ensemble entries listed below: a. Each student may enter a maximum of two instrumental events which may be either: (1) Two solos provided they are performed on different instruments and different music is performed, OR (2) Two ensembles, if instrumentation changes, provided they are dif­ferent events as listed under Rule 34, different music is per· formed and the majority of members is different, OR ( 3) An ensemble and a solo. b. In addition to two instrumental events as listed above, each student may enter two vocal events which may consist of: ( 1) A vocal solo and a vocal ensemble, OR (2) Two vocal ensembles provided they are different events as listed under Rule 34, different music is performed and the majority of members is different. c. In addition to the instrumental and vocal entries listed above, each student may enter a maximum of two twirling events which may be: ( 1) A twirling solo and a twirling ensemble, OR (2) Two twirling ensembles provided they are different events (a quartet and a quintet; or a quartet and a sextet, etc.) , and the majority of the members is different. 24. Performance Regulations.-All soloists shall perform for a rating and conform with the following miscellaneous requirements: a. Scores.-Each soloist shall supply the judge with one score of his se­lection with measures numbered. The judge is instructed not to permit per­formances to begin until he has received this score. b. Memory.-All soloists must perform their selection from memory. c. Repetition.-A soloist shall not repeat a number used by him in pre­vious League contests. d. Time.-Playing or singing time shall not exceed six minutes. Judges may stop the performance and judge on the portion performed. e. Accompaniment.-All solos shall be accompanied and shall be ac­companied by piano only except those solos which are written expressly for an unaccompanied instrument or voice. Directors should limit the number of soloists one accompanist may assist. 25. Approved Solo Events.­ Band Piccolo B-Flat Tenor Saxophone Flute Baritone Saxophone Oboe Bass Saxophone English Horn Cornet-Trumpet Bassoon French Horn E-Flat Clarinet Trombone B-Flat Clarinet Baritone Alto Clarinet Tuba Bass Clarinet Snare Drum E-Flat Alto Saxophone Orchestra Double Bass Violin Harp Viola Violoncello Vocal Boys Medium Voice Girls High Yoice Girls l\ledium Voice Boys Low Voice Boys Unchanged Voice Girls Low Voice Boys High Voice Miscellaneous Competition Twirling Piano Special Rules Governing Ensemble Competition 26. Definition.-Ensembles shall consist only of those groups listed in Rule 34. No other combinations will be permitted to enter. 27. Qualification.-Any ensemble, the members of which meet the eligi· bility requirements listed in Rule 7, and comply with the specific regulations of this division, may be entered in the regional ensemble competition. All ensembles must compete for ratings. 28. Membership.-All member ensembles competing in events listed in Rule 34 must be members of the parent organization currently eligible to compete. Members of twirling ensembles are not required to march in the contest performance. 29. Classification.-Ensemble events shall be grouped in four divisions: band, orchestra, vocal and twirling. Three classes of competition will be held in the first three divisions: Class I ensemble competition may be entered by any ensemble. Selections to be petformed must be taken from the list prescribed for Class I competi· lion. No other selections will be permitted. Class I I ensemble competition may be entered by any student in grades 9, 10, 11 or 12 who has not previously earned a Division I rating in Class I or Class II competition. Students in the ninth grade and below may enter Class II competition at any time regardless of the rating previously earned. Se· lections to be performed must be taken from the lists prescribed for Class II competition. Class I I I ensemble competition may be entered by any student in the ninth grade or below who has not previously entered Class I or Class II competi· tion. (It is recommended that vocal students in the ninth grade and below enter Class III competition.) Twirling ensemble competition is limited to Class I and Class III competi· tion only. 30. Entry.-The entry evaluation blank must be prepared in its entirety, including the title of the ensemble selection, for each ensemble entry in the regional competition. This form must be mailed to the Regional Executive Chairman and postmarked no later than 30 days preceding the announced date of the competition. In addition, two copies of a master solo-ensemble form (No. 9) must be ex· ecuted listing the name of each member of an ensemble and grouping the ensembles together. Each student must be listed in each ensemble in which he performs. All copies must be mailed to the Regional Executive Chairman accompanied by a check covering the prescribed entry fees. The Regional Executive Chairman will mail a list of schools participat· ing in the contest to the Director of Music Activities, University lnterscho· lastic League, Box 8028, University Station, Austin, Texas 78712, 10 days following the entry· deadline OR 20 days prior to the contest. 31. Selection.-The required selections to be performed by all classes of ensembles will be published in the current issue of The Prescribed Music List. Groups which do not perform numbers appearing on the prescribed lists will be prohibited from participating in the competition. In the event that an ensemble does not conform to the program require· ments as listed on the entry blank after the entry has been certified, that ensemble shall not be eligible to receive either an award or a rating. NOTE: In emergency situations, the director may substitute another eli· gible student for an ensemble member after the entry has been submitted but prior to the first day' of the contest. The substitution must be made in writing to the contest chairman. 32. Limitation.-No student may exceed the maximum number of solo and ensemble entries listed below: a. Each student may enter a maximum of two instrumental events which may be either: ( 1) Two solos provided they are performed on clifferent instruments and different music is performed, OR (2) Two ensembles, if instrumentation changes, provided they are dif­ferent events as listed under Rule 34, different music is performed and the majority of members is different, OR (3) An ensemble and a solo. b. In addition to two instrumental events as listed above, each student may enter two vocal events which may consist of: (1) A vocal solo and a vocal ensemble, OR (2) Two vocal ensembles provided they are different events as listed under Rule 34, different music is performed and the majority of members is different. c. In addition to the instrumental and vocal entries listed above, each student may enter a maximum of two twirling events which may be: ( 1) A twirling solo and a twirling ensemble, OR (2) Two twirling ensembles provided they are different events (a quartet and a quintet; or a quartet and a sextet, etc.), and the majority of the members is different. 33. Performance Regulations.-All ensembles must perform for a rating and conform with the following miscellaneous requirements: a. Scores.-Directors shall supply to the judge one conductor's score with measures numbered. The judge is instructed not to permit performance to begin until he has been supplied with such score. b. Time.-Playing or singing time shall not exceed six minutes. Judges may stop the performance and judge on the portion rendered. c. Memory.-All ensembles may use scores. d. Repetition.-An ensemble may not play or sing a selection which has been used as a contest selection by a similar ensemble from the same school in the previous year, unless half the members of the group did not participate in the ensemble the previous year. e. Direction.-Ensembles of eleven members or more may be conducted. £. Accompaniment.-Accompaniment is not required but must be by piano when used. 34. Approved Ensemble Events.­ Band Woodwind trio (flute, clarinet, bas· Saxophone sextet (two altos, two soon) tenors, baritone, bass) Woodwind trio (flute, oboe, clarinet) French horn quartet Woodwind trio (oboe, clarinet, bas­Trombone trio soon) Trombone quartet Woodwind quartet (flute, oboe, Cornet trio clarinet, bassoon) Cornet quartet Woodwind quintet (flute, oboe, clari­Baritone trio net, born and bassoon) Bari tone quartet Miscellaneous Woodwind Ensembles Brass quartet (two cornets, two (Only the instrumentation stated in trombones) the prescribed music lists may be Brass sextet (two cornets, horn, used. Parts may not be doubled.) trombone, baritone, tuba) Flute trio Miscellaneous brass ensembles Flute quartet (Only the instrumentation stated in Clarinet trio (three B-flat sopranos) the prescribed music lists may be Clarinet quartet (four B-flat so­used. Parts may not be doubled.) pranos) Drum trio (three snares) Mixed clarinet quartet (two B-flat Drum quartet (two snares, cymbal, sopranos, alto and bass) bass) Saxophone quartet (two altos, tenor, Drum quintet (three snares, cymbal baritone) and bass) Orchestra Piano trio (violin, cello, piano) String quintet (two violins, viola, String trio (violin viola cello) cello, bass) String trio (three ~iolins) Miscellaneous string ensembles String quartet (two violins, viola, (Only the instrumentation stated in cello) the prescribed music list may he String quartet (four violins) used. Parts may not he doubled.) Vocal Girls trio (SSA) Boys quartet (TTBB) Girls quartet (SSAA) Madrigal Mixed quartet (SATB) (A maximum of 16 and a minimum Boys trio (TTB orTBB) of five students in this event.) Twirling Twirling trio Twirling quintet Twirling quartet Twirling sextet Special Rules Governing Organization Events 35. Number of Events.-Competition will be organized at each regional competition in the following organization events: a. Band e. Mixed Chorus h. Marching Band £. Boys' Chorus c. Orchestra g. Girls' Chorus d. String Orchestra 36. Qualification.-Any band, orchestra or choir from a school unit which is a paid member of the League and which has filed a music acceptance card with the State Office prior to September 1, of the year of competition, may be entered directly in the regional competition. All members of the com­peting organization must be eligible under the requirements listed in Rule 7 of this bulletin. 37. Entry.-Six copies of the entry-evaluation form must be prepared for each organization entering a regional competition, including marching bands. Two copies of the official entry form (form #1) must be prepared listing personnel of the competing group. Mail both copies of the official entry form # 1 and all six copies of the entry-evaluation form with fees attached to the Regional Executive Chairman. After the Regional Executive Chairman has checked the entry blanks a certification of each entry will be mailed to the regional contest chairman. Regional contest directors are instructed not to enter any organization if a certification has not been received from the Regional Executive Chairman. The Regional Executive Chairman will mail one official entry form #1 for each participating organization to the Director of Music Activities, Uni­versity Interscholastic League, Box 8028, University Station, Austin, Texas 78712, 10 days following the deadline, or 20 days prior to the contest. 38. Performance Regulations.-All organizations must perform for rat­ings and conform with the following miscellaneous requirements: a. Program.-Each band, orchestra, string orchestra and choral group entering a regional competition shall conform to the performance require­ments listed in the Foreword of the Prescribed Music BUlletin in effect for the current school year. This bulletin may he secured from the Bureau of Public School Service, Box 8028, University Station, Austin, Texas 78712, upon payment of $2.60 per copy. Band and Choir entries will be certified provided only three selections are listed on the entry form. Orchestra entries will be certified provided only two selections are listed on the entry form. Those selections so listed on the entry form become program requirements for contest performance unless the Contest Chairman is notified of changes of selections, in writing, 48 hours prior to the first day of the contest. (Note: "to be selected" is not an official entry.) Choral groups shall sing all numbers from memory. One of the three numbers must be sung unaccompanied and all three may be. All choral groups are required to sight read one number. The director and accompanist will not be permitted to sing with the group unless they are eligible under Article VIII of the Constitution. b. Required Music.-Prescribed lists from which required numbers are to be taken will be compiled by appointed committees of music instructors prior to and at called meetings to be held during the summer months. The prescribed lists will be available in the early fall preceding the com· petition. An organization may not perform a number used by that group during the preceding three years. Exception: Two year C, CC organization may not repeat a number used during the preceding two years. Organizations which do not conform to music requirements shall be pro· hibited from participating in competition. In the event that an organization does not conform to the program re· quirements as listed on the entry blank after the entry has been certified, that organization will not be eligible to receive either an award or a rating. c. Sight Reading.-Regions will require all organizations to enter a sight reading contest. Any organization which has rehearsed the sight reading music shall be disqualified from Sight Reading Competition. Sight reading will be judged on accuracy of reading, flexibility in fol­lowing the director, adherence to style, interpretation, and good musical taste. Ratings received in sight reading will be published as a separate contest, and will not affect the ratings received in the concert performance. The procedures for conducting the sight reading contest: Band and Orchestra ( 1) Each director will be given one minute to study the score. (2) Each organization will be given five minutes to study the music, and to receive instructions from the director. The director may instruct the group as he sees fit including singing phrases or illustrating rhythmic figures. He may not allow students to tap rhythms or perform any part of the music in any fashion. (3) The organization will then perform the number without interruption or further instructions. ( 4) A band or orchestra, whose director makes an obvious contribu· tion to the group's pedormance at the Sight Reading Contest by either singing with or speaking to the group during the performance, will be dis­qualified. (A judge's decision of what is obvious is final.) Choirs ( 1) Each director will be given one minute to study the score. (2) Each choir will be given five minutes to study the music, and to re­ ceive instructions from the director. A choral director may tap out rhythms and talk about any pas­sage of music, but he may not hum nor sing any part or allow it to be played on the piano. Students may not reproduce the music in any faskion. ( 3) At the completion of the five minute instruction period, choirs will be given the pitch and each section may hum the starting tone. The pre­scribed selection will then be sung twice; first with the piano, and then without the piano. No comments shall be made by the director between the two pedormances. ( 4) A choir, whose director makes an obvious contribution to the group's performance at the Sight Reading Contest by either singing with or speak­ing to the group during the performance, will be disqualified. (A judge's de­cision of what is obvious is final.) d. Performing Time.-The total performance time for orchestras and bands should not exceed 45 minutes. Choruses shall not consume more than 15 minutes including entering and clearing the stage. e. Scores.-Directors shall supply each judge with a conductor's score of the selections to be performed with the measures numbered. Judges are 1directed to delay the performance until such scores have been supplied. These scores must be the original published score. Reproduced copies of the published score will not be accepted. f. /nstrumentation.-While judges shall be instructed to criticize instru· mentation only insofar as it affects the balance and general effect of the performance, schools are encouraged to conform as closely as possible with accepted standards of instrumentation. The following patterns are suggested: Orchestra 16 First Violins 8 String Basses 14 Second Violins 2 Flutes 10 Violas 2 Oboes 8 Violoncellos English Horn 2 Clarinets l Tuba 2 Bassoons 4 Percussion (including timpani) 4 Double French Horns 1 Harp (where called for in score) 2 Trumpets Cff Cornets 3 Trombones 80 Band 8 Flutes (one or two interchangeable with piccolo) 1 E-Flat Clarinet (may be replaced by an E-Flat Flute or an additional C-Flute) 24 B-Flat Clarinets 4 Alto Clarinets 4 Bass Clarinets 1 Contra-Bass Clarinet 2 Oboes 1 English Horn 4 Bassoons 8 Saxophones (including 4 altos, 2 tenors and 2 baritones) 10 Cornets and Trumpets 8 Double French Horns 4 Baritone Horns 9 Trombones (Third trombones may be Bass) 2 E-Flat Tubas 4 BB-Flat Tubas 1 Timpani 3 Other Percussion 1 Harp (if called for in score) 1 String Bass 100 Rules for Special Contests 39. Marching Contest.­ a. Marching contests will be held in each region. (While bands are not required to enter, they are encouraged to do so in order to promote a well­balanced program of band activity.) b. The time for the marching contest will be set by the regional executive committee. c. Each member school will be allowed one entry of the designated classi­fication in the marching contest. d. Each competing band must occupy the marching field for not more than eight minutes nor less than five minutes. Timing shall begin when the band executes the first step off or the first note of the music "whichever comes first." It shall be the duty of the contest chairman to provide an adequate warning signal at the end of seven minutes. Any band which leaves the field in less than five minutes or fails to vacate the field in eight minutes shall be penalized one rating. e. Required Movements.­ (1) Forward March--(step off) (2) Halt (whileplaying-continuetoplay) (3) Counter March or To The Rear (while playing) (4) Either: Right Oblique and its correction movement. Forward (while playing) ; or, Left Oblique and its correction move­ment, Forward (while playing); OR Right or Left Flank and the converse movements, Left or Right Flank as required to correct the direction (while playing); OR Column Left or Column Right (while playing) ( 5) Start and Cease Playing-(while marching) f. Special Formation.-Each organization may perform such formations or drill as it selects provided it does not exceed the maximum time allowed for performance. 40. Twirling Competition.­ a. Competition in twirling shall be offered for both soloists and ensembles. Ensembles shall consist of trios, quartets, quintets and sextets only. All twirl­ing contests are limited to Class I and Class III competition. b. To be eligible to participate in twirling solo or ensemble competition, students must comply with Rules 18-25 of the music section; conform to the special rules in this section and be members of a marching band cur· rently eligible to compete. A twirler may enter a maximum of two twirling events. c. Performance time for this event shall be limited to six minutes. The University of Texas Publication d. Each contestant shall perform each of the following movements: ( 1) Military salute. (2) Forward figure eight (both hands). ( 3) Reverse figure eight (both hands) . ( 4) Pass around back, left to right, from the two hand spin. ( 5) "The Little Joe Flip." (Reverse Cartwheel Flip) (To execute a "Little Joe Flip": do a reverse cartwheel with a com· plete flip to each side, so that each time the hand grabs the baton, the thumb is toward the ball of the baton.) ( 6) Finger twirl (both hands). (a) Four finger twirl from the figure eight, through each finger and back through each finger (not over the hand). (b) Four finger twirl over the back of the hand. (c) Forward and reverse two finger twirl with forward figure eight pattern. (7) Aerial work. (a) Vertical high tosses. (b) Horizontal tosses (releases from both hands). (c) Continuous one revolution time tosses (both hands). ( 8) Each contestant will be expected to present an original routine. The routine may be planned to include the other seven require· ments listed above. e. Twirlers both in solo and ensemble competition, be limited to two competitive meets, outside League contests, during the school year. Rules for Athletic Contests RHEA H. WILLIAMS Associate Director and Director of Athletics Box 8028, University Station Austin, Texas 78712 The purpose of the athletic program of the University Interscholastic League is: 1. To assist, advise and aid the public schools in organizing and con­ducting interschool athletic contests. 2. To devise and prepare eligibility rules that will equalize and stimulate wholesome competition between schools of similar rank, and reinforce the curricular program. 3. To equalize and regulate competition so that the pupils, schools and communities may secure the greatest social, educational and recrea­tional returns from the contests. 4. To help the school make athletics an integral part of the educational program. 5. To preserve the game for the contestant and not sacrifice the contestant to the game. 6. To promote the spirit of sportsmanship and fair play in all contests. 7. To promote among the players, schools and communities a spirit of friendly rivalry and a respect for the rules of the contests. The League is vitally interested in the welfare of every boy and girl par­ticipating in the athletic contests. To protect the physical well-being of the contestants it is required that every contestant be given a thorough medi­cal examination by a physician before participating in the athletic games and contests of the League. The Athletic Benefit Plan In accordance with the recommendations of the State Meeting of Delegates at the annual meeting on May 4, 1940, the State Executive Committee has incorporated into the athletic section of the Constitution and Contest Rules an athletic benefit plan. The purpose of the benefit plan is to assist League members, who have athletic teams participating in interscholastic athletics, to meet the costs of injuries incurred by team members injured during practice or games spon­sored by the school. It is also believed that the inauguration of the insurance program will lead to the development of a safer game for the reason that it will cause coaches and administrators to become "safety minded." 1. A school must be a member of the University Interscholastic League, and dues for the current year be paid in accordance with Article III. 2. In order to be eligible for the athletic accident benefits, a pupil must be regularly enrolled in a school which is a member of the League. 3. All benefit checks will be paid in accordance with the provisions in the insurance contract. 4. The benefit plan is entirely voluntary. 5. Each pupil insured under the plan should have a thorough physical examination before participating in a practice or a game. 6. It must be clearly understood by pupils, parents or guardians, and member schools that participation in the athletic benefit plan shall not be construed as an acknowledgment by schools themselves or the University Interscholastic League of liability for injuries incurred in athletic com· petition by pupils participating in the plan. The State Executive Committee for the 1966--67 school year has elected not to approve any specific insurance company. Football Plan The Football Code.-The football code means to play the game in the spirit of fairness and clean sportsmanship; to observe all rules and not attempt to hold, "beat the ball," or coach from the side lines because it can be done without the knowledge of the referee, or to resort to trickery in equipping or preparing players. It means to accept decisions of officials without protest; to see that officials are extended protection and courtesy by players, school personnel, and laymen; to treat your opponents as your guests, and to put clean play and real sportsmanship above victories. It means the ability to win without boasting and to lose without grudge. "Vic· tory is no great matter. The important thing in sports is the manly striving to excel and the good feeling it fosters between those who play fair and have no excuse when they lose." The development and recreative aspects of football should be strongly emphasized in all contests. It shall be considered dishonorable and contrary to good sportsmanship to withhold evidence against any player or school without presenting the same to the proper committee or to the school ad· ministration concerned. 1. Eligible Schools.-Only senior high schools are eligible in football. No school shall participate in League football unless its acceptance of this plans is on file in the State Office by September 1. The application for mem­bership in the Football Plan shall be signed by the superintendent or his designated administrator. A school which does not participate in football after signing the accept­ ance card may be suspended in this activity for a period of one year, unless sufficient justification is shown for not entering a team. A non-participating school the preceding year desiring to participate shall so notify the State Office one year in advance. Schools participating in football for the first time may be assigned the first season to a district on a non-honor basis. 2. Employment of Football Coaches.-A school is not eligible for Inter­scholastic League football competition: a. Whose head coach or whose assistant coaches are not full-time em­ployees (This rule shall not affect the status of a coach on a leave of absence attending college.) of the school board of the school which the team repre­sents. "Full-time" means full-time for the whole scholastic or calendar year; or b. Which contracts to pay its football coach out of gate receipts, or which draws its contract with its coach in such a way as to make it to the immediate financial advantage of a coach to win games. (1.) It shall be against the rule for a contract to be based upon a percent­age of the gate receipts. (2.) It shall be desirable for the salary to be fixed at the beginning of the year, and to include no provisions for bonus. (3.) The salary of the coach shall be paid from funds under the complete control of the school board, and disbursed to the coach in the regular way in which the other sal,aries are disbursed. ( 4.) Any contract which makes it to the immediate financial interest of a coach to win a game will be in violation of the spirit of the rule which has been adopted. 3. Conferences.-Participating high schools shall be divided into con­ ferences for the 1967-68 school year as follows: Conference AAAA . . . .. ........ ......... 1050 and up Conference AAA .. . . .... . ............... 450 to 1050 Conference AA ... . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . .. ..... 225 to 450 Conference A .......... . .... ... . ll5 to 225 Conference B . . .... ....... . ..... ... ll4 and under A high school with less than 100 may enter a team in six or eight-man football. High schools must play in the conference for which their "average mem­bership" qualifies them and there shall be no exceptions to this procedure. Member schools shall be classified for competition in football on the basis of the number enrolled in the last four grades in high school as de­termined by the figures given in "average membership" of the Superin­tendent's Annual Report, and there shall be no exception to this procedure. The "average" of the 1963-64 and 1964-65 "average membership" shall be used for assigning schools for the 1966-67 and 1967-68 school years. Schools shall be assigned for a period of two years in the same district and conference in football and these assignments shall commence on even numbered years. Only newly created schools and consolidated schools can be assigned to a conference on a one-year basis during odd numbered years. 4. Districts.-The state shall be divided into districts for conferences AAAA, AAA, AA, and A, and competition shall include a state champion­ship. Announcements concerning the arrangement of all conferences having state championship playoffs will be issued during the season. Conference B and six or eight-man football districts will be arranged for a regional play­off but competition shall not extend further than a regional championship. Usually five to eight schools compose a district. Schools are assigned to districts by the State Office. The list of district chairmen, their addresses and district numbers, will be mailed out to member schools during the early part of September of each year. It shall be the duty of the superintendent, principal, or coach in each school com­peting under this plan, to inform himself regarding the district chairman, time of meeting, etc. If the chairman moves from the district without calling a meeting, each school in the district has a responsibility to notify the State Office so that another chair­man may be named. 5. District Organization (Conferences AAAA, AAA, AA, A, and B and Six or Eight-Man Football.)-The chairman of the old district executive committee shall serve as temporary chairman for the district and he shall call a meeting of all participating schools in the district, preferably in the spring but in any case not later than Saturday following the third Monday in Sep­tember. (The State Executive Committee urges the district chairman to call his organization meeting in the spring.) At this meeting a district execu· tice committee shall be created composed of superintendents or their desig· nated administrators from participating schools. Each participating school present shall have one vote. At least ~wo alternates (must be superintendent or his designated administrator) should be elected to serve in case members of the committee are disqualified. If only one member is disqualified the first-named alternate should serve. A member of the committee shall be dis­.Jualified to act in a case in which his school is one of the two involved. In each new district, and in case of vacancies, a temporary chairman shall be appointed by the State Office. It shall be the duty of the chairman to call the organization meeting. 6. Duties of District Executive Committee.-lt shall be the duty of the district executive committee: a. To enforce all rules and regulations, to settle all disputes and all questions of eligibility arising inside the district. There shall be no appeal from any decision rendered by this committee. b. To certify to the State Office an eligible district champion not later than the date prescribed on the League calendar for such certification, after which the committee's functions cease. In case of dispute, certification to the State Office shall be in the form of a written notice naming the eligible school and must be signed by a majority of the members of the district executive com­mittee; provided the State Committee shall have the authority to reject for interdistrict competition any football team whose district committee has adopted any rule or regulation limiting the eligibility of players beyond the requirement set forth in the Constitution and Contest Rules and the Football Plan. The district executive committee must certify an eligible champion without any conditions attached to this certification. c. To arrange a round-robin schedule in the district to close not later than the date designated in the 1966-67 League calendar for each respective conference. In districts that have 10 or more participating schools sub-districts may be created, in which case round-robin schedules shall be arranged in the sub-districts to close in sufficient time to schedule an elimination game so that the district championship may be determined by the proper time. Districts with fewer than 10 schools may be subdivided. The subdivisions of a district shall contain an equal number of teams, or as nearly equal as can be; e.g., a district having seven teams shall be divided on a 3-4 basis. d. To investigate and check the eligibility of players in the district and to furnish to member schools in the district a list of eligible players submitted by each school and to investigate transfers with a view to determining whether or not transfers are bona fide. In case the transfer is not considered bona fide by the district committee, it shall have the power to declare the contestant in question ineligible for football. e. To uphold the principle that high school football is worthwhile in the school as an educational force when properly controlled. Efforts on the part of any school official or local "fan" to recruit players shall be considered a violation of this principle and shall subject the school at fault to disqualification. Disqualification may be made by the committee after the school concerned has been given an opportunity to be heard in its own defense. When a school is disqualified it shall remain on the disqualified list until the superintendent has convinced the committee that the errors complained of have been removed and that he, the super­intendent, can guarantee the proper conduct of football in his school. 7. Expenses of District Committee.-The district executive committee has authority to outline and put into operation a plan for financing its meetings under the following restriction: If the assessment plan is used the assessment for any school shall not exceed one-half of its regular League membership fee. The failure of a school promptly to pay its assessment, after having been notified, shall subject it to a penalty of elimination from consideration for district honors. If a school refuses or fails to pay its assess­ment after the close of the season, it may be debarred from participation the following year or until the amount is paid. At the close of the season the district executive committee shall furnish each participating school in the district a financial statement showing all receipts and disbursements for the season. 8. District Disqualification.-A district shall be disqualified in the re­gional or state race, if its committee certifies to the State Office a team which has used an ineligible player in any game that counted on League standing, such disqualification to be made only upon presentation of evi­dence to the State Executive Committee. l f a football team is certified as district champion which has used a contestant not eligible under Interscholastic League rules, the State Executive Committee has juris· diction under Rule 8 of the Football Plan to re-determine questions of eligibility, Rule 6a of the Football Plan having applicability only to intradistrict competition. 9. Eliminations.-Conferences AAAA, AAA, AA, and A district cham­pions are bracketed for elimination play to a state championship on a weekly schedule beginning the first weekend after the specified date for determining district champions. State elimination games may not be sched· uled earlier than the first weekend after the certification date for district champions. Conference B district champions are bracketed for a regional championship to be concluded not later than the second weekend after dis­trict championships are determined. Six or eight-man district champions are bracketed for regional cham­pionships to be concluded not later than the second weekend after district championships are determined. 10. Jurisdiction of lnterdistrict Disputes.-The State Executive Com­mittee shall have jurisdiction in all disputes arising between district winners that have been duly certified. 11. Number of Games.-Between September 9 and November 19, in­clusive, in conferences AAAA, B, Six-and Eight-Man football, no boy shall participate in more than 10 games, with the exception that, conference AAAA districts composed of ten (IO) or more schools that elect to divide into two (2) zones may play a ten-game football schedule while determining the two (2) zone champions. The zone champions may then play an additional game for the district championship. Between September 9 and November 19, in­clusive, in conference AAA no boy shall participate in more than 10 games. Between September 9 and November 12, inclusive, in conferences AA and A football, no boy shall participate in more than 10 games. No boy, in any conference, shall be permitted to take part in more than one game during any given period of five days. The five-day period is considered as being within five calendar days. 12. Games That Count on Percentage.-lnterconference or interdistrict games between participating schools shall not count on a team's percentage. A defeat by a non-participating Texas high school, except by a junior high school or dormitory school, or a public school in good standing with the Prairie View Interscholastic League, regardless of size or date, shall elimi­nate it from the district, state, or regional race. A defeat by a school not eli­gible to membership in the League shall not count. 13. A Practice Scrimmage.-A scrimmage or practice period to which no admission is charged, which is not on an announced Echedule and which is not regularly conducted by an official or officials shall not count as a game. No boy shall participate in more than one interschool football scrim­mage during any given period of seven days, prior to the playing of the first football game. (The seven day period is considered as being within seven calendar days.) No interschool scrimmages shall be allowed after a school has played its first interschool game in football. 14. Tie Games.-In interdistrict elimination contests a team shall re­ceive one point for each time it penetrates its opponent's 20-yard line. In the meaning of this provision, a team has penetrated its opponent's 20-yard line when the ball has been declared dead legally in its possession on, above or behind the opponent's 20-yard line. It is understood that only one penetration may be counted during one continuous possession of the ball. A play from outside the 20-yard line which results in a touchdown shall count one pene· tration. If this plan shall fail to determine a winner, the team that has made the greater number of first downs shall proceed in the race. A first down shall be counted when the required distance has been made. If the two teams are still tied after counting first downs, the one that has gained the most net yardage from scrimmage shall be declared winner. For most purposes the 20-yard penetration rule merely shortens the field and creates a second goal line. Whenever a ball is declared dead, legally in the possession of a team on, above or behind the goal line, that team is awarded points. The same principle should be followed in awarding points for penetrating the 20-yard line. Whenever a team has penetrated its op­ponent's 20-yard goal line and the ball has been declared dead, legally in its possession on, above or behind the 20-yard line, that team is entitled to one point. A penetration on the fourth down shall be counted provided the team has legal possession of the ball at the time it is declared dead by the referee on, above or behind the 20-yard line. It shall be the duty of the referee of the game to interpret and enforce this rule and his decision is final. The game officials are to keep a record of the number of penetrations, first downs, and yardage from scrimmage and make a report to each school in case of a tie. Points thus made are, of course, not considered unless the game results in a tie. It is simply a method of breaking a tie, not in any sense a new method of scoring. Unless mutually agreeable otherwise in advance of the game, this rule shall apply in the regional and state championship games. 15. Breaking Contracts.-A game cancelled after contract has been signed, unless both parties agree to the cancellation, shall be forfeited to the team not at fault. The district executive committee may recommend to the State Executive Committee the suspension of a school for cancelling regularly scheduled conference games for the purpose of playing non-conference or out-of­district games, and the State Executive Committee may suspend a school for such cancellation. 16. Reports.-Each team shall make a complete report (forms furnished by the League) of every game in duplicate immediately after the game. One report shall be sent to the State Office and one to the chairman of the district committee. The district committee may disqualify a team for its failure promptly to report its games. It will be noticed that this rul,e gives the district committee authority to interpret the wo.rd "promptly." 17. Observe Rules.-Only male students satisfying all the requirements of Article VIII of this Constitution are eligible in football. In case an in­eligible man is used in any League game, knowingly or unknowingly, the minimum penalty shall be forfeiture of the game. 18. Football Code.-By accepting this plan, the coach and other officials of each school pledge themselves to act in the spirit of the "Football Code" and to foster this spirit among ~he players. It is recommended that the home team provide four legally deputized men to be placed in each corner of the playing field for the purpose of helping insure proper conduct of fans and of providing an escort for the game officials while they are serving in an of­ficial capacity. Also, that each member school construct a fence around the playing field to restrain the crowd and to keep them from moving out on the field. Further, that the public address system at the game be used to explain to the fans the meaning of the Football Code and the fact that the code binds the fans of both insti­tutions to abide by the decisions of officials; that at the beginning of each game the officials be introduced as guests of both teams. 19. Eligibility Blanks and Season Report.-Each school shall fill out an eligibility blank in triplicate furnished by the League, these blanks to he signed by the superintendent or his designated administrator, one for school files, one mailed to the State Office, and one filed with the chairman of the district executive committee, before the school is allowed to take part in any game. Failure to furnish correct and complete information shall constitute grounds for suspension. At the end of the season the superintendent or his designated administra­tor of each school shall send to the State Office a list of all players who have participated in football during the season as representatives of the school. Failure to submit a correct and complete list shall constitute grounds for suspension. 20. Guarantees.-The visiting team always has the right to demand a guarantee sufficient to cover all expenses and in addition 50 percent of the net gate receipts of the contest. A demand of a flat guarantee which is clearly in excess of expenses, shall upon action of the district or State Executive Committee, disqualify the of­fending team for further participation. The visiting team has the right to demand one-half of the stadium seats beginning on the 50 yard line. [Note.-In this connection, expenses of visiting teams, officials, adver­tising, labor, services, and printing incident to the contest shall be con· sidered as expenses of the game. These expenses shall be itemized with sup­porting bills, properly receipted. Number of men allowed upon expense account shall be agreed upon by coaches or managers of teams involved. Unless mutually agreeable otherwise, the home team will furnish a playing field without cost to the visiting school.] Proceeds from the sale of season tickets are considered a part of the receipts of the game. 21. Officials.-All officials must be satisfactory to both parties and agreed upon in advance. Teams are urged always to secure outside officials. The visiting team should insist upon an agreement on officials prior to the day of the game. A school that refuses to play a game because the officials agreed upon have not been secured shall not be considered as breaking its contract. The responsibility to engage satisfactory officials is upon the home school. Beginning a game with an official constitutes agreement. 22. Plnce of Game.-Unless mutually agreeable otherwise, the place for playing a game within the district shall be determined on the "home and home" basis for the past six years, except in a state or regional elimination game the place shall be determined on the basis of the last game (within six years) between the two schools which counted on League standing. The team that was the visiting team the last time the two teams met on a home field may insist upon the game being played upon its home field, except as pro­vided above. The home team may designate the day for the game. Starting time of the game shall be by mutual consent, or in case of disagreement by the decision of the district executive committee. In case of disagreement between two teams that have had no football re­lations during the past six years, the place shall be decided by tossing a coin. The State Executive Committee, in December, 1940, ruled that the word "years" in this rule should be taken to mean football seasons. In other words, games are to be settled on a home and home basis within the past six "football seasons." For illustration: any game played prior to the 1935 season has no bearing upon this rule since it is outside of the last six football seasons. Seasons are counted as follows: 1940-1, 1939-2, 1938-3, 1937-4,1936---5,1935--6. In 1935 Team A and Team B were in the same football district. Team A played Team B on Team B's home field. The following year Team A and Team B were placed in separate districts. In 1940 Team A and Team B won their respective district champion· ships. The co mmittee ruled that next game should be played on Team A's field. 23. Seven and One-half Percent lnterdistrict Receipts.-Seven and one­half percent of the gross receipts of interdistrict games in the state cham­pionship races shall be paid to the State Office to maintain a fund for investi­gating eligibility questions and to supplement printing, salary, office ap­propriations relating to football, and for the purchase of medals, trophies and awards in Interscholastic League State Meets. The radio broadcast re­ceipts and the telecast receipts are to be considered a part of the game re­ceipts in all interdistrict games. 24. Protests.-All protests must be made to the proper committee within 24 hours after the game is played, except that a protest based on the alleged ineligibility of a player may be made at any time; provided, it is made immediately upon discovery of the facts on which the protest is based. Protests must be made in writing and signed by superintendent or his desig­nated administrator. A protest based on an official's decision will not be considered. In passing upon eligibility of players the district committee acts in a judicial capacity. A proper judicial approach involves reasonable notice (i.e., sufficient to permit an answer to charges made or issues raised) , an opportunity for a fair hearing, and an unbiased decision based upon the evidence presented. 25. School Authorities Responsible.-Responsibility for the proper con­duct of football in a school system shall rest with the superintendent. All contracts, arrangements and controls of all games shall be under the super­vision of the superintendent or his designated administrator. 26. Trophy for State Champion.-A regulation-size silver football will be awarded to the school that wins the state championship under this plan; and a smaller trophy for the runner-up. 27. No /nterschool Spring Scrimmage or Football Games.-No member school shall play any football game, practice, or scrimmage with another high school after February 1. The penalty for violation of this rule shall be assessed by the State Executive Committee. 28. Schedule of Maximum Fees for Officials.-The following are the maximum amounts that may be paid to any one official as a fee for officiating in a League football game: Receipts Fee If up to $150 ------------------------------------------------------------$10.00 If $150 to $250 ------------------------------------------------------12.50 If $250 to $500 __ -----------------------------------------------------17.50 If $500 to $1,000 -----------------------------------------------__ _ 22.50 If $1,000 to $2,000 --------------------------------------------------27.50 If $2,000 to $3,000 --------------------------------------------------32.50 If $3,000 to $4,000 ____ ----·-------·············-------------------37.50 If $4,000 to $5,000 ·-·-····-················· -········----------··--45.00 If $5,000 to $10,000 ··-···-·············--·--------------------·---50.00 If $10,000 or above -----··--·------·-----·-···--· -·-----------... 60.00 The district executive committee may in emergency cases modify the provisions of this section for application inside its district on an individual game basis. It is recommended that four officials be assigned for all games which count on League standing. Allowable Maximum Expenses for Officiating For one official 7 ¢ a mile for total mileage; for two or more officials traveling together by automobile 8¢ a mile. Expenses for local entertain­ment, defined as follows: Taxi fare to and from ball field, if used; local meals as agreed upon and as arranged for by school authorities; hotel room, if required, to be secured and paid for by local school authorities. No other items are to be included in an expense account of officials, and neither fees nor expenses for officials shall be supplemented from any source. Violation of the rules governing the employment and pay of football officials shall carry the same penalty as the violation of any eligibility rule; that is, forfeiture of the game. In emergency cases, if the rules in regard to fees of officials are violated by a member school, the facts shall be reported to the district executive committee at a meeting to be called as soon as possible after the game to decide on the merits of the case and to apply the penalty; or, if an emergency is proved, to waive the penalty. The district committee may declare that, in its judgment, an emergency arose, and, therefore, waive the penalty. 29. Playing Rules.-"The 1966 National Collegiate Athletic Association Football Rules" with the optional rules listed in the supplement, shall gov· em all League football games. 30. Footbal,l Practice Periods.-ln Conference AAAA spring football practice or training shall be limited to 21 consecutive calendar days, and there shall be no football practice or training, and no football equipment is­sued after the close of the district schedule, except as incident to the football championship playoffs and the 21 consecutive days of spring football train­ing. Fall football practice in Conference AAAA may not begin earlier than the third Monday prior to the second Friday in September and, during the first four days of practice, no contact activities shall be conducted and no contact equipment shall be issued. Contact equipment shall be defined as shoulder pads, hip pads, helmets, football pads and pants. Further, no inter­school game shall be played until the second Friday in September. In all conferences football shoes and socks may be issued by the school on or after the Wednesday preceding the opening date of fall football practice. No organized instruction, drills in calisthentics, or conditioning periods shall be conducted prior to the opening date of practice. In conferences AAA, AA, A, B, six or eight-man, no member school shall permit any football practice or scrimmage and no football equipment shall be issued after the close of the district schedule, except as incident to the football championship play offs. Fall football practice may not begin earlier than the third Monday prior to the first Friday in September. No interschool scrimmages shall be held the first week of fall practice. No interschool games shall be played until the second Friday in September in Conferences AAA, AA, A, B, Six-and Eight-Man. In Conferences B, Six-and Eight-Man football, the first week of fall prac­ tice shall be limited to conditioning exercises only, and no contact activities shall be held, and no contact equipment issued until seven days after the beginning of fall football practice. Contact equipment shall be defined as shoulder pads, hip pads, helmets, football pads, and pants. Football practice or training is interpreted to mean any organized in­ struction in football plays, formations or skills. Football equipment is interpreted to mean the issuing of football, football shoulder pads, shoes, headgear, football trousers, or any other equipment used primarily in football. Accelerated physical education activities, calisthentics, or conditioning exercises may be conducted during the school term in the school day, pro­ vided it does not exceed one period a day. This period is not to exceed sixty minutes. Classes before and after school hours or during noon hours are prohibited. The specific grouping of high school athletes, such as football players, during the summer months for the purpose of conditioning and/or organized football instruction is prohibited. The State Executive Committee on May 24, 1950, discussed the wording of Rule 30 and adopted the following interpretation : that participation in the summer public recreation program by high school boys would not be construed as a violation of the Football Practice Rule, provided the summer programs are not conducted as condition­ing period for football players; and provided there is no football equipment issued, such as is described in Rule 30 of the Football Plan. A specific grouping of high school athletes, such as football players, for the purpose of conditioning these boys for foot­ball practice would be construed as a violation of the above designated rule. Any high school football team shall be disqualified for district honors the following fall if their school system ( 1) holds any pre season football prac­tice in junior high school or elementary school prior to the opening day of school, or (2) conduct any spring football training either in elementary school or junior high school the preceding spring. Pupils in the ninth grade may participate in spring football training in Conference AAAA schools provided ( 1) that such participation is on a site and at the same time as the high school squad practices and (2) that said high school is the one which the junior high school students will attend the following fall. 31. Postseason Games.-No school may engage in any postseason game, other than in regular interdistrict play offs scheduled by the League. A postseason football game in conferences AAAA, AAA, B, Six-and Eight-Man football is one played between two schools after November 19. A postseason football game in conferences AA and A is one played between two schools after November 12. The penalty for infraction of this rule shall be assessed by the State Executive Committee. 32. Radio Broadcasting and Telecasting.-A radio committee appointed in 1939 worked out the plan for broadcasting quarterfinal, semifinal and final games. Since that time, a yearly contract has been negotiated by the State Committee, on the basis of competitive bids for the broadcasting and telecasting rights to these games. The broadcasting and telecasting rights granted to the successful bidder are for both "live" and delayed broadcasts and "live" and film telecasts of the games. The contract for broadcasting the football games for the 1966 football season applies only to conferences AAA and AAAA. Schools in confer­ences AA, A, B, and six or eight-man football make their own arrangements for football broadcasts in accordance with the provisions of the contract forms supplied by the State Office. The money received from the broadcasting rights shall be distributed to the eligible participating schools on the following basis: 40 percent of the total amount is to be distributed equally among the eight teams in quarter­finals; 40 percent of the total amount to be distributed equally among the four teams in semifinals; 20 percent of the total amount to be distributed equally between the two teams in the final game. Telecasting receipts shall be distributed to participating teams on a per­game basis on the same plan as is used for distributing broadcasting receipts. 33. Location of Training Camps.-The football training period shall be held on the campus of the local school or on a site controlled by the school board and lying within the boundaries of the school district. In the judgment of the State Executive Committee it was not the purpose of this rule to prevent occasional scrimmages between neighboring teams which do not involve overnight housing for either team outside its own school district. 34. All-Star Games.-No athletic director, coach, teacher, administrator or school district of a member school shall at any time assist either directly or indirectly with the coaching, management, direction, selection of players, promotion, officiating, or allow public school facilities or equipment to be utilized in any all-star game (exception, Texas High School Coaches Asso­ciation game), in which one or more of the competing teams is composed of a player or players who, during the previous school year, were members of a high school football team. Any member high school violating the provisions of this all-star contest rule shall be subject to probation or suspension. 35. Medical, Certificate and Parent's Permit.-There shall be on file in each school a medical certificate and a permit from the boy's parents or guardian, granting their permission for him to play, for each boy who par­ticipates in any practice, scrimmage or game in football. 36. Sunday Games, Practice or lnstruction.-No League member school shall play any football game, or conduct any formal practice, or teach any plays, formations, or skills in football on Sunday. Any showing of films to, or skull practice for, or meetings of athletes for the purpose of instructing in or reviewing of plays, formations, or skills in football, basketball, baseball, or volleyball, or in track and field events will be construed as a violation. Note that this does not prevent coaches from meeting on Sunday or from seeing films or pfonning an instructional program, provided that no athletes are involved in this meeting. Boys' Basketball Plan The Basketball Code.-The basketball code means to play the game in the spirit of fairness and clean sportsmanship; to observe all rules and not attempt to hold, "beat the ball," or coach from the side lines because it can be done without the knowledge of the referee, or to resort to trickery in equipping or preparing players. It means to accept decisions of officials with­out protest and to see that proper precautions are taken for their protection and safety; to treat your opponents as your guests, and to put clean play and real sportsmanship above victories. It means the ability to win without boasting and to lose without grudge. "Victory is no great matter. The im­portant thing in sport is the manly striving to excel and the good feeling it fosters between those who play fair and have no excuse when they lose." 1. Eligible Schools.-No school shall participate in League basketball unless its acceptance of this plan is on file in the State Office by October 15 and the fees are paid by December 1. The application for membership in the Basketball Plan shall be signed by the superintendent or his designated administrator. A school which does not participate in basketball after signing the ac­ceptance card may be suspended in this activity for a period of one year, unless sufficient justification is shown for not entering a team. A non-participating school the preceding year desiring to participate shall so notify the State Office one year in advance. 2. Employment of Basketball Coaches.-A school is not eligible for Inter­scholastic League basketball competition: a. Whose head coach or whose assistant coach is not a full-time em­ployee (This rule shall not affect the status of a coach on a leave of absence attending college.) of the school board of the school which the team repre­sents. "Full-time" means full-time for the whole scholastic or calendar year; or b. Which contracts to pay its basketball coach out of gate receipts, or which draws its contract with its coach in such a way as to make it to the immediate financial advantage of a coach to win games. (See interpretation under "Rule 2, Football Plan.") 3. Conferences.-Participating high schools shall be assigned to confer­ences as provided in the Football Plan, Rule 3. Member schools shall be classified for competition in basketball on the basis of the "average" of the 1963-64 and 1964-65 "average membership" for the last four grades as found in the Superintendent's Annual Report, and there shall be no exception to this procedure. 4. Districts.-The state shall be divided into districts for conferences AAAA, AAA, AA, A, and B, and competition shall include a state cham· pionship. Announcement concerning the arrangement of all conference eliminations will be issued during the season. Usually five to eight schools compose a district. Schools are assigned to districts by the State Office. The regional winners in Conferences AAAA and AAA and the regional champions in conferences AA, A, and B are eligible to compete in the State Championship Basketball Tournament at Austin. Any conference champion that engages in basketball competition with another high school after winning the state championship shall be suspended from the League for the next basketball season. 5. District Organization.-The temporary chairman for the district shall call a meeting of all participating schools in the district, preferably in the early part of September, but in any case not later than Saturday following the first Monday in October. At this meeting a district executive committee shall be created composed of school superintendents or their designated ad­ministrators from participating schools. Each participating school present shall have one vote. At least two alternates should be elected to serve in case members of the committee are disqualified. If only one member is disquali­fied the first-named alternate should serve. A member of the committee shall be disqualified to act in a case in which his school is one of the two involved. In each new district, and in case of vacancies, a temporary chairman shall be appointed by the State Office. It shall be the duty of the chairman to call the organization meeting. It shall be the duty of the superintendent, principal, or coach in each school com­peting under this plan, to inform himself regarding the district chairman, time of meeting, etc. If the chairman moves from the district without calling a meeting, each school in the district has a responsibility to notify the State Office so that another chairman may be named. 6. Duties of District Executive Committee.-lt shall be the duty of the district executive committee: a. To enforce all rules and regulations, to settle all disputes and all questions of eligibility arising inside the district. There shall be no appeal from any decision rendered by this committee. b. To certify to the State Office an eligible district champion on the date set for each respective conference, after which the commit­tee's functions cease. In case of dispute, certification to the State Office shall be in the form of a written notice naming the eligible school and must be signed by a majority of the members of the district executive committee; provided the State Committee shall have the authority to reject for interdistrict competition any basketball team whose district committee had adopted any rule or regulation limiting the eligibility of players beyond the require­ments set forth in the Constitution and Contest Rzdes and the Basketball Plan. c. To arrange a schedule in the district to close not later than the date set for a conference champion to be certified. District games may not be played prior to December 15, 1966, except by unan­imous consent of all district members. It is recommended that when feasible the district schedule be set up on a double round­robin basis. In districts that have more than 10 participating schools sub-districts may be created, in which case schedules shall be arranged in the sub-districts to close in sufficient time to sched­ ule an elimination game or series so that the district championship may be be determined by the proper time. Districts with fewer than 10 schools may be subdivided. The subdivisions of a district shall contain an equal number of teams, or as nearly equal as can be; e.g., a district having seven teams shall be divided on a 3-4 basis. d. To investigate and check the eligibility of players in the district and to furnish to member schools in the district a list of eligible players submitted by each school and to investigate transfers with a view to determining whether or not transfers are bona fide. In case the transfer is not considered bona fide by the district com­mittee, it shall have the power to declare the contestants in question ineligible for basketball. e. To uphold the principle that high school basketball is worthwhile in the school as an educational force when properly controlled. Efforts on the part of any school official or local "fan" to recruit players shall be considered a violation of this principle and shall subject the school at fault to disqualification. Disqualification may be made by the committee after the school concerned has been given an opportunity to be heard in its own defense. When a school is disqualified it shall remain on the disqualified list until the superintendent has convinced the committee that the errors com· plained of have been removed and that he, the superintendent, can guarantee the proper conduct of basketball in his school. 7. Expenses of District Committee.-The district executive committee has authority to outline and put into operation a plan for financing its meetings under the following restriction: if the assessment plan is used the assessment for any school shall not exceed one·half of its regular League membership fee. The failure of a school promptly to pay its assessment, after having been notified, shall subject it to a penalty of elimination from consideration for district honors. If a school refuses or fails to pay its assessment after the close of the season, it may be debarred from participation the following year or until the amount is paid. At the close of the season the district executive committee shall furnish each participating school in the district a financial statement showing all receipts and disbursements for the season. 8. District Disqna/,ification.-A district shall be disqualified in the state race, if its committee certifies to the State Office a team which has used an ineligible player in any game that counted on League standing, such dis­qualification to be made only upon presentation of evidence to the State Executive Committee. 9. Eliminations.-District championships in the respective conferences shall be determined by the following dates: Conference AAAA ____ _______ _ ___ ___ ___ _ February 18 Conference AAA ___ __ _____________ __ ______ February 18 Conference AA ___ __ _____________ _____ __ __ ___February 18 Conference A __ ____ ___ __ __ ______ ___ ______ ___ February 18 Conference B ______________________ __________February 18 Conferences AAAA, AAA, AA, A, and B shall determine a regional win­ner by February 25. The regional champions in each conference are eligible to compete in the State Championship Basketball Tournament March 2, 3, and4. A double elimination tournament shall not be used in any League meet except by unanimous consent of participating schools. 10. Jurisdiction of lnterdistrict Disputes.-The State Executive Commit­tee shall have jurisdiction in all disputes arising between district winners that have been duly certified. 11. Number of Games and Tournaments.-No high school team shall be eligible for district honors that has violated any portion of this rule. (For definition of a "high school team" see Article VII, Section 21.) A team which did not win district honors this current year shall be ineligible for district honors for the next basketball season if they violate any section of this rule. a. No team shall be allowed to enter more than three invitational tournaments prior to the last day for certification of a district champion. h. No team or hoy shall play more than two interschool basketball games per calendar day. c. No team shall compete in more than 24 basketball games, ex­clusive of games allowed in three invitational basketball tourna­ments and games that count in League standing. d. No team, or boy shall participate in more than two matched (as distinguished from tournament) games per week. The district executive committee may permit district basketball games post­poned by weather or public disaster (not including illness) to be played as an exception to the two-matched-games-a-week rule, provided that they are played on non school nights (Friday or Saturday). e. No team shall participate in an invitational basketball tourna­ment held on a Monday, Tuesday or Wednesday, except during a school holiday season. 12. Games That Count on Percentage.-lnterconference or interdistrict games between participating schools shall not count on a team's percentage. A defeat by a non participating Texas high school, except by a junior high school or dormitory school, or a public school in good standing with the Prairie View Interscholastic League, regardless of size or date, shall elimi· nate it from the district, state or regional race. A defeat by a school not eligible to membership in the League shall not count. 13. A Practice Scrimmage.-A scrimmage or practice period to which no admission is charged, which is not on an announced schedule and which is not regularly conducted by an official or officials shall not count as a game. No interschool scrimmages shall be allowed after a school has played its first interschool game in basketball. 14. Regional Elimination Contests.-Plans for regional playoffs will be issued during the season. All regional games leading to the state series shall be played on a regulation size indoor court and cannot be scheduled prior to dates listed by the State Office. In case there is a dispute regarding a home or neutral site or time of a game it shall be settled by the flip of a coin. Before agreeing on the time and place of the game, schools should decide on the officials to be used and the expenses that are to be allowed each team in putting on the game. 15. Breaking Contracts.-A game cancelled after contract has been signed, unless both parties agree to the cancellation, shall be forfeited to the team not at fault. 16. Observe Rules.-Each school shall observe faithfully all rules con­tained in Article VIII of the Constitution. In case an ineligible man is used in any League game, knowingly or unknowingly, the minimum penalty shall be for/ eiture of the game. 17. Basketball Code.-By accepting this plan, the coach and other offi­cials of each school pledge themselves to act in the spirit of the "Basketball Code" and to foster this spirit among the players. 18. Eligibility Blanks and Season Report.-Each school shall fill out an eligibility blank in duplicate furnished by the League, these blanks to be signed by the superintendent or his designated administrator, one mailed to the State Office, and one filed with the chairman of the district executive com­mittee, before the school is allowed to take part in any game. Failure to fur­nish correct and complete information shall constitute grounds for sus­pension. At the end of the season the superintendent or his designated administra­tor of each school shall send to the State Office a list of all players who have participated in basketball during the season as representatives of the school. Failure to submit a correct and complete list shall constitute grounds for suspension. 19. Guarantees.-The v1s1ting team always has the right to demand a guarantee sufficient to cover all expenses and in addition 50 percent of the net gate receipts of the contest. A demand of a flat guarantee which is clearly in excess of expenses, shall upon action of the district or State Executive Committee, disqualify offending team for further participation. [Note.-In this connection, expenses of visiting teams, officials, advertis· ing, labor, services, and printing incident to the contest, shall be considered as expenses of the game. Number of men allowed upon expense account shall be agreed upon by coaches or managers of teams involved. Unless mutually agreeable otherwise, the home team shall furnish a playing court without cost to the visiting school.] 20. Officials.-All officials must be satisfactory to both parties and agreed upon in advance. Teams are urged always to secure outside officials. The visiting team should insist upon an agreement on officials prior to the day of the game. A school that refuses to play a game because the officials agreed upon have not been secured shall not be considered as breaking its contract. The responsibility to engage satisfactory officials is upon the home school. Beginning a game with an official constitutes agreement. 21. Place of Game.-The district executive committee in arranging a schedule within the district shall determine the place of games in case of disagreement between two teams. 22. Protests.-All protests must be made to the proper committee within 24 hours after the game is played, except that a protest based on the alleged ineligibility of a player may be made at any time, provided it is made im­mediately upon discovery of the facts on which the protest is based. Protests must be made in writing and signed by the superintendent or his designated administrator. A protest based on an official's decision will not be considered. In passing upon eligibility of players the district committee acts in a judicial capacity. A proper judicial approach involves reasonable notice (i.e., sufficient to permit an answer to charges made or issues raised), an opportunity for a fair hearing, and an unbiased decision based upon the evidence presented. 23. School Authorities Responsible.-Responsibility for the proper con­duct of basketball in a school system shall rest with the superintendent. All contracts, arrangements and controls of all games shall be under the super­vision of the superintendent or his designated administrator. 24. Awards for State Tournament.-In the state tournament a silver trophy is provided for the winning team, a cup for the runner·up, and a shield for the third and fourth place teams, as well as the following medals: 10 gold medals for the winning team, 10 silver medals for the runner-up, 10 bronze medals for the third place team and 10 green bronze medals for the fourth place team. 25. Rebate to the Regional and State Tournaments.-All funds collected from admissions at the regional and state tournaments in excess of the amount necessary to defray the incidental expenses of the meet shall be pro­rated up to 100 percent to the contesting teams on the basis of 10 cents per mile, both ways. If after rebate on expenses there is a balance in the fund received from gate receipts, this balance shall be equally divided among the schools par­ticipating in the tournament. 26. State Tournament.-The "draw" for the state tournament shall be made by the athletic director of the League in the presence of witnesses, as soon as regional champions have been determined and reported to the State Office. 27. Breach of Contract.-Any school which qualifies for a district, re­gional or state playoff in basketball and fails to participate or complete the official schedule of games, unless excused for valid reasons by the State Executive Committee, shall be guilty of a breach of contract. Schools violat­ing the provisions of this rule shall lose all rebate privileges of said play­offs and may be suspended from basketball for a period not to exceed one calendar year. 28. Postseason Participants.-No member of a high school basketball team shall be allowed to participate as a player on any nonschool basketball team following the close of a school's regular season schedule. 29. Radio Broadcasting and Telecasting.-A radio committee appointed in 1939 worked out the plan for broadcasting the state basketball tourna­ment. Since that time, a yearly contract has been negotiated by the State Committee, on the basis of competitive bids for the broadcasting and tele­casting rights of these games. The broadcasting and telecasting rights granted to the successful bidder are for both "live" and delayed broadcasts and "live" and film telecasts of the games. 30. Schedule of Fees.-The following are the maximum amounts that may be paid to any one official as a fee for officiating in a League Basketball game. Fees Receipts One game $10.00 Upto$75.00 Two games 12.50 One game 12.50 $75.00 to $150.00 Two games 15.00 One game 20.00 $150.00 to $250.00 Two games 25.00 One game 25.00 $250.00 to $500.00 Two games 30.00 One game 30.00 $500.00 to $750.00 Two games 35.00 One game 45.00 $750.00 to $1,000.00 Two games 50.00 One game 50.00 More than $1,000.00 Two games 65.00 The district executive committee may in emergency cases modify the provisions of this section for application inside its district on an individual game basis. It is recommended that two officials be assigned for all games which count on League standing. Allowable Maximum Expenses for Officiating For one official 7¢ a mile for total mileage; for two or more officials traveling together by automobile 8¢ a mile. Expenses for local entertain­ment, defined as follows: Taxi fare to and from gymnasium, if used; local meals as agreed upon and as arranged for by school authorities; hotel room, if required, to be secured and paid for by local school authorities. No other items are to be included in an expense account of officials, and neither fees nor expenses for officials shall be supplemented from any source. Violation of the rules governing the employment and pay of basketball officials shall carry the same penalty as the violation of any eligibility rule; that is, forfeiture of the game. In emergency cases, if the rules in regard to fees of officials are violated by a member school, the facts shall be reported to the district executive committee at a meeting to be called as soon as possible after the game to decide on the merits of the case and to apply the penalty; or, if an emergency is proved, to waive the penalty. The district committee may declare that, in its judgment, an emergency arose, and, therefore, waive the penalty. 31. Playing Rules.-"The National Basketball Committee Official Basket· ball Rules" govern League basketball. 32. All-Star Games.-No athletic director, coach, teacher, administrator, or school district of a member school shall at any time assist either directly or indirectly with the coaching, management, direction, selection of players, promotion, officiating, or allow public school facilities or equipment to be utilized in any all-star game (exception, Texas High School Coaches Asso­ciation games and regularly scheduled church and recreational league games) in which one or more of the competing teams is composed of a player or players who, during the current school "term" were members of a high school basketball team. Any member high school violating the pro­visions of this all-star contest rule shall be subject to probation or suspension. 33. Dates for lnterschool Games and Scrimmages.-ln Conference B boys' basketball, there shall be no organized or formal basketball practice for a contestant or a team, before or after school, prior to October 1, 1966, or be­for or after school, after March 11, 1967. No interschool scrimmages or games shall be played prior to October 15, 1966, or after March 11, 1967. In Conference A and AA boys' basketball there shall be no organized or formal basketball practice for a contestant or a team, before or after school, prior to November 1, 1966, or before or after school, after March 11, 1967. No interschool scrimmages or games shall be played prior to November 15, 1966, or after March 11, 1967. In Conferences AAAA and AAA boys' basketball, no organized or formal basketball practice for a contestant or team shall be permitted before or after school prior to October 15, 1966, or before or after school after the last date for certifying the district champion, except as necessary for state playoffs. No interschool scrimmages or games shall be played prior to November 15, 1966, or after the last date for certifying district champions, except as inci­dent to state playoffs. 34. Medical Certificate and Parent's Permit.-There shall be on file in each school a medical certificate and a permit from the boy's parents or guardian, granting their permission for him to play, for each boy who par­ticipates in any practice, scrimmage or game in boys' basketball. 35. Sunday Games, Practice or lnstruction.-No League member school shall play any boys' basketball game, or conduct any formal practice, or teach any plays, formations, or skills in boys' basketball on Sunday. Any showing of films to, or skull practice for, or meetings of athletes for the purpose of instructing in or reviewing of plays, formations, or skills in football, basketball, base­ ball, or volleyball, or in track and field events will be construed as a violation. Note that this does not prevent coaches from meeting on Sunday or from seeing films or planning an instructional program, provided that no athletes are involved in this meeting. Girls' Basketball Plan The Basketball Code.-The basketball code means to play the game in the spirit of fairness and clean sportsmanship; to observe all rules and not attempt to hold, "beat the ball," or coach from the side lines because it can be done without the knowledge of the referee, or to resort to trickery in equipping or preparing players. It means to accept decisions of officials without protest and to see that proper precautions are taken for their protec­tion and safety; to treat your opponents as your guests, and to put clean play and real sportsmanship above victories. It means the ability to win with­out boasting and to lose without grudge. "Victory is no great matter. The important thing in sport is the striving to excel and the good feeling it fosters between those who play fair and have no excuse when they lose." 1. Eligible Schools.-No school shall participate in League basketball unless its acceptance of this plan is on file in the State Office by October 15 and fees are paid by December 1. The application for membership in the Girls' Basketball Plan shall be signed by the superintendent or his designated administrator. A school which does not participate in basketball after signing the accept­ance card may be suspended in this activity for a period of one year unless sufficient justification is shown for not entering a team. A nonparticipating school the preceding year desiring to participate shall so notify the State Office one year in advance. 2. Employment of Basketball Coaches.-A school is not eligible for In­terscholastic League basketball competition: a. Whose head coach or whose assistant coach is not a full-time employee (This rule shall not affect the status of a coach on a leave of absence attend­ing college.) of the school board of the school which the team represents. "Full-time" means for the whole scholastic or calendar year; or b. Which contracts to pay its basketball coach out of gate receipts, or which draws its contract with its coach in such a way as to make it to the immediate financial advantage of a coach to win games. (See interpretation under "Rule 2, Football Plan.") 3. Con/erences.-Participating high schools shall be divided into confer­ences as provided in the Football Plan, Rule 3, except that schools having over 450 students in high school shall be assigned to conference AAA. Mem­ber schools shall be classified for competition in basketball on the basis of the "average" of the 1963-64 and 1964-65 "average membership" for the last four grades as found in the Superintendent's Annual Report, and there shall be no exception to this procedure. 4. Districts.--Conferences AAA, AA, A, and B districts will be arranged and competition shall extend to a state championship. A school that has won its district championship is eligible to enter the regional tournament which will be held under the direction of the regional athletic director not later than one week prior to the state tournament. The regional champions are eli­gible to compete in the State Championship Basketball Tournament at Austin. Any conference champion that engages in basketball competition with another high school after winning the state championship shall be suspended from the League for the next basketball season. 5. District Organization.-The temporary chairman for the district shall call a meeting of all participating schools in the district, preferably in the early part of September, but in any case not later than Saturday following the first Monday in October. At this meeting a district executive committee shall be created composed of school superintendents or their designated ad­ministrators from participating schools. Each participating school present shall have one vote. At least two alternates should be elected to serve in case members of the committee are disqualified. If only one member is disquali­fied the first-named alternate should serve. A member of the committee shall be disqualified to act in the case in which his school is one of the two in· volved. In each new district, and in case of vacancies a temporary chairman shall be appointed by the State Office. It shall be the duty of the chairman to call the organizational meeting. It shall be the duty of the superintendent, principal, or coach in each school competing under this plan, to inform himself regarding the district chairman, time of meeting, etc. If the chairman moves from the district without calling a meeting, each school in the district has a responsibility to notify the State Office so that another chairman mar be named. 6. Duties of District Executive Committee.-It shall be the duty of the district executive committee: a. To enforce all rules and regulations; to settle all disputes and all questions of eligibility arising inside the district. There shall be no appeal from any decision rendered by this committee. b. To certify to the State Office an eligible district champion on the date set for each respective conference, after which the commit· tee's functions cease. In the case of dispute, certification to the State Office shall be in the form of a written notice naming the eligible school and must be signed by a majority of the members of the district executive committee; provided the State Committee shall have the authority to reject for interdistrict competition any basketball team whose district committee has adopted any rule or regulation limiting the eligibility of players beyond the require­ments set forth in the Constitution and the Basketball Plan. c. To prepare a schedule in the district to close not later than the date set for a conference champion to be certified. It is recom­mended that when feasible the district schedule be set up on a double round-robin basis. In districts that have more than 10 participating schools sub-districts may be created, in which case schedules shall be arranged in the sub-districts to close in suffi­cient time to schedule an elimination game or series so that the district championship may be determined by the proper time. Districts with fewer than 10 schools may be subdivided. The subdivision of a district shall contain an equal number of teams, or as nearly equal as can be, e.g., a district having seven teams shall be divided on a 3-4 basis. d. To investigate and check the eligibility of players in the district and to furnish to member schools in the district a list of eligible players submitted by each school and to investigate transfers with a view to determining whether or not transfers are bona fide. In case the transfer is not considered bona fide by the district com­mittee, it shall have the power to declare the contestant in ques­tion ineligible for basketball. e. To uphold the principle that high school basketball is worth while in the school as an educational force when properly controlled. Efforts on the part of any school official or local "fan" to recruit players shall he considered a violation of this principle and shall subject the school at fault to a disqualification. Disqualification may be made by the committee after the school concerned has been given an opportunity to he heard in its own defense. When a school is disqualified it shall remain on the disqualified list until the superintendent has convinced the committee that the errors complained of have been removed and that he, the superintendent, can guarantee the proper conduct of basketball in his school. 7. Expenses of District Committee.-The district executive committee has authority to outline and put into operation a plan for financing its meetings under the following restriction: if the assessment plan is used the assessment for any school shall not exceed one-half of its regular League membership fee. The failure of a school promptly to pay its assessment, after having been notified, shall subject it to a penalty of elimination from consideration for district honors. If a school refuses or fails to pay its assessment after the close of the season, it may be debarred from participation the following year or until the amount is paid. At the close of the season the district executive committee shall furnish each participating school in the district a financial statement showing all receipts and disbursements for the season. 8. District Disqualification.-A district shall be disqualified in the State race if its committee certifies to the State Office a team which has used an ineligible player in any game that counted on League standing, such dis­qualification to be made only upon presentation of evidence to the State Executive Committee. 9. Eliminations.-District championships in the respective conferences shall be determined by the following dates: Conference AAA -------------------------------------·-·--February 25 Conference AA ___ ____ __ __ _____ _______ ______ ___ ___ ____ _ ___ February 25 Conference A ____________________________ __________ ____ __ ____February 25 Conference B _____ __ _____ ___ __ __ _________ __ _ ___ ______ _____ _February 25 Conferences AAA, AA, A, and B shall determine a regional winner by March 4. The regional champions in each conference are eligible to compete in the State Championship Basketball Tournament March 9, 10, 11. A double elimination tournament shall not be used in any League meet except by unanimous consent of participating schools. 10. Jurisdiction of lnterdistrict Disputes.-The State Executive Com­mittee shall have jurisdiction in all disputes arising between district win­ners that have been duly certified. 11. Number of Games and Tournaments.-No high school team shall be eligible for district honors that has violated any portion of this rule. (For definition of a "high school team" see Article VIII, Section 21.) A team which did not win district honors this current year shall be ineligible for district honors for the next basketball season if they violate any section of this rule. a. No member school competing for League honors shall play more than 36 games in a season prior to the last date for certifying the district cham· pion. This shall be all-inclusive and shall include nondistrict games, invi­tational tournaments and district games both matched and tournament. The forfeiting of district games in order to play nondistrict games shall render a school ineligible for district honors. b. No team shall play more than two matched (as distinguished from tournament) games per week and no team shall be allowed to enter more than three invitational tournaments per season. The district executive com­ mittee may permit district basketball games postponed by weather or public disaster (not including illness) to be played as an exception to the two­matched-games-a-week rule, provided that they are played on nonschool nights (Friday or Saturday). c. No team or girl shall play in more than two games per calendar day. There shall be at least six hours between the end of the first game and the beginning of the second game. d. No team or girl shall play in a game against a boys' team. e. No high school girls' basketball team shall participate in an invita­tional basketball tournament held on a Monday, Tuesday or Wednesday, except during a school holiday season. 12. Games that Count on Percentage.-Interconference or interdistrict games between participating schools shall not count on a team's percentage. A defeat by a nonparticipating Texas high school, except by a junior high school or dormitory school, or a public school in good standing with the Prairie View Interscholastic League, regardless of size or date, shall elimi­nate the school so defeated from the district, state or regional race. A defeat by a school not eligible to membership in the League shall not count. 13. A Practice Scrimmage.-A scrimmage or practice period to which no admission is charged, which is not on an announced schedule and which is not regularly conducted by an official or officials shall not count as a game. No interschool scrimmages shall be allowed after a school has played its first interschool game in basketball. 14. Regional Elimination Contests.-Plans for regional play-offs will be issued during the season. All regional games leading to the state series shall be played on a regulation size indoor court and cannot be scheduled prior to dates listed by the State Office. In case there is a dispute regarding the home or neutral site or time of a game it shall be settled by the flip of a coin. Be­fore agreeing on the time and place of the game, schools should decide on the officials to be used and the expenses that are to be allowed each team in put­ting on the game. 15. Breaking Contracts.-A game cancelled after contract has been signed, unless both parties agree to the cancellation, shall be forfeited to the team not at fault. 16. Observe Rules.-Each school shall observe faithfully all rules con­tained in Article VIII of the Constitution and Contest Rules. In case an in­eligible girl is used in any League game, knowingly or unknowingly, the minimum penalty shall be forfeiture of the game. 17. Basketball Code.-By accepting this plan, the coach and other offi­ cials of each school pledge themselves to act in the spirit of the "Basketball Code" and to foster this spirit among the players. 18. Eligibility Bwnks and Season Report.-Each school shall fill out an eligibility blank in duplicate furnished by the League, these blanks to be signed by the superintendent or his designated administrator, one mailed to the State Office, one filed with the chairman of the district executive com­mittee, before the school is allowed to take part in any game. Failure to fur. nish correct and complete information shall constitute grounds for suspen­s10n. At the end of the season the superintendent or his designated administra­tor of each school shall send to the State Office a list of all players who have participated in basketball during the season as representatives of the school. Failure to submit a correct and complete list shall constitute grounds for suspension. 19. Guarantees.-The visiting team always has the right to demand a guarantee sufficient to cover all expenses and in addition 50 percent of the net gate receipts of the contest. A demand of a flat guarantee which is clearly in excess of expenses, shall upon action of the district or State Executive Committee, disqualify offending team for further participation. [Note.-In this connection, expenses of visiting teams, officials, adver· tising, labor, services, and printing incident to the contest, shall be con· sidered as expenses of the game. Number of girls allowed upon expense account shall be agreed upon by coaches or managers of teams involved. Unless mutually agreeable otherwise, the home team shall furnish a playing court without cost to the visiting school.] 20. Officials.-AIJ officials must be satisfactory to both parties and agreed upon in advance. Teams are urged always to secure outside officials. The visiting team should insist upon an agreement on officials prior to the day of the game. A school that refuses to play a game because the officials agreed upon have not been secured shall not be considered as breaking its contract. The responsibility to engage satisfactory officials is upon the home school. Beginning a game with an official constitutes agreement. 21. Place of Game.-The district executive committee in arranging a schedule within the district shall determine the place of games in case of disagreement between two teams. 22. Protests.-AII protests must be made to the proper committee within 24 hours after the game is played, except that a protest based on the alleged ineligibility of a player may be made at any time; provided, it is made im· mediately upon discovery of the facts on which the protest is based. Protests must be made in writing and signed by the superintendent or his designated administrator. A protest based on an official's decision will not be con­sidered. In passing upon eligibility of players the district committee acts in a judicial capacity. A proper judicial approach involves reasonable notice (i.e., sufficient to permit an answer to charges made or issues raised), an opportunity for a fair hearing, and an unbiased decision based upon the evidence presented. 23. School Authorities Responsible.-Responsibility for the proper con­duct of basketball in a school system shall rest with the superintendent. All contracts, arrangements and controls of all games shall be under the super­vision of the superintendent or his designated administrator. 24. Awards for State Tournament.-In the state tournament a silver trophy is provided for the winning team, a cup for the runner-up and a shield for the third and fourth place teams, as well as the following medals: 10 gold medals for the winning team, 10 silver medals for the runner-up, 10 bronze medals for the third place team and 10 green bronze medals for the fourth place team. 25. Rebate to the Regional, and State Tournaments.-All funds collected from admissions at the regional and state tournaments in excess of the amount necessary to defray the incidental expenses of the meet shall be pro­rated up to 100 percent to the contesting teams on the basis of 10 cents per mile, both ways. If after rebate on expenses there is a balance in the fund received from gate receipts, this balance shall be equally divided among the schools par­ticipating in the tournament. 26. State Tournament.-The "draw" for the state tournament shall be made by the athletic director of the League in the presence of witnesses, as soon as the regional champions have been determined and reported to the State Office. 27. Breach of Contract.-Any school which qualifies for a district, re­gional or state playoff in basketball and fails to participate or complete the official schedule of games, unless excused for valid reasons by the State Ex­ecutive Committee, shall be guilty of a breach of contract. Schools violating the provisions of this rule shall lose all rebate privileges for said playoffs and may be suspended in basketball for a period not to exceed one calendar year. 28. Medical Certificate and Parent's Permit.-There shall he on file in each school a medical certificate and a permit from the girl's parents or guardian granting their permission for her to play, for each girl who par­ticipates in any game which counts on League standing. 29. Chaperonage.-lt is recommended that in the case of a male coach a woman appointed by school officials be assigned to accompany the team on all trips and at games. 30. Postseason Participation.-No member of a high school basketball team shall be allowed to participate as a player on a nonschool basketball team following the close of a school's regular schedule. 31. Schedule of Fees.-The schedule of fees as found in the Boys' Bas· ketball Plan, Rule 30, shall be applicable to girls' basketball. 32. P/,aying Rules.-The 1966 NSGWS Official Basketball Rules with modifications approved by the girls' basketball committee shall govern League girls' basketball. Copies of the official rules with modifications may he secured from the League office for 35¢ per copy. 33. All-Star Games.-No athletic director, coach, teacher, administrator, or school district of a member school shall at any time assist either directly or indirectly with the coaching, management, direction, selection of players, promotion, officiating, or allow public school facilities or equipment to be utilized in any all-star game (exception, Texas High School Coaches As­sociation games and regularly scheduled church and recreational league games) in which one or more of the competing teams is composed of a player or players who, during the current school "term" were members of a high school basketball team. Any member high school violating the pro· visions of this all-star contest rule shall he subject to probation or suspension. 34. Dates for /nterschool Games and Scrimmages.-ln Conference B girls' basketball, there shall be no organized or formal basketball practice for a contestant or a team, before or after school, prior to October 1, 1966, or before or after school, after March 11, 1967. No interschool scrimmages or games shall be played prior to October 15, 1966, or after March 11, 1967. In Conferences A, AA, and AAA girls' basketball, there shall be no or­ganized or formal basketball practice for a student or a team, before or after school, prior to October 15, 1966, or before or after school, after March 11, 1967. No interschool scrimmages or games shall he played prior to Novem· her 1, 1966, or after March 11, 1967. 35. Sunday Games, Practice or lnstruction.-No League member school shall play any girls' basketball game, or conduct any formal practice, or teach any plays, formations, or skills in girls' basketball on Sunday. Any showing of films to, or skull practice for, or meetings of athletes for the purpose of instructing in or reviewing of plays, formations, or skills in football, basketball, base­ball, or volleyball, or in track and field events will be construed as a violation. Note that this does not prevent coaches from meeting on Sunday or from seeing films or planning an instructional program, provided that no athletes are involved in this meeting. Tennis l. Eligibility.-The eligibility rules laid down in Article VIII of the Constitution shall be strictly observed in all tennis contests in this League. 2. Tennis Coaches Must Be Employees of School Board.-A tennis team is not eligible in the Interscholastic League whose head coach or whose assistant coach is not a full-time employee of the school board of the school which the team represents. 3. Divisions.-There shall be the following divisions in the respective conferences (only juniors in grade school meets) : ( 1) senior boys, singles and doubles; (2) senior girls, singles and doubles; (3) junior boys, singles and doubles; ( 4) junior girls, singles and doubles. At the district meet each school may enter one boys' single and double team and one girls' single and double team. 4. Juniors' Choice.-Juniors may elect to enter the senior division but may not enter both junior and senior divisions. 5. Regional Contests.-The senior winners of first places in district con­tests, singles and doubles, boys and girls, are eligible to enter the regional contests. (See Rule 15 below.) 6. State Contests.-The first place winning contestants in the regional contests in all conferences may enter the final state contest. 7. Number of Sets.-In all matches except the finals in the district, re­gional and state contests, the best two out of three sets shall determine the winners; in all final matches for boys the best two out of three sets shall de­termine the winners. In all girls' matches the best two out of three sets shall determine the winners. No player or team shall play more than two matches per day and there shall be a minimum of one hour rest for a team or player between the close of one contest and the beginning of another. 8. How to Enter.-lt shall be the duty of each school desiring to enter the district meets to notify the district athletic director, giving names of the players and a certificate of their eligibility signed by the superintendent or his designated administrator, at least 10 days before the time of such contest. Furthermore, each winning school in a district, or regional contest shall at once notify the athletic director of the next higher meet at least five days prior to the time of such contest, sending names and eligibility certifi­cates of the players. 9. Officials.-The athletic director in each contest shall provide a man­ager and the proper number of umpires for such contests; and in all tourna­ments the director in charge shall have authority to arrange for officials subject to the approval of the appropriate executive committee. 10. Foot Faults.-This rule will be strictly enforced at the State Meet, and should be in the district, and regional meets. 11. Contestants.-1£ possible, enter contestants who are not in other contests. 12. Participation Limited.-No boy or girl shall be allowed to compete in both singles and doubles. 13. Awards.-In the State Meet a suitable trophy is awarded first place in boys' singles, boys' doubles, girls' singles, and girls' doubles. 14. No Cheering or Razzing in Tennis.-Tennis etiquette does not permit cheering or razzing during the match. Applauding a good play is always in order. Applauding an error is never in order. A tennis audience has always been a discreet and refined one. Any person who takes it upon himself to be­rate the officials or makes himself conspicuous by razzing the teams should be requested to leave the court. 15. Substitution Rule.-The local school authorities may make a sub­stitution to fill a vacancy in tennis doubles but not in tennis singles. (Ex­ception: in tennis singles for girls the school authorities may make a sub­stitution.) After a given tournament has begun no substitution on a team which began the tournament shall be allowed. This rule is applicable in all district and regional meets and in the State Meet. 16. Qualification in T ennis.-District winners in each conference qualify for regional meets and regional winners for the State Meet in accordance with schedule provided in Rules 18 and 22 of the Spring Meet Plan. 17. Medical Certificate and Parent's Permit.-There shall be on file in each school a medical certificate and a permit from the participant's parents or guardian, granting their permission to play, for each pupil who partici­pates in any game that counts on League standing. Volleyball The Volleyball Code.-The volleyball code means to play the game in the spirit of fairness and clean sportsmanship ; to observe all rules and not at­tempt to hold, "beat the ball," or coach from the side lines because it can be done without the knowledge of the referee, or to restort to trickery in equip­ping or preparing players. It means to accept decisions of officials without protest and to see that proper precautions are taken for their protection and safety; to treat your opponents as your guests, and to put clean play and real sportsmanship above victories. It means the ability to win without boasting and to lose without grudge. "Victory is no great matter. The important thing in sport is the striving to excel and the good feeling it fosters between those who play fair and have no excuse when they lose." 1. Eligible Schools.-No school shall participate in League volleyball unless its acceptance of this plan is on file in the State Office by November 15, and fees are paid by December 1. The application for membership in the Volleyball Plan shall be signed by the superintendent or his designated ad­ministrator. A school which does not participate in volleyball after signing the accept­ance card may be suspended in this activity for a period of one year unless sufficient justification is shown for not entering a team. A nonparticipating school the preceding year desiring to participate shall so notify the State Office one year in advance. 2. Divisions.-There shall be the following divisions in each district (in­cluding elementary school meets): (1) boys and girls, (2) high school girls volleyball shall go to the State Championship; boys volleyball may go to regional tournament if there is sufficient interest to justify such a tourna­ment, and spring meet regional directors may conduct regional tournaments. 3. Representation.-Each member school may be represented in the dis­trict meet by one team in each division. 4. Employment of Volleyball Coaches.-A school is not eligible for Inter­scholastic League volleyball competition: a. Whose head coach or whose assistant coach is not a full-time em­ployee (This rule shall not affect the status of a coach on a leave of absence attending college.) of the school board of the school which the team represents. "Full-time" means full-time for the whole scholastic or calendar year; or b. Which contracts to pay its volleyball coach out of gate receipts, or which draws its contract with its coach in such a way as to make it to the immediate financial advantage of a coach to win games. (See interpretation under "Rule 2, Football Plan.") 5. Con/erences.-Participating high schools shall be divided into confer­ences as provided in the Football Plan, Rule 3. Member schools shall be classified for competition in volleyball on the basis of the "average" of the 1963-64 and 1964-65 "average membership" for the last four grades as found in the Superintendent's Annual Report, and there shall be no ex­ception to this procedure. 6. Districts.-Conferences AAAA, AAA, AA, A and B districts will be arranged and competition shall extend to a state championship. A school that has won its district championship is eligible to enter the regional tournament which will be held under the direction of the regional athletic director. The girls' regional champions are eligible to compete in the girls' State Champ· ionship Volleyball Tournament at Austin. Any conference champion that engages in volleyball competition with an­other high school after winning the state championship shall be suspended from the League for the next volleyball season. 7. District Organization.-The temporary chairman for the district shall call a meeting of all participating schools in the district, preferably in the early part of September, but in any case not later than Saturday following the first Monday in October. At this meeting a district executive committee shall be created composed of school superintendents or principals from par­ticipating schools. Each participating school present shall have one vote. At least two alternates should be elected to serve in case members of the com· mittee are disqualified. If only one member is disqualified the first-named alternate should serve. A member of the committee shall be disqualified to act in the case in which his school is one of the two involved. In each new district, and in case of vacancies a temporary chairman shall be appointed by the State Office. It shall be the duty of the chairman to call the organizational meeting. It shall be the duty of the superintendent, principal, or coach in each school competing under this plan, to inform himself regarding the district chairman, time of meeting, etc. Tf the chairman moves from the district without calling a meeting, each school in the district has a responsibility to notify the State 0 ffice so that another chairman may be named. 8. Duties of District Executive Committee.-lt shall be the duty of the district executive committee: a. To enforce all rules and regulations; to settle all disputes and all questions of eligibility arising inside the district. There shall be no appeal from any decision rendered by this committee. b. To certify to the State Office an eligible district champion on the date set for each respective conference, after which the committee's functions cease. In case of dispute certification to the State Office shall be in the form of a written notice naming the eligible school and must be signed by a majority of the members of the district executive committee; provided the State Committee shall have the authority to reject for interdistrict competition any volleyball team whose district committee has adopted any rule or regulation limit­ing the eligibility of players beyond the requirements set forth in the Constitution and the Volleyball Plan. c. To prepare a schedule in the district to close not later than the date set for a conference champion to be certified. It is recommended that when feasible the district schedule be set up on a double round-robin basis. In districts that have more than 10 participating schools sub-districts may be created, in which case schedules shall be arranged in the sub-districts to close in sufficient time to sched­ule an elimination game or series so that the district championship may be determined by the proper time. Districts with fewer than 10 schools may be subdivided. The subdivision of a district shall contain an equal number of teams, or as nearly equal as can be, e.g., a district having seven teams shall be divided on a 3-4 basis. d. To investigate and check the eligibility of players in the district and to furnish to member schools in the district a list of eligible players submitted by each school and to investigate transfers with a view to determining whether or not transfers are bona fide. In case the transfer is not considered bona fide by the district com­mittee, it shall have the power to declare the contestant in question ineligible for volleyball. e. To uphold the principle that high school volleyball is worth while in the school as an educational force when properly controlled. Efforts on the part of any school official or local "fan" to recruit players shall be considered a violation of this principle and shall subject the school at fault to a disqualification. Disqualification may be made by the committee after the school concerned has been given an opportunity to be heard in its own defense. When a school is disqualified it shall remain on the disqualified list until the superintendent has convinced the committee that the errors com­plained of have been removed and that he, the superintendent, can guarantee the proper conduct of volleyball in his school. 9. Expenses of District Committee.-The district executive committee has authority to outline and put into operation a plan for financing its meetings under the following restriction: if the assessment plan is used the assessment for any school shall not exceed one-half of its regular League membership fee. The failure of a school promptly to pay its assessment, after having been notified, shall subject it to a penalty of elimination from consideration for district honors. If a school refuses or fails to pay its assessment after the close of the season, it may be debarred from participation the following year or until the amount is paid. At the close of the season the district executive committee shall furnish each participating school in the district a financial statement showing all receipts and disbursements for the season. 10. DistrU:t Disqualificatwn.-A district shall be disqualified in the State race if its committee certifies to the State Office a team which has used an ineligible player in any game that counted on League standing, such dis· qualification to be made only upon presentation of evidence to the State Executive Committee. 11. Eliminations.-District championships in the respective conferences shall be determined by the following dates: Conference AAAA ··············-···-···---·-··-·······-···-·-···April 8 Conference AAA ·····-··············--·-----············-·········April 8 Conference AA ·····---------------·-----·-------------·-----_______ April 8 Conference A ----------------·--·------------------------------------April 8 Conference B -------·-·--····---·-------·-------···--------·---------April 8 Conferences AAAA, AAA, AA, A and B shall determine a regional winner by April 15. The girls' regional champions in each conference are eligible to compete in the girls' State Championship Volleyball Tournament April 28-29. A double elimination tournament shall not be used in any League meet except by uanimous consent of participating schools. 12. f urisdictwn of lnterdistrU:t Disputes.-The State Executive Com­mittee shall have jurisdiction in all disputes arising between district winners that have been duly certified. 13. Number of Games and Tournaments.-No high school team shall be eligible for district honors that has violated any portion of this rule. (For definition of a "high school team" see Article VII, Section 21.) A team which did not win district honors this current year shall be ineligible for district honors for the next volleyball season if they violate any section of this rule. a. No member school competing for League honors shall play more than 24 matches in a season prior to the last date for certifying the district champion. This shall be all-inclusive and shall include nondistrict matches, invitational tournaments and district matches both scheduled and tourna­ment. The forfeiting of district games in order to play nondistrict games shall render a school ineligible for district honors. b. No team shall play more than two scheduled (as distinguished from tournament) contests per week and no team shall be allowed to enter more than three invitational tournaments per season. The district executive com­mittee may permit district volleyball matches postponed by weather or public disaster (not including illness) to be played as an exception to the two­contests·a·week rule, provided that they are played on nonschool nights (Friday and Saturday). c. No team or girl shall play in more than three matches per calendar day. There shall be at least two hours between the end of the first match and the beginning of the second match. d. No team or girl shall play in a match against a boys' team. e. No high school girls' volleyball team shall participate in an invitational volleyball tournament held on a Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday or Thursday except during a school holiday season. 14. Games That Count on Percentage.-lnterconference or interdistrict matches between participating schools shall not count on a team's percentage. A defeat by a nonparticipating Texas high school, except by a junior high school or dormitory school, or a public school in good standing with the Prairie View Interscholastic League, regardless of size or date, shall elimi­nate the school so defeated from the district, state or regional race. A defeat by a school not eligible to membership in the League shall not count. 15. A Practice Scrimmage.-A scrimmage or practice period to which no admission is charged, which is not on an announced schedule and which is not regularly conducted by an official or officials shall not count as a game. No interschool scrimmages shall be allowed after a school has played its first interschool match in volleyball. 16. Regional Elimination Contests.-Plans for regional play-offs will be issued during the season. 17. Breaking Contracts.-A game cancelled after a contract has been signed, unless both parties agree to the cancellation, shall be forfeited to the team not at fault. 18. Observe Rules.-Each school shall observe faithfully all rules con­tained in Article VIII of the Constitution and Contest Rules. In case an in­eligible girl is used in any League game, knowingly or unknowingly, the minimum penalty shall be forfeiture of the game. 19. Volleyball Code.-By accepting this plan, the coach and other officials of each school pledge themselves to act in the spirit of the "Volleyball Code" and to foster this spirit among the player!. 20. Eligibility Blanks and Season Report.-Each school shall fill out an eligibility blank in duplicate furnished by the League, these blanks to be signed by the superintendent or his designated administrator, one mailed to the State Office, one filed with the chairman of the district executive com­mittee, before the school is allowed to take part in any game. Failure to fur­nish correct and complete information shall constitute grounds for sus­pension. At the end of the season the superintendent, or his designated administra­tor, of each school shall send to the State Office a list of all players who have participated in volleyball during the season as representatives of the school. Failure to submit a correct and complete list shall constitute grounds for sus­pension. 21. Guarantees.-The visiting team always has the right to demand a guarantee sufficient to cover all expenses and in addition 50 percent of the net gate receipts of the contest. A demand of a flat guarantee which is clearly in excess of expenses, shall upon action of the district or State Executive Committee, disqualify offending team for further participation. [Note.-ln this connection, expenses of visiting teams, officials, advertis­ing, labor, services, and printing incident to the contest, shall be considered as expenses of the game. Number of girls allowed upon expense account shall be agreed upon by coaches or managers of teams involved. Unless mutually agreeable otherwise, the home team shall furnish a playing court without cost to the visiting school.] 22. Officials.-All officials must be satisfactory to both parties and agreed upon in advance. Teams are urged always to secure outside officials. The visiting team should insist upon an agreement on officials prior to the day of the game. A school that refuses to play a game because the officials agreed upon have not been secured shall not be considered as breaking its contract. Th"' responsibility to engage satisfactory officials is upon the home school. Beginning a game with an official constitutes agreement. 23. Place of game.-The district executive committee in arranging a schedule within the district shall determine the place of games in case of disagreement between two teams. 24. Protests.-All protests must be made to the proper committee within 24 hours after the game is played, except that a protest based on the alleged ineligibility of a player may be made at any time; provided, it is made im­mediately upon discovery of the facts on which the protest is based. Protests must be made in writing and signed by the superintendent or his designated administrator. A protest based on an official's decision will not be considered. In passing upon eligibility of players the district committee acts in a judicial capacity. A proper judicial approach involves reasonable notice (i.e., sufficient to permit an answer to charges made or issues raised), an opportunity for a fair hearing, and an unbiased decision based upon the evidence presented. 25. School Authorities Responsible.-Responsibility for the proper con­duct of volleyball in a school system shall rest with the superintendent. All contracts, arrangements and controls of all games shall be under the super­vision of the superintendent or his designated administrator. 26. Awards for State Tournament.-ln the state tournament a silver trophy is provided for the winning team, a cup for the runner-up and a shield for the third and fourth place teams, as well as the following medals: 10 gold medals for the winning team, 10 silver medals for the runner-up, 10 bronze medals for the third place team and 10 green bronze medals for the fourth place team. 27. Rebate to the Regional and State Tournaments.-AII funds collected from admissions at the regional and state tournaments in excess of the amount necessary to defray the incidental expenses of the meet shall be pro­rated up to 100 percent to the contesting teams on the basis of 10 cents per mile, both ways. If after rebate on expenses there is a balance in the fund received from gate receipts, this balance shall be equally divided among the schools par­ticipating in the tournament. 28. State Tournament.-The "draw" for the girls' state tournament shall be made by the athletic director of the League in the presence of witnesses, as soon as the regional champions have been determined and reported to the State Office. 29. Breach of Contract.-Any school which qualifies for a district, re­gional or state playoff in volleyball and fails to participate or complete the official schedule of games, unless excused for valid reasons by the State Executive Committee, shall be guilty of a breach of contract. Schools violat­ing the provisions of this rule shall lose all rebate privileges for said playoffs and may be suspended in volleyball for a period not to exceed one calendar year. 30. Medical Certificate and Parent's Permit.-There shall be on file in each school a medical certificate and a permit from the pupil's parents or guardian granting their permission for the pupil to play, for each pupil who participates in any game which counts on League standing. 31. Chaperonage.-lt is recommended that in the case of a male coach, a woman appointed by school officials be assigned to accompany the girls' team on all trips and at games. 32. Postseason Participation.-No member of a high school volleyball team shall be allowed to participate as a player on a nonschool volleyball team following the close of a school's regular schedule. 33. Playing Rules.-The 1967 United States Volleyball Association Rules shall govern League volleyball. Copies of the official rules may be secured from the League office for $1.00 per copy. 34. All-Star Games.-No athletic director, coach, teacher, administrator, or school district of a member school shall at any time assist either directly or indirectly with the coaching, management, direction, selection of players, promotion, officiating, or allow public school facilities or equipment to be utilized in any all-star game (exception, Texas High School Coaches As­sociation games and regularly scheduled church and recreational league games) in which one or more of the competing teams is composed of a player or players who, during the current school "term" were members of a high school volleyball team. Any member high school violating the provisions of this all-star contest rule shall be subject to probation or suspension. 35. Dates for lntersclwol Games and Scrimmages.-ln Conferences AAAA, AAA, AA, A and B volleyball, there shall be no organized or for­mal practice for a contestant or a team, before or after school, prior to De­cember 15, 1966, or before or after school, after April 29, 1967. No inter­school scrimmage or games shall be played prior to February 1, 1967, or after April 29, 1967. 36. Sunday Games, Practice or lnstruction.-No League member school shall play any volleyball game, or conduct any formal practice, or teach any plays, formations or skills in volleyball on Sunday. Any showing of films to, or skull practice for, or meeting of athletes for the purpose of instructing in or reviewing of plays, formations, or skills in football, basketball, baseball, or volleyball, or in track and field events will be construed as a violation. Note that this does not prevent coaches from meeting on Sunday or from seeing films or planning an instructional program, provided that no athletes are involved in this meeting. Track and Field for Junior Boys and Elementary Schools (7-8) 1. Eligibility.-The rules laid down in Article VIII of the Constitution shall he strictly observed in this contest. These events are open only to boys of junior age. 2. Representation.-Each member school may he represented in the dis­trict meet by a team of junior boys subject to the following rules: a. No school shall he allowed more than three boys in each event except the relay, which requires four. h. No hoy shall he allowed to participate in more than three track events, including the relay, and in not over five events altogether. c. A junior hoy entered in the senior division of the high school meet is not eligible for the junior meet. 3. Events.-The events with the order in which they shall he conducted follow: Track Field 1. 440-yard relay. 1. Pull up (chinning bar) . 2. 880-yard run. 2. Running high jump. 3. 440-yard run. 3. Running broad jump. 4. *60-yard high hurdles. 4. 8-pound shot put. 5. 100-yard dash. 5. Pole vault. 6.**100-yard low hurdles. 6. Discus (junior size). 7. 50-yard dash. 8. 880-yard relay. *Four hurdles to be used, with 15 yards to first hurdle, 10 yards between hurdles and 15 yards to finish. ** Four hurdles to be used and placed at low hurdle distances of 20 yards, 20 yards to first hurdle. 4. Points.-The first four places in each event count, respectively, five, three, two, and one. If less than five participate in any one event no points shall be allowed for the last place. The school that scores the greatest number of points by this method shall be declared winner; next highest, runner-up; and the next highest, third place. For points towards all-round championship, see Rule 14 of the Spring Meet Plan. Playground Baseball 1. Eligibility.-The rules laid down in Article VIII of the Constitution shall be strictly observed in this contest. 2. Divisums.-There shall be the following divisions in the respective districts (only juniors in elementary school meets): (1) senior boys; (2) senior girls; (3) junior boys; (4) junior girls; and each school is entitled to enter a team in each division. Juniors in high school may elect to play on the senior or the junior high school team. However, they cannot play on both the junior and the senior high school teams. 3. Playing Rules.-The official softball rules as adopted by the lntec­national Joint Rules Committee on Softball shall apply in all playground baseball games in this League with the following exceptions for juniors: a. The Diamond: The bases, except the home plate, shall be Ph feet square. The home plate shall be 1 foot square. Each side of the diamond shall measure 45 feet. The pitching distance shall be 35 feet. b. Spiked shoes shall not be worn by any player. c. Ground rules are to be agreed upon by the schools before each contest. These rules are not provided for in the rule book. Some of the more important rules to be agreed on are: ( 1) How many bases are to be allowed on an overthrow? (2) Shall the batter be declared out on the last strike if the catcher misses the ball? ( 3) Can a runner score on a passed ball at home? The playing grounds and playing conditions may make it neces­sary to provide for these contingencies. d. No team shall play more than two games in one day. There shall be a minimum of one hour rest between the close of one game and the beginning of another. High School Track and Field (For detailed rules regarding track and field events, follow the National Collegiate Athletic Association Official Rules, with the exceptions listed below.) 1. Eligibility.-The rules laid down in Article VIII of the Constitution shall be strictly observed in this contest. Notice that this is not designated a "senior" contest. These events are open to boys of senior or junior age. A boy entered in the junior track and field meet is not eligible for this meet. 2. Track and Field Coaches Must be Employees of School Board.-A track and field team is not eligible in the Interscholastic League whose head coach or whose assistant coach is not a full-time employee of the school board of the school which the team represents. 3. Representation.-Each member school may enter a team in the district meet, advancing to regional and state meets as provided in Rules 18 and 22 of the Spring Meet Plan. It shall be the duty of each school desiring to enter the district or regional meet to notify the district athletic director, giving the names of the players and a certificate of their eligibility signed by the superintendent or his designated administrator, at least 10 days before the time of such contest. A school may enter in the next higher meet only the same individuals and in the same events as they qualified for in the preced· ing meet. If a qualified contestant cannot enter the next higher meet, then the next place winner in that event at the lower meet shall be qualified to participate. In the relay event, qualification is by school and not individual. Individ­uals qualifying only as a member of the relay team may not enter any other event in next higher meet. 4. Points.-The point system in scoring high school track meets shall be the same in all meets which count on League standing. Points shall be given in the events as follows: first place 10 points, second place 8 points, third place 6 points, fourth place 4 points, fifth place 2 points, sixth place 1 point; except in the relays the points shall be as follows: first place 20 points, sec­ond place 16 points, third place 12 points, fourth place 8 points, fifth place 4 points, sixth place 2 points. If less than seven participate in the events, no points shall be allowed for the last place. In computing individual honors a man's record on the relay team shall also be counted; for instance, each man on the winning team shall receive five points for individual honors, etc. 5. Events.-The events and order in which they shall be held, are: TRACK 1. 440-yard relay 6. 330-yard intermediate 2. 880-yard dash hurdles* 3. 120-yard high hurdles 7. 220-yard dash 4. 100-yard dash 8. I-mile run 5. 440-yard dash 9. 1-mile relay *Eight (8) hurdles (height-36 inches), 49.213 yards to the first hurdle, 38.272 yards between hurdles and 12.833 yards from the last hurdle to the finish line. FIELD 3. 12-pound shot put 1. Pole vault 2. Running high jump 4. Running broad jump 5. Discus throw Jn meets where semifinals are necessary the mile run may be included in the semifinals. 6. Preliminaries and Finals.-The preliminaries and finals for the State Meet shall be held according to the official program of the meet. 7. Number in Each Event.-Each school having a sufficient number of qualified men shall be allowed not over three men in each event, excepting the relay, which requires four men. Only one relay team per school may be entered. 8. Number of Events One May Enter.-No contestant shall be allowed to compete in more than three track events, including the relays, and in not over five events altogether; and no contestant shall be allowed to enter more than one of the following events: 440-yard run, 880-yard run, mile run. This does not debar a 440, mile or half-mile man from the relay. 9. Entries for Final Meet.-At least 10 days before the first day of the final meet, each school having qualified men and desiring to compete in said final meet shall send to the Director of Athletics, Box 8028, University Station, Austin, Texas 78712, by registered mail, a list of qualified entries. This list shall be signed by the superintendent or his designated admin­istrator. Official entry blanks are furnished by the League for the convenience of member schools and may be secured from the State Office or from the regional director of athletics. 10. Closing of Entries.-No entries shall be allowed for district meets which are not mailed to the director on or before the tenth day before the first day of the meet. 11. No Changes in Entries Allowed.-No changes in the entry list as sent in shall be allowed. One alternate may be entered for each relay team quali­fied, but no alternates are allowed for individual entries. An alternate can· not participate in any event except the relay unless he is qualified in an event. This rule is applicable in all regional meets and in the State Meet. 12. Must Qualify in Preliminaries.-No contestant shall be allowed to compete in the finals in any individual event who did not compete in the preliminaries of that event. Substitutions may be made in the semifinals or finals of the relays provided that the substitute shall have been qualified in another event for the meet. 13. Must Be on Hand at Time Announced.-The director of the meet shall see that the preliminaries and the finals start at the time announced for them. No excuse shall be accepted for failure of a team or contestant to appear at the time announced for the meet to start, and any contestant who fails for any reason to be on hand at the time of the preliminaries shall for­feit his right to compete either in the peliminaries or the finals. 14. Officials.-The Interscholastic League Athletic Director shall have general charge of the final meet, and the district, and regional athletic di­rectors shall have charge of the district, and regional meets, respectively. It shall be the duty of such directors to provide officials, secure entries, ar­range programs, and attend to such matters as may be required for the proper conduct of the meets. Each meet shall be under the direction of the director of athletics, one referee, two or more inspectors, three or more field judges, four or more judges at the finish, three or more timekeepers, one starter, one clerk of the course, one scorer, one clerk of the field, one marshal, one announcer, and such assistants to these officials as may be necessary. 15. Protests.-(See Article XII.) 16. Coach Not Allowed on Field.-At the final State Meet coaches and other school officials will not be allowed on the field. 17. No Extra Trials for Record.-Winners in the shot put, discus throw, and running broad jump at the State Meet will not be allowed extra trials for a state record. Those who qualify for the finals will be allowed three addi­tional trials, and the contestant will be credited with his best performance whether it was made in the preliminaries or in the finals. 18. Observe Rules.-Each team shall observe faithfully all rules contained in Article VIII of the Constitution. In case an ineligible man is used in any League meet, knowingly or unknowingly, the minimum penalty shall be the disqualification of the track team. 19. Eligibility Blanks.-Each school shall fill out eligibility blanks furnished by the League for each track and field contestant, one blank to be filed with the conference director general, and one to be sent to the State Office. These blanks are to be filled out and sent in before a contestant is allowed to participate in a League meet. 20. Qualification.-District winners in each conference qualify for re­gional meets and regional winners for the State Meet in accordance with the schedule provided in Rules 18 and 22 of the Spring Meet Plan. Only two con­testants can qualify for the regional and State Meet. Qualifications are to be made in accordance with the NCAA Track and Field Rules. If a tie still exists after the application of this rule, then it will be decided by lot. 21. Starting Blocks.-Starting blocks may be used, but no holes may be dug in the track at the State Meet. 22. Medical Certificate and Parent's Permit.-There shall be on file in each school a medical certificate and a permit from the boy's parents or guardian, granting their permission for him to play, for each pupil who participates in any game that counts on League standing. 23. Invitational Track and Field Meets.-No student nor team shall par­ticipate in an invitational track and field meet after the date of the League's State Track and Field Meet, except for organized and progressive track and field meets and/or recreational track and field meets during the summer. 24. Number of Track and Field Meets.-No student nor team representing a member school shall participate in more than eight indoor and outdoor track and field meets (excluding cross country) during a season, exclusive of League district, regional, and state outdoor meets. No student nor team representing a member school shall participate in a track and field meet on a day other than the last day of school for that week or Saturday, unless that day is a school holiday. This rule does not apply to League district, regional, or State Meets. 25. Sunday Games, Practice or lnstruction.-No League member school shall participate in any track or field meet, or conduct any formal practices, or teach any plays, formations, or skills in track and field on Sunday. Any showing of films to, or skull practice for, or meetings of athletes for the purpose of instructing in or reviewing of plays, formations, or skills in football, basketball, base­ball, or volleyball, or in track and field events will be construed as a violation. Note that this does not prevent coaches from meeting on Sunday or from seeing films or planning an instructional program, provided that no athletes are involved in this meeting. CAUTION All directors are reminded that certain events such as the discus and shot put are dangerous and proper precautions should be taken. To avoid acci­dents spectators should be kept off the field and contestants, not actually com­peting, should remain in their assigned quarters. Baseball Plan The Baseball Code.-The baseball code means to play the game in the spirit of fairness and clean sportsmanship; to observe all rules and not at­tempt to take unfair advantage of the other team. It means to accept decisions of officials without protest; to treat your opponents as your guests, and to put clean play and real sportsmanship above victories. It means the ability to win without boasting and to lose without grudge. "Victory is no great matter. The important thing in sport is the manly striving to excel and the good feeling it fosters between those who play fair and have no excuse when they lose." 1. Eligible Schools.-No school shall participate in League baseball unless its acceptance of this plan is on file in the State Office by February 15 and its fees are paid for the present school year. A school which does not participate in baseball after signing the acceptance card may be suspended in this activity for a period of one year, unless sufficient justification is shown for not entering a team. A nonparticipating school the preceding year de­siring to participate shall so notify the State Office one year in advance. The application for membership in the Baseball Plan shall be signed by the superintendent or his designated administrator. 2. Baseball Coaches Must Be Employees of School Board.-A baseball team is not eligible in the Interscholastic League whose head coach or whose assistant coach is not a full-time employee of the school board of the school which the team represents. 3. Districts and Conferences.-The state shall be divided into districts and conferences, and competition will extend to a state championship in conferences AAAA and AAA, to a regional championship in AA and A, and to a bi-district championship in conference B. Schools are assigned to con­ferences by the State Office on the schedule as found in Football Plan, Rule 3. For Conferences AAAA and AAA, the State Baseball Tournament shall be held the first week in June, with regional and bidistrict championship playoffs on the two preceding weekends respectively. Rules and regulations will be issued by the State Office for all bidistrict, regional and state games. 4. Playing Rules.-The "official baseball rules" of the National Alliance, 7 South Dearborn Street, Chicago, Illinois, govern League baseball. The op­tional substitution rule shall be in effect. 5. District Organizations.-The temporary chairman for the district shall call a meeting of all participating schools in the district, preferably in the early part of February but in any case not later than March 2. At this meeting a district executive committee shall be created composed of school superintendents or their designated administrators from participating schools. Each participating school present shall have one vote. At least two alternates should be elected to serve in case members of the committee are disqualified. If only one member is disqualified the first-named alternate should serve. A member of the committee shall be disqualified to act in a case in which his school is one of the two involved. In each new district, and in case of vacancies, a temporary chairman shall be appointed by the State Office. It shall be the duty of the chairman to call the organizational meeting. It shall be the duty of the superintendent, principal, or coach in each school competing under this plan, to inform himself regarding the district chairman, time of meeting, etc. If the chairman moves from the district without calling a meeting, each school in the district has a responsibility to notify the State Office so that another chairman may be named. 6. Duties of District Executive Committee.-It shall he the duty of the District Executive Committee: a. To enforce all rules and regulations, to settle all disputes and all questions of eligibility arising inside the district. There shall be no appeal from any decision rendered by this committee. b. To certify to the State Office an eligible district champion on the date set for each respective conference, after which the committee's functions cease. In case of dispute, certification to the State Office shall be in the form of a written notice naming the eligible school and must be signed by a majority of members of the executive committee; provided the State Committee shall have the authority to reject any district champion whose district committee has adopted any rule or regulation limiting the eligibility of players beyond the requirements set forth in the Constitution and Contest Rules and the Baseball Plan. c. In districts that have more than 10 participating schools sub­districts may be created, in which case schedules shall be arranged in the sub-districts to close in sufficient time to schedule an elim­ination game or series so that the district championship may be determined. Districts with fewer than 10 schools may be sub­divided. The subdivision of a district shall contain an equal number of teams, or as nearly equal as can be; e.g., a district having seven teams shall be divided on a 3-4 basis. d. To investigate and check the eligibility of players in the district and to furnish to member schools in the districts a list of eligible players submitted by each school and to investigate transfers with a view to determining whether or not transfers are bona fide. In case the transfer is not considered bona fide by the district com­mittee, it shall have the power to declare the contestant in question ineligible for baseball. e. To uphold the principle that high school baseball is worth while in the school as an educational force when properly controlled. Efforts on the part of any school official or local "fan" to recruit players shall be considered a violation of this principle and shall subject the school at fault to disqualification. Disqualification may be made by the committee after the school concerned has been given an opportunity to be heard in its own defense. When a school is disqualified it shall remain on the disqualified list until the superintendent has convinced the committee that the errors com­plained of have been removed and that he, the superintendent, can guarantee the proper conduct of baseball in his school. 7. Expenses of District Committee.-The district executive committee has authority to outline and put into operation a plan for financing its meet­ings under the following restriction: If the assessment plan is used the assess­ment for any school shall not exceed one-half of its regular League member­ship fee. The failure of a school promptly to pay its assessment, after having been notified, shall subject it to a penalty of elimination from consideration for district honors. If a school refuses or fails to pay its assessment after the close of the season, it may be debarred from participation the following year or until the amount is paid. At the close of the season the district executive committee shall furnish each participating school in the district a financial statement showing all receipts and disbursements for the season. 8. Games That Count on Percentage.-lnterconference or interdistrict games between participating schools shall not count on a team's percentage. A defeat by a nonparticipating Texas high school, except by a junior high school or dormitory school, or a public school in good standing with the Prairie View Interscholastic League, regardless of size or date, shall elimi­nate a school so defeated from the district race. A defeat by a school not eligible to membership in the League shall not count. 9. A Practice Game.-A practice game to which no admission is charged which is not on an announced schedule and which is not regularly conducted by an official or officials shall not count as a game. 10. Breaking Contracts.-A game cancelled after contract has been signed, unless both parties agree to the cancellation, shall be forfeited to the team not at fault. 11. Observe Rules.-Each school shall observe faithfully all rules con­tained in Article VIII of the Constitution and Contest Rules, except that Section 2 shall not disqualify a contestant during the baseball season, who is eligible in all other respects at the time of spring graduation. This exception refers only to contestants whose district competition extends into the summer from the end of school. In case an ineligible man is used in any League game, knowingly or unknowingly, the minimum penalty shall be forfeiture of the game. 12. Baseball Code.-By accepting this plan, the coach and other officials of each school pledge themselves to act in the spirit of the baseball code, and to foster this spirit among the players. 13. Eligibility Blanks.-Each school shall fill out eligibility blanks in duplicate furnished by the League, these blanks to be signed by superintend­ent or his designated administrator, one mailed to the State Office, and one filed with the chairman of the district executive committee, before the school is allowed to take part in any game. Failure to furnish correct and complete information shall constitute grounds for suspension. 14. Guarantees.-The visiting team always has the right to demand a guarantee sufficient to cover all expenses and in addition 50 percent of the net gate receipts of the contest. A demand of a flat guarantee which is clearly in excess of expenses, shall upon action of the district or State Executive Committee, disqualify offending team for further participation. [Note.-ln this connection, expenses of visiting teams, officials, advertis­ing, labor, services, and printing incident to the contest, shall be considered as expenses of the game. Number of men allowed upon expense account shall be agreed upon by coaches or managers of teams involved. Unless mutually agreeable otherwise, the home team shall furnish a playing field without cost to the visiting school.] 15. Officials.-All officials must be satisfactory to both parties and agreed upon in advance. Teams are urged always to secure outside officials. The visiting team should insist upon an agreement on officials prior to the day of the game. A school that refuses to play a game because the officials agreed upon have not been secured shall not be considered as breaking its contract. The responsibility to engage satisfactory officials is upon the home school. Beginning a game with an official constitutes agreement. 16. Place of Game.-The district executive committee in arranging a schedule within the district shall determine the place of games in case of disagreement between two teams. All interdistrict and intradistrict games shall consist of seven innings (unless tied) . Bidistrict and regional championships shall be determined by playing the best two out of three games unless mutually agreeable to play one game. In case there is a dispute regarding a neutral or home site or time of a game it shall be settled by the flip of a coin. 17. Protests.-All protests must be made to the proper committee within 24 hours after the game is played, except that a protest based on the al­leged ineligibility of a player may be made at any time; provided, it is made immediately upon discovery of the facts on which the protest is based. Protests must be made iri writing and signed by the superintendent or his designated administrator. A protest based on an official's decision will not be considered. 18. School Authorities Responsible.-Responsibility for the proper con­duct of baseball in a school system shall rest with the superintendent. All con­tracts, arrangements and controls of all games shall be under the supervision of the superintendent or his designated administrator. 19. Breach of Contract.-Any school which qualifies for a regional or state tournament in baseball and fails to participate or complete the official schedule of games, unless excused for valid reasons by the regional commit­tee or the State Executive Committee, respectively, shall be guilty of a breach of :contract. Schools violating the provisions of this rule shall lose all rebate privileges for said playoff and may be suspended from baseball for a period not to exceed one calendar year. 20. Rebate to the Regional and State Tournaments.-All funds collected from admissions at the regional and state tournaments in excess of the amount necessary to defray the incidental expenses of the meet shall be pro­rated up to 100 percent to the contesting teams on the basis of 10 cents per mile one way. If after rebate on expenses there is a balance in the fund received from gate receipts, this balance shall be equally divided among the schools par­ticipating in the tournament. 21. Medical Certificate and Parent's Permit.-There shall be on file in each school a medical certificate and a permit from the boy's parents or guardian, granting their permission for him to play, for each pupil who participates in any game that counts on League standing. 22. Sunday Games, Practice or lnstruction.-No League member school shall play any baseball game, or conduct any formal practice, or teach any plays, formations, or skills in baseball on Sunday. Any showing of films to, or skull practice for, or meetings of athletes for the purpose of instructing in or reviewing of plays, formations, or skills in football, basketball, base­ ball, or volleyball, or in track and field events will be construed as a violation. Note that this does not prevent coaches from meeting on Sunday or from seeing films or planning an instructional program, provided that no athletes are involved in this meeting. Golf 1. Eligibility.-The rules laid down in Article VIII of the Constitution shall be strictly observed in this contest. 2. Golf Coaches Must Be Empl.oyees of School Board.-A golf team is not eligible in the Interscholastic League whose head coach or whose assist­ant coach is not a full-time employee of the school board of the school which the team represents. 3. Divisions.-There shall be the following divisions in AAAA, AAA, AA, A, and B conference districts: ( 1) boys' singles; ( 2) boys' team (to consist of four boys from the same high school) . The singles representative may also be a member of the team, provided he is so designated. (The medalist for each respective meet is singles champion, regardless of whether he is a team or a single entry.) 4. Representation.-(a) At the district meet each high school may enter three boys' singles and two boys' teams. (b) Each district may qualify to the region two boys' singles and two boys' teams. ( c) Each region shall certify to the State Meet one boys' singles and one boys' team. 5. Substitution.-There shall be no substitution allowed in the singles; but there may be on a team, provided the substitutes are entered in the meet. One alternate may be listed for each team. No substitution shall be allowed after the meet is under way. 6. Official Rules.-AII matches shall be played under the United States Golf Association Rules. 7. Number of Matches.-Singles and team play shall be over a total of 36 holes. (By mutual consent singles and team play may be limited to 18 holes in the district meet.) Ties shall be determined by playing an additional hole or holes until the tie is broken. 8. Honors.-All entries in the various golf meets will play a total of 36 holes ( 18 holes on district or regional level if mutually agreeable), and the individual with the lowest score will be the medalist. The medalist may be the representative in the singles or he may be a member of the team. In other words, the individual regardless of the event entered, who has the lowest score, will win the medalist honors and be the singles winner. Team honors shall be determined by adding the scores of the four boys who enter as a unit, and the team with the lowest score will be the group winner. 9. Eligibility Blanks.-Each school shall fill out eligibility blanks in duplicate furnished by the League, these blanks to be signed by superintend­ ent or his designated administrator, one mailed to the State Office, and one filed with the chairman of the district executive committee, before the school is allowed to take part in any match. Failure to furnish correct and complete information shall constitute grounds for suspension. It is strongly recommended that each school have on file a statement from his parents that the participant has not violated Article VIII, Section 8, the amateur rule of the League, during the past twelve months. 10. Medical Certificate and Parents' Permit.-There shall be on file in each school a medical certificate and a permit from the boys' parents or guardian, granting their permission for him to play, for each pupil who participates in any game that counts on League standing. Appendix I Awards in Final Contests Debate, Boys, conferences AA, AAA, and AAAA.-Plaque. Debate, Girls, conferences AA, AAA, and AAAA.-Plaque. Debate, conferences Band A.-Plaque. Prose Reading, Boys, each conference.-Plaque. Prose Reading, Girls, each conj erence.-Plaque. Poetry Interpretation, Boys, each conference.-Plaque. Poetry Interpretation, Girls, each conference.-Plaque. Persuasive Speaking, Boys, each conference.-Plaque. Persuasive Speaking, Girls, each conference.-Plaque. Informative Speaking, Boys, each conference.-Plaque. Informative Speaking, Girls, each conj erence.-Plaque. Best One-Act Play Cast, each conj erence.-Plaque. Outstanding performer, each conference,-Samuel French Award. Best Actor, Best Actress.-Gold Medals. All-Star Cast Members.-Silver Medals. Ready Writing, each conference.-Plaque. Typewriting, each conference.-Plaque. Shorthand, each conference.-Plaque. ] ournalism, each conference.-Plaque. Slide Rule, each conference.-Plaque. Number Sense, each conj erence.-Plaque. Science, each conference.-Plaque. High School Track, each conference.-Permanent Cup. Relays, each conference.-Plaque. Boys Golf Team, each conference.-Plaque. Tennis: Boys and Girls Doubles, each conference.-Plaque. Boys and Girls Singles, each conference.-Plaque. Medals.-Gold, silver, and bronze medals for first, second, and third place winners, respectively, in each event of the golf and track meets, and for prose reading, informative speaking, poetry interpretation, persuasive speaking, science, ready writing, shorthand, journalism, slide rule, num­ber sense, and typewriting; also gold and silver medals to winners of first and second places in tennis and debate. Medals are individual awards and belong to the winning contestants. Basketball.-Permanent trophies for winner, runner-up, third and fourth places in the state tournament, gold medals for members of the winning team and silver medals for members of runner-up team, bronze medals for members of the third place team, and green bronze medals for the fourth place team. Baseball.-Permanent trophies for winner, runner-up, and third place in state tournament, gold medals for members of winning team and silver medals for members of runner-up team, and bronze medals for members of the third place team. Football.-Permanent trophy, regulation-sized football, for champion, plaque for runner-up, and gold medals for members of the winning team and silver medals for members of runner-up team. Spelling.-One hundred per cent spelling certificate. Girls' V olleyball.-Permanent trophies for winner, runner-up, third and fourth places in the state tournament, gold medals for members of the win­ning team and silver medals for members of runner-up team, bronze medals for members of the third place team, and green bronze medals for the fourth place team. Appendix II Schedule-Making In order to conduct a round-robin, first number the teams. This should be done by chance, allowing each team to draw its number, or, if repre­sentatives of teams are not present, appoint someone to draw for each team. Have the drawing witnessed by signature of those present and file for future reference, in case question concerning drawing arises. Suppose there are seven teams. Since seven is an odd number, one team must stand by as each round is matched. The first round is arranged by writing the numbers down in their order, 1, 2, 3, in column form and then 4, 5, 6, 7 in column form up to the left, setting 4 opposite 3, 5 opposite 2, 6 opposite 1, and 7 at the top for the "bye." Repeat this arrangement except to drop the posi­tion of "l" down one space each time until it reaches the bottom and then move its position to the left and up to top of left column, and you have completely laid out each of the round-robin schedules, thus: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6--1 5-7 4-6 3-5 2-4 1-3 7-2 5-2 4-1 3-7 2-6 1-5 7-4 6--3 ~3 3-2 2-1 1-7 7-6 6--5 5-4 This arrangement holds good for any odd number. Keep your eye on the "l"-it revolves. Contrariwise, if the number of teams is even, "I" remains stationary, and the "2" revolves, thus: 1-2 8-3' 7-4 6-5 1--8 7-2 6-3 5-4 1-7 6----8 5-2 4-3 1-6 5-7 4--8 3-2 1-5 4-6 3-7 2--8 1--4 3-5 2-6 8-7 1-3 2--4 8-5 7-6 A round-robin for thre3­2­2-1 1-3 1­3-2 e teams is arranged thus: For four teams, thus: 1-2 1--4 4-3 3-2 1-3 2--4 For five teams, thus: 5­4­4-1 3-5 3-2 2-1 3­2--4 1-5 2­1-3 5-4 1­5-2 4-3 For six teams, thus: 1-2 1--6 6-3 5-2 5-4 4-3 1-5 4-6 3-2 1--4 3-5 2--6 1-3 2--4 6-5 [Note.-In using this scheme in debate, choice of sides may be deter­mined for the first round by prescribing that teams drawing odd numbers take the negative and teams drawing even numbers take the affirmative.] After the draw in a round-robin, the announcement of the matches and dates should be furnished the newspapers. Determining Percentage After each contest, the "standard of teams" should be computed in the usual manner, and given proper publicity. The formula for determining percentage follows: Let x equal "games won" and y equal "games played"; then x -X 1000 =Percentage. y Drawing a Tournament The principle of seeding may be adopted by any League committee. If the number of teams entered is a power of two, no byes are drawn, as in 4, 8, 16, 32, etc. Brackets are arranged, as follows: First Round Semifinal Final Winner Directions for Filling Brackets: Put names of the teams in a hat and have someone draw them one at a time, and as each name is drawn, write it into the bracket "l" and continue until the name of each of the eight teams is written into the "first round" in the order drawn. In debate, odd numbers are assigned the affirmative for the first round, and even numbers assigned the negative for the first round. The winner of the 1-2 match is written into the first line of the "semifinal column"; the winner of the 3---4 match is written into the second line for semifinal competition. The lower bracket is filled in with the winners of the 5-6 and 7--8 matches, respectively. Win­ners of the semifinals then compete for the championship of the tournament. In case, however, the number of teams entered is not a power of two, another arrangement is necessary. If, for example, seven teams are entered, subtract seven from the next power of two, which is eight, and you have the number of byes, namely, one. Place "l" at the head of the semifinal column, as a "bye" and bracket the remaining numbers for the "first round." Num­ber 1 then competes in the semifinal with the winner of the 2-3 match of the "first round," while the lower bracket is brought out in identically the same way as the lower bracket in the illustration given for an eight-team tourna­ ment. If there are nine teams entered, subtract nine from the next power of two (16) and you have seven byes. Divide the byes between the top and the bottom of the brackets, thus: First Round Second Round Semifinals Final Winner :: •••..•••••••••.•••. ) 4. ·······-············31···················••}·· ··················· 5. ···················· :: ··················••!······················ :: ··················••! ··············· ··· Appendix III Current Publications Issued by The University Interscholastic League Those ordering bulletins should read carefully the description of the bulletins given below and the terms upon which they are distributed. Stamps are not accepted in payment for bulletins. Cash in the form of money order, currency, or personal check should accompany order. Make checks payable to "The University Interscholastic League." Bulletins ordered are not subject to exchange, nor will money be refunded for same. Test material (science, number sense, etc.) for the current year's contests will be available on June 1 for summer training. Some state contest directors base consecutive tests on cumulative data and have requested that current contests not be released until after State Meet. Purchases by public schools are exempt from the state sales tax. All orders should be placed by sponsor or administration. Constitution and Contest Rules of the lnte,rscholastic League 1966-67. $.60 per copy. Contains rules and regulations governing all contests of the University Interscholastic League. Free copy is sent to each member school. Arders for bulletins or other publications should be addressed to: THE UNIVERSITY INTERSCHOLASTIC LEAGUE University Station, Box 8028 Austin, Texas 78712 Make Checks Payable to : "The University Interscholastic League" All orders should be placed by sponsor or administrator. Appendix IV Scholarships Texas Woman's University Texas Woman's University has undertaken to supply $250 scholarships to winning girl contestants in The University Interscholastic League State Meet in the following events: 1. Journalism (any girl winning first place in any of the five journalism events in any conference) . 2. Debate (any girl on winning or runner-up team in any conference). 3. Speech (any girl winning first place in any conference in Persuasive Speaking, Informative Speaking, Poetry Interpretation or Prose Reading). 4. Dramatics (any girl on all-star cast in any conference) . 5. Ready Writing (any girl winning first place in any conference). 6. Number Sense (any girl winning first place in any conference) . 7. Tennis (any first place winner, in any conference, singles or doubles). For additional details, write to the Assistant to the President, Texas Worn· an's University, Denton. Blinn College Blinn College will give tuition credit of $100 each to five applicants who participated in the literary or academic contests at the State Meet. For additional information, write to the Registrar, Blinn College, Bren· ham. Tarleton College Tarleton State College will give 14 scholarships, valued at $50 each, to regional Interscholastic League winners in: Typewriting, science, shorthand, one-act play (best actor and best actress) , ready writing, journalism, prose reading, poetry interpretation, informative speaking, persuasive speaking, debate, number sense or slide rule. For further information, write to the President, Tarleton State College, Stephenville. The University of Texas Henry Beckman Number Sense Scholarship: $500, will be given to a number sense contestant at the State Meet. Applicant must attend The Uni­versity of Texas. For additional information, write to the Committee on Loans and Scholar­ships, The University of Texas, Austin 78712. Henry Beckman Slide Rule Proficiency: Two awards of $200 each will be available to high school seniors in the upper quartile of their graduating class who participated in the State Slide Rule contest. For additional information, write to Mrs. Margaret Baker, 401-C Engi­neering Lab, University of Texas, Austin 78712. Department of Drama Theatre Awards: Twelve awards of $500 each will be given to the five best actors, the five best actresses, and the two best crew members or technicians in the League's state one-act play competition. A few other awards are also available to outstanding University Inter­scholastic League one-act play participants. For additional details, write to the Chairman of the Department of Drama, University of Texas, Austin 78712. Actuaries Club of Southwest The Actuaries Club of the Southwest presents annually eight awards of $300 each to number sense sponsors and coaches. Applicants must (1) be actively coaching League Number Sense contestants and (2) be effectively promoting students' interest in mathematics and (3) have a contestant in the current regional meet. Winners are selected by the regional executive com­mittees. Application must be filed with the Regional Director by May 1. Previous award winners are not eligible. For additional information or application blanks write to your regional director or to the League office. Texas Interscholastic League Foundation All who apply for Texas Interscholastic League Foundation awards must meet the following requirements. 1. Graduate during the current year. 2. Compete in State Meet academic events. 3. Submit college entrance board examination scores (or the equiva­lent). Students who competed in the State Meet as juniors and who are now graduating may also apply. These should write the League office for appli­cation blanks. Application blanks for all others will be sent the school princi­pal, soon after regional meet. If your principal has not received the blank by the time State Meet competition is finished, you should write the League office. The complete application, with all attachments, must be in the League office by June 1. For additional information about any of the following scholarships, write to Texas Interscholastic League Foundation, Box 8028, University Station, Austin 78712. Bedichek (Roy) Memorial Scholarship: $500, payable $250 a semester. Applicant may attend any accredited, four-year university or college in Texas. Funds are provided by the Texas Interscholastic League Foundation. Brown Memorial Trust Scholarships: Five awards of $1000 each. These are for contestants in journalism, speech, science, number sense, slide rule or ready writing. Three applicants shall attend Texas Christian University and two shall attend Baylor University. All shall evidence a desire to engage in research and shall major in mathematics or science. Cook (Joe B.) Debate Scholarship: $1000 award, payable $400 the first year and $200 each of the next three years. For contestants in journalism, speech, science, number sense, slide rule or ready writing. Applicant must attend The University of Texas and remain on the University debate squad. Elizabeth Memorial Scholarship ( !. 0 . Webb): $500 award, payable $300 first year and $200 second year. Recipient may attend North Texas State University or Texas Woman's University at Denton, Sam Houston State College at Huntsville or West Texas State College at Canyon. Houston Endowment (/ones}: 20 awards of $500 each. For contestants in journalism, speech, science, number sense, slide rule or ready writing. Applicants may attend The University of Texas at Austin or Texas Western University at El Paso. Note that these awards are for Conference AAA, AA, A or B scholastics only. Kleberg Foundation Scholarships: Four awards of $800, payable $500 the first year, $300 the second. For contestants in journalism, speech, science, number sense, slide rule or ready writing. Applicants must attend The University of Texas. Moody Foundatwn: Ten awards of $4000 each, payable $1000 a year. Applicants may attend any accredited four-year college or university in Texas. Preference is given to those planning careers in life insurance and business. Shelby (T. H.) Memorial Scholarship: $500 award, payable $250 each semester. Applicant for this scholarship must attend The University of Texas. Funds are provided by Mrs. Dorothy Shelby Casey in memory of her father. Texas Interscholastic League Foundatwn: Two awards of $500 each, pay­able $250 a semester. Applicants may attend any accredited four-year college or university in Texas. Texas Laundry and Dry Cleaning Associatwn: Two awards of $500 each, payable $250 each semester. These awards are for contestants in journalism, speech, science, number sense, slide rule, or ready writing. Applicants may attend any accredited four-year college or university in Texas. Note that preference will be given to those planning to major in home economics. Welch (Robert A.) Foundation: 10 awards of $4000 each, payable $1000 each year. These scholarships are for contestants in journalism, speech, science, number sense, slide rule or ready writing. Applicants may attend any Texas college or university which currently has a Robert A. Welch Foundation grant. (These institutions are listed on the application blank.) Recipients must major in chemistry and evidence a desire to engage in re­search in chemistry at the graduate level in Texas. Appendix V Results of 1966 State Meet University Interscholastic League DEBATE Conference B: Robert Lee: Rhea McCutcheon and Marsha Dodson. Runners-up: Hico: Lynn Wade Malone and Andrea Henderson. Conference A: Munday: Bonner Bowden and Gaston Welborn. Runners-up: Grove­ton: Janice Eastepp and Brenda Price. Conference AA: Boys-Jacksboro: Richard Wilson and Boon Peek. Runners-up: Mc­Camey: Britt Newton and Don Cage. Conference AA: Girls-Spearman: D'dee Collard and Linnie Bollinger. Runners-up: Van : Carolyn Peters and Chriss Beall. Conference AAA: Boys-Andrews: Ronnie Ragsdale and David Hendrick. Runners­up: Sulphur Springs: James Arnold and Johnny Weddle. Conference AAA: Girls-Deer Park: Sally Renfro and Claudia McCombs. Runners­up: Wichita Falls Hirschi: Teresa Chambles and Starmye Harmon. Conference AAAA: Boys-El Paso Irvin: Jeff Reynolds and Bob Malone. Runners· up: San Antonio Alamo Heights: Donald Bayne and Charles Jefferson. Conference AAAA: Girls-Houston Jones: Yvonne Marcuse and Janice Salzman. Runners-up: San Antonio Robert E. Lee: Paula Garver and Andrea Arnold. INFORMATIVE SPEAKING Conference B: Boys-I. Ira: Larry Wiggins. 2. Hawkins: Keith Morrison. 3. La Ver­ nia: Harrison Kerschner. Conference B: Girls-I. Vernon Northside: Luanna Davis. 2. Wheeler: Beverly Clark. 3. Hawkins: Quita Russel. Conference A: Boys-I. Canadian: Mike Cullender. 2. Holliday: Charles Barnes. 3. Crosby: David Dlouhy. Conference A: Girls-I. Claude: Jackie Ward. 2. Waco Robinson: Kay Henson. 3. Charlotte : Ruth Thompson. Conference AA: Boys-I. Denver City: Stephen Tipps. 2. Gilmer: Bob Turner. 3. San Antonio Cole: John Shull. Conference AA: Girls-I. Refugio: Zane Hall. 2. Boling: Dianne Hannush. 3. Qua­nah: Susan Hutchens. Conference AAA: Boys-I. Seminole: Mackey Hancock. 2. San Marcos: Alan Holt. 3. Sulphur Springs: Mike Fox. Conference AAA: Girls-I. Ennis: Betty Rider. 2. Kerrville Tivy: Lynn LeMeilleur. 3. Andrews: Cheryl Sharbutt. Conference AAAA: Boys-I. Abilene Cooper: Stuard Sims. 2. Wichita Falls Wichita Falls: Bill Thompson. 3. Houston Memorial: Mike Biggers. Conference AAAA: Girls-I. Wichita Falls Wichita Falls: Pat Garvin. 2. Houston Memorial: Pat Taylor. 3. Lubbock Coronado: Mary Matthews. PERSUASIVE SPEAKING Conference B: Boys-I. Frost: Larry Vandiver. 2. Overton: Clark Davis. 3. Groom: Carl Hudson. Conference B: Girls-I. Frost: Candace Scott. 2. Marathon: Debbie Strumberg. 3. Overton: Toni Ballinger. Conference A: Boys-I. Garrison: Frank Latimer, Jr. 2. Crosby: Johnny Clifton. 3. Burnet: Stephen Gardner. Conference A: Girls-I. Winnie East Chambers: Gerry Griffin. 2. Woodsboro: Linda Bell. 3. Rotan : Mary McDonald. Conference AA: Boys-I. Cooper: Mike Bartley. 2. San Antonio Cole: Eugene Chimi­nello. 3. Fredericksburg: Charles Pliester. Conference AA: Girls-I. Quanah: Glenda Coburn. 2. Caldwell: Pearl Strong. 3. Randolph A.F.B.: Diane Borey. Conference AAA: Boys-I. Seminole: Terry Bennett. 2. Vernon: Mark Smith. 3. Del Rio: Danny Diaz. Conference AAA: Girls-I. Arlington Sam Houston: Patsy Kreger. 2. Canyon: Lou Ann Cowart. 3. Orange West Orange: Nancy Wingate. Conference AAAA: Boys-I. Garland Garland: Sam Knight. 2. Austin McCallum: Jack Dillard. 3. Midland Lee: Rob Kelly. Conference AAAA: Girls-I. Denton: Jackie Hammett. 2. Abilene Cooper: Betty Henderson. 3. Houston Westbury: Bonnie Laird. POETRY INTERPRETATION Conference B: Boys-I. Darrouzett: Barry Schownhals. 2. Johnson City Johnson: Bill Althaus. 3. Tatum: Menefee Smith. Conference B: Girls-I. Overton: Joy Moore. 2. Hutto: Sally Holman. 3. Hawley: Mary Virginia Smith. Conference A: Boys-I. Clyde: Murray Edwards. 2. Tuscola Jim Ned: Rick Rod­erick. 3. Simms James Bowie: Roger Hammonds. Conference A: Girls-I. Waco Midway: Polly Stokes. 2. White Deer : Ida May Powers. 3. Millsap: Judy McAuley. Conference AA: Boys-I. Caldwell: Kent Caperton. 2. Edna: Lester Coalson. 3. Sey­mour: Howard Douglas. Conference AA: Girls-I. Randolph A.F.B.: Pat Holliday. 2. Fredericksburg: Vicki Stohl. 3. Caldwell: Shirley Nochols. Conference AAA: Boys-I. Deer Park: Mike Regan. 2. Pecos: Eric Avery. 3. Kerr­ville Tivy: Clinton Jones. Conference AAA: Girls-I. Seminole: Pam Bishop. 2. Belton: Donna LaGrone. 3. Stafford Dulles: Jamie Farrell. Conference AAAA: Boys-I. Laredo Martin: Manuel Llanas. 2. Houston Jeff Davis: Ronnie Pogue. 3. Lubbock Coronado: Terry Howell. Conference AAAA: Girls-I. Austin Travis: Sharon E. Cash. 2. San Angelo Central: Gwen Curry. 3. Hurst Bell: Patty Selvia. PROSE READING Conference B: Boys-I. Arp: Dale Swinney. 2. Wheeler: Mike Holt. 3. Friendswood: Bill Lowman. Conference B: Girls-1. Hico: Cherry Ramage. 2. Grandview: Joyce Pipes. 3. Evant: Kathy Adams. Conference A: Boys-I. Rankin: Kyle Adams. 2. Clyde: Gregg South. 3. Waco Mid­way: Don Korenek. Conference A: Girls-I. Marble Falls: Janis Giesecke. 2. Quitman: Karen Matthews. 3. Claude: Peggy Woodridge. Conference AA: Boys-1. Speannan: Renny Berry. 2. Randolph AFB : John Lieber­man. 3. Grand Saline: Ron~ld Hazel. Conference AA: Girls-I. Haskell: Dianne Cadenhead. 2. La Grange: Debera Wil­liams. 3. Cooper: Mary Jane Moseley. Conference AAA: Boys-I. Mercedes: Rex Downing. 2. Canyon: Charles Starnes. 3. Orange West Orange: David Ford. Conference AAA: Girls-I. Wichita Falls Hirschi: Vivian Shook. 2. League City Clear Creek: Marjorie Wilhelm. 3. New Braunfels: Irene Nicholis. Conference AAAA: Boys-I. El Paso Austin: Michael Douglass. 2. Grand Prairie: Ricky Simpson. 3. Corpus Christi King: James Sherman. Conference AAAA: Girls-'l. Wichita Falls Wichita Falls: Susan Mansur. 2. Austin Austin: Holly Horton. 3. Houston Memorial: Peggy Murphy. JOURNALISM Conference B: Individual Winners: 1. Beckville: Wanda Faye Ross. 2. Paint Rock: Deanna Lorfing. 3. Dripping Springs: Linda Brizendrine. 4. Dripping Springs: Mike Davidson. 5. Anton: Karen Lyda. Winning Schools: 1. Dripping Springs. 2. Beckville. 3. Paint Rock. Conference A: Individual Winners: 1. Sabinal: Donna Birdwell. 2. White Oak: Sharee Shannon. 3. Sanderson: Carla Dunn. 4. Claude: Jan Crudgington. 5. Paducah: Cheryl Goodwin. Winning Schools: 1. Sabinal. 2. White Oak. 3. Sanderson. Conference AA: Individual Winners: 1. Crane: Jimmy Harrison. 2. Boerne: Eva D. Day. 3. La Grange: Annette Citzler. 4. Lewisville: Dan Aaron. 5. Humble: Phyllis Turner. Winning Schools: 1. Crane. 2. Boerne. 3. La Grange. Conference AAA: Individual Winners: 1. Kerrville Tivy: Frank Stevenson. 2. Arling­ ton Sam Houston: Ellen Clampitt. 3. Sweetwater Newman: Robert Pyeatt. 4. Stafford Dulles: Connie Quinton. 5. Lampasas: Amy Culbertson. Winning Schools: 1. Kerrville Tivy. 2. Arlington Sam Houston. 3. Sweetwater Newman. Conference AAAA: Individual Winners: 1. Amarillo: Ben Sargent. 2. San Antonio Jefferson: LaVerne Dickinson. 3. Lubbock Monterey: Trudy Poteet. 4. Killeen: Glennys Peterson. 5. Dallas Hillcrest: Sherry Swesnik. Winning Schools: 1. Amarillo. 2. San Antonio Jefferson. 3. Lubbock Monterey. NUMBER SENSE Conference B: 1. Rocksprings: Mickey Wann. 2. Blooming Grove: Donnie Patterson. 3. Rochelle: Ronnie Mohr. Conference A: 1. Stockdale: Jim Wehmeyer. 2. Alto: Rayford Smith. 3. Glen Rose: Mary Parker. Conference AA: 1. Pittsburgh: Phil Garrett. 2. San Saba: George Booker. 3. San Diego: Sarah Mamie Cubriel. Conference AAA: 1. Andrews : Louie Ramirez. 2. Houston Furr: Dennis New. 3. An­ drews: Mike Rogers. Conference AAAA: 1. Freeport Brazosport: Alan R. Beale. 2. McAllen: Scott Atlas. 3. Odessa Permian: George Terrell. ONE-ACT PLAY Conference B: Winning Schools: 1. Hico. 2 .. Overton. Best Actress: Toni Ballinger, Overton. Best Actor and Outstanding Performer: Lynn Malone, Hico. All-Star Cast: Lynn Malone. Hico. John Cohagen, Overton. David Sharp, Meadow. Toni Ballinger, Overton. Linda Horton, Meadow. Cherry D. Ramage, Hico. Honorable Mention: Blake Bass, Danbury. Andrea Henderson, Hico. Conference A: Winning Schools: 1. Winnie East Chambers. 2. Hale Center. Best Actor: Geoffrey Gannaway, Hale Center. Best Actress and Outstanding Performer: Karen McBride, Winnie East Chambers. All Star Cast: Geoffrey Gannaway, Hale Center. Steve Lane, Alvarado. Irvin Lippman, Schulenburg. Karen McBride, Winnie East Chambers. Billye Sue McClain, Hale Center. Ann Fowler, Winnie East Chambers. Conference AA: Winning Schools: 1. Mason. 2. Port Arthur Austin. Best Actor and Outstanding Performer: Gerald Geisweidt, Mason. Best Actress: Sugie Brannon, Plano. All Star Cast: Gerald Geisweidt, Mason. Freddie Gormley, Mason. Charles Adams, Port Arthur Austin. Sugie Brannon, Plano. Julie Harber, Randolph Air Force Base. Cindy Hubley, Plano. Conference AAA: Winning Schools: 1. San Antonio Sam Houston. 2. Angleton. Best Actor: Bruce Melbert, Angleton. Best Actress and Outstanding Performer: Sharon Stege, San Antonio Sam Houston. All Star Cast: Bruce Melbert, Angleton. David An­drews, Pecos. Gary Head, Dallas Lake Highlands. Sharon Stege, San Antonio Sam Houston. Donna Smith, San Antonio Sam Houston. Charlotte Macik, Angleton. Honor­able Mention : Rebecca Chesire, San Antonio Sam Houston. Conference AAAA: Winning Schools: 1. Houston Bellaire. 2. San Antonio Robert E. Lee. Best Actor and Outstanding Performer: Harry Kinney, Houston Bellaire. Best Actress: Kay Rogers, Houston Bellaire. All Star Cast: Harry Kinney, Houston Bellaire. Mark Murphey, Dallas Kimball. George Cato, Abilene Cooper. Kay Rogers, Houston Bellaire. Caroline Ingle, Dallas Kimball. Molly Buttler, San Antonio Lee. Honorable Mention: Trey Wilson, Houston Bellaire. Brent Mintz, Houston Bellaire. READY WRITING Conference B: 1. Avery: Bert Lowell Lennon. 2. Aledo: Linda Sedden. 3. Sterling City: James Morgan. Conference A: 1. Corrigan: Robert E. Ward. 2. Lubbock Roosevelt: Ruth Rucker. 3. Marion: Marshall W. Alcorn Jr. Conference AA: 1. Teague: Jeff Cox. 2. Hamilton: Mary Lynn Miller. 3. San Antonio Southwest: Don Robinson. Conference AAA: 1. Waco La Vega: Deirdre Harris. 2. Fort Stockton: Mike Hardin. 3. Lampasas: James Bogard. Conference AAAA: 1. Denton: Dottie Belcher. 2. Abilene Cooper: Jane Hall. 3. Edin­burg: Paul Fagg. SCIENCE Conference B: 1. Gail Borden County : Charles Teague. 2. Happy: Ocie Hudson. 3. Friendswood: David Charlton. Conference A: 1. Canadian: Mike Cullender. 2. Spring: Randall Hughes. 3. Forney: Roland Pitts. Con/ erence AA: 1. Daingerfield: Gary Key. 2. Pittsburg: Merrell Locke. 3. Boling: Lee Collins. Conference AAA: 1. Brenham : Marshall Steinfeld. 2. Brownwood: Steve Arthur. 3. Canyon: Alan Demus. Conference AAAA: 1. Odessa Permian: Wayne Holcombe. 2. San Antonio Alamo Heights: David Grant. 3. Houston Bellaire: Mabry Tyson. SHORTHAND Conference B: 1. Brookshire Royal: Lee Taylor. 2. Gorman: Marilyn Shell. 3. Over­ton Leveretts Chapel: Diane Smires. Conference A: I. Shelbyville: Lynda Swanzy. 2. Canadian : Janice Selby. 3. Louise: Judy Malek. Conference AA: 1. Winters: Darlene Sneed. 2. Decatur: Janice Bishop. 3. Grapevine: Pamela Cooper. Conference AAA: 1. Houston Furr: Brenda Nichols. 2. El Campo : Virginia Appling. 3. Monahans: Vicki Yates. Conference AAAA: 1. Garland Garland: Pamela Ford. 2. Waco Richfield: Eva Pow­ell. 3. Amarillo Tascosa: Charlene Mason. SLIDE RULE Conference B: 1. Longview Spring Hill: Bill Daniel. 2. Longview Spring Hill: Bill Rogers. 3. Runge : Paul Bruce. Conference A: I. Canadian: K. C. Rudy. 2. Eldorado: Scott McGregor. 3. Spring: Don Thompson. Conference AA: 1. Quanah: Gary S. Naylor. 2. Quanah: Martha K. Fiero. 3. Tom­ball: Arthur Pearson. Conference AAA: 1. Houston Furr: Dennis New. 2. Andrews: Aaron Roberson. 3. Houston Furr: Wayne Humbird. Conference AAAA: I. Wichita Falls, Wichita Falls: David McCall. 2. Wichita Falls Rider: William Lee Norwood. 3. Lubbock Monterey: Sheryl Evit. TYPEWRITING Conference B: I. Miles: Linda Kasberg. 2. Estelline: Mike Hughes. 3. Sadler S &S; Polly Wood. Conference A: Marble Falls: Gayle Woodard. 2. DeLeon: Ann Harvey. 3. Smithville: Mary Dement. Conference AA: 1. Mason: Margaret Hahn. 2. Daingerfield: Jackie Harris. 3. Dainger­field: Nancy McLain. Conference AAA: 1. Lampasas: Nancy Walker. 2. Mission: Susie Schmidt. 3. Garland South Garland: Sharon Conine. ,Conference AAAA: 1. McAllen: Carla Cameron. 2. Midland Lee: Becky Jones. 3. Dallas W. H. Adamson: Charlotte Jett. TENNIS, 1966 Conference B: Boys' Doubles: Turkey: Harvey Case and Alton Setliff Gladewater Union Grove: James Brinkley and Mike Tuttle Boys' Singles: La Pryor: Dale Walker Turkey: David Majors Girls' Doubles: Estelline: Anne Rapp and Cherri Rapp Barksdale Nueces Canyon: Susanne Luce and Shelia Large Girls' Singles: Old Glory: Stephanie Letz Garden City: Judy Hirt Conference A: Boys' Doubles: Santa Rosa: Ken Milam and Dean Shimek Sanderson: Tommy Gray and Travis Harkins Boys' Singles: Santa Rosa: Eddie Matthews Fairfield: Travis Earl Stripling Girls' Doubles: Menard: Dreu Lyckman and Buffy Moser Sabinal: Diana McClain and Paula Mathney Girls' Singles: Junction: Beth Kothman Eastland: Marsha Treadwell Conference AA: Boys' Doubles: Corpus Christi Flour Bluff: Billy Cofer and Jimmy Parker Van: Rickey Cook and Ronnie Ragain Boys' Singles: Van: Jimmy Jackson Georgetown: David Adkins Girls' Doubles: Pearsall: Lynn Reas and Melissa Galloway Marfa: Susan Searls and Cindy Wells Girls' Singles: Van: Beverly Thompson Pearsall: Ramona Kile Conference AAA: Boys' Doubles: San Antonio Sam Houston: Bobby Boldt and Jimmy Valentine Wichita Falls Hirschi: Larry Carr and Billy Stewart Boys' Singles: Brownwood: Bill Saunders Rosenberg Lamar: Dick Barton Girls' Doubles: Austin Lanier: Bonnie 'Legatt and Carolyn Wilson Brownfield: Brenda Benson and Janie McNutt Girls' Singles: Seminole: Barbara Bramlett Mission: Judy Tenery Conference AAAA: Boys' Doubles: Fort Worth Arlington Heights: Johnny Williams and Kenny McMillan San Antonio Alamo Heights: Pancho Walthall and Bohn Smith Boys' Singles: San Angelo Central: Joe Williams Corpus Christi Ray: Steve Browne Girls' Doubles: EI Paso Irvin: Debra Darby and Jackie Guadagnoli Harlingen: Renee Brown and Nancy Clark Girls' Singles: Dallas Highland Park: Betty Hagerman San Antonio Lee: Annie Langham GOLF WINNERS, 1965 Conference B: Individual-I. Overton: Roger Moore _______ ___ _ _____ ___ ..159 2. Richland Springs: Billy Schneider ______ 165 3. Overton: Johnny Harper ----------------_____ ________166 Team -1. Overton: Johnny Harper, Roger Moore, Memory Streeter, Donny Vetsch ------------------------------------__ __ ____ 696 2. Richland Springs: Billy Schneider, Pepper Wells, Kenneth Land, Rickie Baskin ------------------------......702 3. Shallowater: J. Preston, G. Murry, M. Stanton, D. Grice ·······-·---·- .793 Conference A: Individual-I. Smithville: Bill Bunte ----------------············--162 2. Memphis: Jerry Moss ----·-············-·· .... 163 3. Troup: Tommy Vascocu 165 Team -1. Memphis: Jerry Moss, Larry Parks, Roger Fowler, Donnie Miller _____ _ --679 2. Smithville: Bill Bunte, Charles Bunte, James ___________ 705 Marshall, Galen Bunte 3. Albany: Herbert Hawkins, John W. Webb, Jarvis _________ _711 Gardner, Joe Bray Key Conference AA: Individual-I. Jacksboro: W. A. Hawkins------------·--· .......................159 2. Alpine: J. Hudgins ____ _ ..160 3. Jacksboro: Tommy Gilbert ...161 Team -1. Alpine: J. Hudgins, S. Kimball, T. Lear, T. Shortt ----·-······- . 669 2. Jacksboro: W. A. Hawkins, Tommy Gilbert, Jimmy Gilmore, Ronnie Kennedy --------------·-·---·-----· -670 3. Randolph AFB: Hal Schauer, Robert Ficke, John Monahan, Jeff Bowerman ..691 Conference AAA: Individual-I. Kerrville Tivy: Drayton Mahaffey ---· .....152 2. Seguin: Zack Padgett ......164 3. Sulphur Springs: Ike Harper -------------·----....156 Team -1. Seguin: Zack Padgett, Mike Morgan, Steve Keeland, Don Valdez ---------------------------------646 2. Sulphur Springs: Bob Brittain, David Payne, Ike Harper, Warren Chancellor -----------------· ---------657 3. Beaumont, Forest Park: Mike Machemehl, Terry Garth, Bruce Williams, James Swicegood .. .. 663 Conference AAAA: Individual-I. San Antonio Lee: Steve Holmsley -------------·······-·----······--148 2. Odes.sa Permian: Ronnie Leverich -······-------·····-------·····--149 3. Beaumont, Beaumont: James Singletary -----·······-···-······-154 Team -1. San Antonio Robert E. Lee: Jim Barker, Rickey Goerges, Steve Holmsley, Bob Mahan ··--· ______ 633 2. Beaumont, Beaumont: James Singletary, Charles King, Mike Freeman, Kirby Smith --····--_ 650 3. Longview: Lee Ray Matthews, David Lockett, Jim Harden, Al Leach ----·-----·····-··-···-·· --_ 651 STATE TRACK AND FIELD MEET 440-Yard Relay Conference B 1. Bartlett (Ricky Brock, Frankie Crathes, James Whittenburg, Tim Nealy); 2. Eden (David Hall, Robert Stansberry, Don McGuffin, John Tomlinson); 3. Blooming Grove (Clark Putnam, Bill Carroll, Charles Collier, Jimmy Fuller) ; 4. Lockett (Vernon) (Lupe Herrera, Mack Lewis, Robert Cochran, Edward Kubicek) ; 5. Wheeler (David Jamison, Bobby Vanpool, Mike Lewis, Tommy Smith); 6. Dawson (Pete Chasteen, James McGrew, Roy Lee Hall, Billy Porter). Time: 44.0. Conference A 1. Goldthwaite (James Cook, Harold Moore, Jerry Roundtree, Charles Blackbum); 2. Pettus (Pat Mattingly, Mike Mattingly, Bobby Tilley, Johnny Proffitt) ; 3. Barbers Hill (Mont Belvieu) (Walter Farrell, Bobby Steck, Benny Lansford, James Tilton); 4. Midlothian (Mike Smith, Newell Sink, Gary Rope, Tommy Woodard); 5. Quitman (Bobby R. Grant, Robbie S. Spacek, Clyde A. McAfee, Charles B. Patrick); 6. Plains (Joe Dan Cooke, Ronnie Elmore, Alton Rains, Dennis Crutcher). Time: 42.7.. Conference AA 1. Taylor (Terry Czimsky, Marcus Heierman, Leroy Kolinek, David Rummell); 2. Palacios (Jerry Haynes, Ernest Haynes, Donald Washington, Charles Polk); 3. BellvUle (Edward Burleson, Bill Knolle, Frankie Hoppe, Ted Koy); 4. Stinnett (Kenneth Plum· lee, Jimmy Wells, Guymon Phillips, Denny Greer); 5. Plano (Patrick William Coyne, Rodney Haggard, Johnnie Fred Robinson, Terry Mike Whitley); 6. Seymour (George Connor, John Connor, Don Knezek, Tony Kuehler). Time: 42.1. Conference AAA 1. Monahans (Duane Bragg, Erich Hardaway, Ricky Potts, Greg Short); 2. Channel­view (Robert Flowers, Kenneth Musgrove, Ronald Barnes, Larry Williamson); 3. Ector (Odessa) (Charles Muela, Albert Lechuga, Ronnie Parnell, Johnny Gentry); 4. San Marcos (Charles Callihan, Tommy Colgin, Homer Guerrero, Wilbert Wheeler); 5. Mc­Kinney (Jack Faubion, Mike James, Scotty Hendricks, Jackie Lynn); 6. Columbia (West Columbia) (Abe Bryant, Clifton Lincecum, Larry McAuley, Earnest Williams). Time: 42.1. Conference AAAA 1. Robert E. Lee (Baytown) (William L. Askey, Dwight Denson, Kenny Fenelon, Billy Littlefield); 2. Roy Miller (Corpus Christi) (Rickey Johnson, Edward Marshall, Mitch Miller, Rufus Odem); 3. South Houston (Evett Kerbow, Ricky Lindberg, Dennis Vaughn, Jimmy White); 4. Highlands (San Antonio) (Melvin Bennett, Larry Hickman, Gary Hunter, Clarence Jackson) ; 5. Central (San Angelo) (Carl Johnson, Jim Marshall, Frankie Stringer, Lucius Washington); 6. Paschal (Fort Worth) (Dave Daniel, Bill Garrett, Jimmy Kizer, Mike Post) . Time: 41.4. One-Mile Relay Con{erence B 1. Bartlett (Isiah Walker, Donny Schwertner, Timothy Nealy, Ricky Brock); 2. Friendswood (Bill Lowman, Don Chandler, Arthur Kahn, Ray Bookman) ; 3. Magnolia (Bobby Stalcup, Donny Glass, Jimmy Fleming, Tommy Glass); 4. Rule (Charles Lott, Dennis Riggins, Paul Cornelius, Larry LeFevre); 5. Bangs (Ronnie Horton, Travis Hallford, Tommy Stephens, Henry Ramsey); 6. Tatum (Johnny Rousseau, Lindy Blount, Kenneth Freeman, David Pinnell) . Time : 3:24. Conference A 1. Goldthwaite (James Cook, Jerry Roundtree, Ronnie Hill, Owen Yarbrough); 2. Coahoma (Mike Mosley, Marshall Williams, Johnny Gibson, Wayne Oglesby); 3. Mem­phis (Roy Long, William McFalls, William Welch, Clyde Wilson); 4. Hull-Daisetta (Daisetta) (Larry Flowers, Malcolm Melancon, Craig Barnett, Lawrence Eaglin); 5. Early (Brownwood) (Richard Davis, Vaughn Costa, Billy Tharp, Don White); 6. Weimar (James Cummins, Donald Guenther, David Guenther, George Kloesel) . Time: 3:21.1. Conference AA 1. Palacios (Jerry Haynes, Ernest Haynes, Donald Washington, Roland Flores); 2. Lockney (Harry Elton Blendon, Eugene Mathis, Neil Linn Mitchell, Melvin Ray Siss­ney); 3. Taylor (Bobby Clark, Leroy Kolinek, Gary Mohel, David Rummel); 4. La Grange (Malcolm Voelkel, Chestine Moore, T. C. Filmore, Stephen Pesick) ; 5. La Joya (Lindolfo Zamora, Alfredo Garza, Leonel Ramirez, Homer Chapa); 6. Winters (Jerry Awalt, LeRoy Kettler, Richard Puckett, Terry Rives). Time: 3:20.7. Conference AAA 1. San Marcos (Charles Callihan, Jack Carson, Dwight Harris, Cary Young); 2. Snyder (Leon Riggins, Teddy Brown, Curtis Clay, M. C. Powell); 3. Deer Park (Robin Enochs, Kenny Kachel, Dale Thorpe, Ronnie Weeks); 4. Monahans (Duane Bragg, Erich Hardaway, Richard LeBaron, Greg Short); 5. Tivy (Kerrville) (Bobby Peschel, Daniel Rhoads, Melvin Fifer, Jimmy Bill); 6. John Foster Dulles (Stafford) (Eleno Flores, Jesse Vargas, Tommy Nelson, Tommy Laird). Time: 3 :19.8. Conference AAAA 1. Cooper (Abilene) (George Cato, Leo Marcus Fry, Jerry Randall Martin, Larry Jack Mildren); 2. Memorial (Houston) (Mike Bouche, Rusty Brents, John Warlick, Dave Morton); 3. Sam Houston (Houston) (Lawrence Owens, Robin Lowe, Wilbur Johnson, John Carey); 4. Douglas MacArthur (San Antonio) (Donald Fournier, Stan­ley McDaniel, Michael McLeod, William Rupert); 5. Abilene (Abilene) (Patrick Batts, Robert E. Callison, Dan Alexander Jones, Robert Eugene Monteith); 6. Justin Kimball (Dallas) (Glen Bell, Allen Dixon, Dee Fletcher, Jay Philbrick). Time: 3:15.1. 100-Yard Dash Con/ erence B 1. Don King (Overton); 2. Ray Bookman (Friendswood); 3. Gilberto Chavarria (Tornillo); 4. Edward Kubicek (Lockett, Vernon); 5. Billy Porter (Dawson); 6. Elmer McMahan (Westbrook). Time: 10.1. Conference A 1. Charles Blackburn (Goldthwaite); 2. Bobby Steck (Barbers Hill, Mont Belvieu); 3. Mike Warren (Shelbyville); 4. Pat Mattingly (Pettus) ; 5. Randy Collins (Honey Grove) ; 6. Floyd Bennett (Springlake, Earth). Time: 10.2. Conference AA 1. Marcus Heierman (Taylor); 2. Ernest Haynes (Palacios); 3. Macon Hughes (Ed­couch-Elsa, Edcouch); 4. Zane Reeves (Phillips); 5. Johnnie Fred Robinson (Plano); 6. Jimmy Young (Denver City). Time: 9.8. Conference AAA 1. Merlin Eck (Greenville) ; 2. Kenneth Musgrove (Channel view) ; 3. Ricky Potts (Monahans); 4. Tommy Colgin (San Marcos); 5. Johnny Gentry (Ector, Odessa); 6. Marion Pleasant (Cuero). Time: 9.9. Conference AAAA 1. Rufus Odem (Roy Miller, Corpus Christi); 2. Herb Ellison (Highlands, San An­tonio); 3. Carl Johnson (Central, San Angelo); 4. Willie Black (Technical, Fort Worth); 5. Jose Jaure (Big Spring); 6. Jeff Mankoff (Hillcrest, Dallas). Time: 10.0. 220-Yard Dash Con/erence B 1. Gilberto Chavarria (Tornillo); 2. Paul Cornelius (Rule); 3. Billy Porter (Daw­son); 4. Ray Bookman (Friendswood); 5. Elmer McMahan (Westbrook); 6. Edward Kubicek (Lockett, Vernon). Time: 22.2. Conference A 1. Charles Blackburn (Goldthwaite); 2. Roy Myers (Marble Falls); 3. Floyd Bennett (Springlake, Earth); 4. James Lockridge (Kress); 5. Rayford G. Smith (Alto) 6. Marvin Courtney (East Chambers, Winnie). Time: 22.2. Conference AA 1. Marcus Heierman (Taylor); 2. Mark Mosely (Livingston); 3. Donald Washington (Palacios); 4. Macon Hughes (Edcouch-Elsa, Edcouch); 5. Leroy Thomas (Paul H. Pewitt, Omaha) ; 6. Patrick William Coyne (Plano). Time: 22.0. Conference AAA 1. Merlin Eck (Greenville); 2. Ricky Potts (Monahans); 3. Marion Pleasant (Cuero); 4. Kenneth Musgrove (Channelview); 5. Terrell Carter (Del Rio); 6. Tommy Johnson (Bay City). Time: 21.5. Conference AAAA 1. Herb Ellison (Highlands, San Antonio); 2. Carl Johnson (Central, San Angelo); 3. Willie Black (Technical, Fort Worth); 4. Charles Michael Robins (University, Waco) ; 5. George Cato (Cooper, Abilene); 6. Larry Tietze (Milby, Houston) . Time: 21.5. 440-Yard Dash Conference B 1. Joventino Gomez (Skidmore-Tynan, Skidmore); 2. George Trenfield (Follett); 3. Larry LeFevre (Rule); 4. Pharis Anderson (Perrin); 5. Joe Lester Axel (Garwood); 6. Royce Lee (Bronte). Time: 50.0. Con/ erence A 1. Ronald Dupree (Queen City); 2. Clyde Wilson (Memphis); 3. Lee Valdez (Poth) ; 4. Raymond Kozik (East Bernard); 5. Steve Stanley (Baird); 6. Bill Cramer (Joshua). Time: 49.5. Conference AA 1. Melvin Ray Sissney (Lockney); 2. Mike 'Logan (Burleson); 3. David Dolton (Yoakum); 4. Jerry Awalt (Winters); 5. Charles Stephens (Anahuac); 6. David Rummel (Tay !or) . Time: 48.4. Conference AAA 1. Charles Callihan (San Marcos); 2. Larry Schovajsa (Littlefield); 3. Dwight Harris (San Marcos); 4. Eleno Flores (John Foster Dulles, Stafford); 5. Kevin N. Ormes (Lake Highlands, Richardson); 6. Buddy Shepard (Hirschi, Wichita Falls). Time: 48.3. Conference AAAA 1. Jimmy White (South Houston); 2. Mike Bouche (Memorial, Houston); 3. Robert Poe (Austin, El Paso); 4. Leo Marcus Fry (Cooper, Abilene); 5. Stanley McDaniel (Douglas MacArthur, San Antonio); 6. Larry Crawford (McCallum, Austin). Time: 47.2. 880-Yard Run Conference B 1. Isiah Walker (Bartlett); 2. David Pinnell (Tatum); 3. Jerry Sellers (Carlisle, Price); 4. Tommy Smith (Wheeler); 5. Freddy Taft (Wallis); 6. Jerald Ray Scribner (Morse). Time: 1:58.8. Con/ erence A 1. Mike Mosley (Coahoma); 2. Danny Richardson (Eldorado); 3. Richard Davis (Early, Brownwood) ; 4. Steve Moran (Keller) ; 5. Juan Hernandez (Jourdanton) ; 6. Robert Duane Proctor (White Oak). Time: 1 :55.8. Conference AA 1. Fred Cooper (Stinnett); 2. Tim Salles (Hamshire-Fannett, Hamshire); 3. Johnny Gibbon (Decatur); 4. Gerry Rivera (Mathis); 5. Terry Hill (Dimmitt); 6. Billy Haddock (Commerce). Time: 1 :55.4. Conference AAA 1. Glenn Graham (Palestine); 2. Edmund Ernest Tresp (Lake Highlands, Richard­son); 3. Ruben Reyes (Ector, Odessa); 4. Jim Gore (Lanier, Austin); 5. Jacky Hays ( Channelview) ; 6. Larry Moore (Andrews). Time: 1 :55.3. Conference AAAA 1. John Wilbur Robertson (Sunset, Dallas); 2. Robert Eugene Monteith (Abilene, Abilene); 3. Dave Morton (Memorial, Houston); 4. John Carey (Sam Houston, Hous­ton); 5. Milton McCrum (Monterey, Lubbock); 6. Steve Stephenson (Highlands, San Antonio). Time: 1.53.2. 120-Yard High Hurdles Conference B 1. Glenn Blahuta (Orchard); 2. Larry Holliday (Ira); 3. Mike Hoch (Garden City); 4. Hoppy Jennings (Lazbuddie); 5. Larry Cunningham (Weinert); 6. Mike McPherson (Tolar) . Time: 14.8. Conference A 1. Tommy Watson (Calallen, Corpus Christi); 2. Johnny Moran (Keller); 3. Larry Carson (Springtown); 4. Ken Dawson (Springlake, Earth); 5. Alan Tidwell, Hull­Daisetta, Daisetta) ; 6. Earl Copeland (Aspermont). Time: 14.8. Conference AA I. James Lawerence Biggs (Taft); 2. Malcolm Voelkel (La Grange); 3. Ronnie Grigsby (McCamey); 4. Timothy Earl Martin (De Kalb); 5. Terry Richardson (Quanah); 6. David Fritsch (La Grange) . Time: 14.3. Conference AAA 1. Herbert Woods (Lake View, San Angelo); 2. Lester Nokes (Uvalde); 3. Jack Faubion, McKinney); 4. Don Carter (Liberty); 5. Lang Smith (Cuero); 6. Frank Riney (Breckenridge). Time: 14.4. Conference AAAA 1. Mel Bennett (Highlands, San Antonio); 2. Sammy Maddox (Justin F. Kimball, Dallas); 3. Gregg Gilleland (Tascosa, Amarillo); 4. Juan Carbajal (Bel Air, El Paso); 5. Billy Littlefield (Robert E. Lee, Baytown); 6. Cly Baylor (Thomas Jefferson, San Antonio). Time: 14.5. 180-Yard Low Hurdles Conference B 1. Glen Blahuta (Orchard); 2. Charlie Greenlee (Kemp); 3. Melvin Porter (Lo­meta); 4. Joe Clifton Henderson (Brookesmith); 5. Larry Cunningham (Weinert); 6. Larry Wiggins (Ira). Time: 19.9. Conference A 1. Tommy Watson (Calallen, Corpus Christi); 2. Jerry Watson (Ranger); 3. Laney Cook (Sonora); 4. Larry Carson (Springtown); 5. Lamont Batchelor (Wink); 6. Alan Tidwell (Hull-Daisetta, Daisetta). Time: 19.9. Conference AA 1. James Lawerence Biggs (Taft); 2. Malcolm Voelkel (La Grange); 3. David Fritsch (La Grange); 4. Terry Richardson (Quanah); 5. Ronnie Grigsby (McCamey); 6. Gary Thomas Davis (Bishop). Time: 19.3. Conference AAA 1. Herbert Woods (Lake View, San Angelo); 2. Carl Hayes (Robstown); 3. Mike Myers (Palestine); 4. Charles Hill (Conroe); 5. Lester Nokes (Uvalde); 6. Jack Faubion (McKinney). Time: 18.7. Conference AAAA 1. Mel Bennett (Highlands, San Antonio); 2. Jesse Ball (Edgewood, San Antonio); 3. Charles Cannon (Permian, Odessa); 4. Juan Carbajal (Bel Air, El Paso); 5. Jack Wilemon (Arlington Heights, Fort Worth); 6. Jerral Landers (L. D. Bell, Hurst). Time: 19.3. One-Mile Run Conference B 1. Eladio Gomez (Skidmore-Tynan, Skidmore); 2. David Nelson (Lazbuddie); 3. Dale Klement (Muenster); 4. Charles Harold Denman (Kennard); 5. Duffy DeLeon (Pawnee); 6. Richard Gibson (Toyah). Time : 4:32.3. Conference A 1. Albert J. Lee (Cross Plains); 2. Jesse Martinez (Woodsboro) ; 3. John Fisher (Pettus); 4. Ronnie Hearne (Millsap); 5. Ventura Velez (Fabens); 6. Harry Milstead (Franklin). Time: 4:25. Conference AA 1. Elezar Lucio (Del Valle); 2. Rudy Montez (McCamey); 3. Robert Valta Post (De Kalb); 4. Barry Collins (Pittsburg); 5. Mike David (Robert Cole, San Antonio); 6. Domingo Pulido (Aransas County, Rockport) . Time: 4: 26. Conference AAA 1. Robert Gonzalez (Falfurrias); 2. Homer Martinez (Falfurrias); 3. Bennie Leal (Alvin); 4. John Walker (Clear Creek, League City); 5. David Ramsey (Monahans); 6. Toby Goodman (Hirschi, Wichita Falls). Time: 4:10.4. Conference AAAA 1. Leonard Hilton (Stephen F. Austin, Houston); 2. David Redwine (Arlington Heights, Fort Worth); 3. Manley Roe (M. B. Lamar, Houston) ; 4. Eddie Eurestri (Johnston, Austin); 5. Mike Jones (Justin F. Kimball, Dallas); 6. Daniel Ware Herd (Midland). Time: 4:19.7. Pole Vault Con/ erence B 1. Terry Fleming (Trinidad); 2. Roy Malstrom (Melvin); 3. Charles Sheffield (Spurger); (tied for 2nd place); 4. Cliff Strickland (Rochester); 5. Everett Childress (Allison); 6. William Gambrill (Loop); (tied for fifth place) . Height : 12' ()". Conference A 1. Tracy Devine (Sharyland, Mission); 2. Leslie Brandon (Midlothian); 3. Calvin Smith (Plains); 4. Rickey Parris (Wylie, Abilene); 5. Frank Harris (Timpson); 6. Stuart Johnson (Tidehaven, EI Maton); Kit Carter (Shelbyville) (tied for sixth place). Height: 13' 0". Conference AA 1. Randy Jinks (Katy); 2. Larry Mcintyre (East Central, San Antonio); 3. Harold Shannon (Denver City) ; 4. Mike Massey (Gregory-Portland, Gregory); 5. Billy Wie­thorn (McGregor); 6. Rickey Gibson (Winnsboro) (tied for fifth place). Height: 13' O''. Conference AAA 1. James Eugene Riley (Mercedes); 2. Stanley Edgar Everett (Kermit) ; 3. Ronald Hanson (Monahans); 4. Eugene Fuhrman (Gainesville); 5. Mickey Lee Eddleman (Sam Houston, Arlington); 6. Dale P. Nolen (Silsbee) . Height: 14' 4". Conference AAAA I. Dickie Phillips (North Shore, Galena Park); 2. Jim Mallard (McCallum, Austin); 3. Larry Curtis (North Shore, Galena Park); 4. James King (Permian, Odessa); 5. Tommy Gilbert (Amarillo, Palo Duro); 6. Larry Mumaw (Richardson) (tied for fifth place). Height: 15' l". Shot Put Conference B l. Ronnie Pinckard (Follett); 2. Jimmy Salazar (Calvert); 3. David Holubec (Paint Rock); 4. Mike Hancock (Ore City); 5. James Carroll Brown (Van Vleck); 6. James Ronald Hughes (Carbon). Distance: 55' 9lf2". Conference A l. Floyd Worlow (Springtown) ; 2. Don Childs (Reagan County, Big Lake); 3. Johnny Mayo (Eldorado); 4. Henry Swanson (Farmersville); 5. Clifton Thomas (Tide­haven, EI Maton); 6. Charles Hall (Queen City). Distance: 53' 11%". Conference AA 1. Ronnie Lightfoot (Copperas Cove); 2. James Roy Morris (Seymour); 3. Dennis Lane (Brady); 4. Peyton Fullingim (Decatur) ; 5. Thomas Lewis (Aransas County, Rockport); 6. Phelan Allee (Klein, Spring). Distance: 59' 3lf2". Conference AAA 1. Tommy Moss (Andrews); 2. Billy Stites (Pharr-San Juan-Alamo, Pharr); 3. Warren Hart (Breckenridge); 4. Bob Keyes (Seminole); 5. Earl Hatcher (Deer Park); 6. Ronnie Mercer (Gainesville). Distance: 57' 8lf2". Conference AAAA 1. Bill Elfstrom (Ball, Galveston); 2. John Walker (Arlington Heights, Fort Worth); 3. Kenneth Terrell (South Park, Beaumont); 4. Randy Beck (L. D. Bell, Hurst); 5. Donald Vick Fielding (McCollum, San Antonio); 6. Doc Cornutt (Pampa). Distance : 59' 11". Discus Throw Conference B 1. Mark Bindock (Leakey); 2. Jimmy Salazar (Calvert) ; 3. Neal Lynch (Pfluger­ville); 4. Frank Lothridge (Overton); 5. Ronnie Pinckard (Follett).; 6. James Ronald Hughes (Carhon). Distance: 154' lllf2". Conference A 1. Tony Butler (Coahoma); 2. Brit Paty (Roscoe); 3. Mike Horn (Midway, Waco); 4. Terry Hampton (Springtown); 5. Clifton Thomas (Tidehaven, El Maton); 6. Johnny Valdez (Bloomington). Distance: 161' 2lf2". Conference AA 1. Max Locke (Dalhart); 2. Ronnie Lightfoot (Copperas Cove); 3. Buddy Harris (Ballinger) ; 4. Gerald Gasch (Poteet); 5. Edward Martinez (Refugio); 6. Mark Moseley (Livingston) . Distance: 165' 7". Conference AAA 1. Ronnie Mercer (Gainesville); 2. Wayne Walton (Azle); 3. Erich Hardaway (Mona­hans); 4. Glen Frantzen (Palestine); 5. Jerry Cooper (Andrews); 6. Terry C. Jackson (Huntsville). Distance: 169' 3lf2". Conference AAAA 1. Steve Carter (Permian, Odessa); 2. T. Mike Perry (Lee, Midland); 3. Mike Fox (Arlington Heights, Fort Worth); 4, Scot.t. Haber (Bellaire, Houston) ; 5. Ed Jarrett (Richfield, Waco); 6. Charles Hendricks (Robert E. Lee, Baytown). Distance: 165' 2". High Jump Con/ erence B 1. Joe Cash (Vega) ; 2. Jimmy Crawford (Beckville); ·3. Don Steele (Southlake, Car­roll); 4. Wendell Williams (Three-Way, Maple); 5. Ronnie Stapleton (Leakey); 6. Garland Hardman (Richland Springs). Height: 6' l". Conference A 1. Bernard Pesak (Tidehaven, El Maton); 2. Kenneth Hollingshead (Goldthwaite) ; 3. Johnny Nelson (Willis); (tied for second place); 4. Richard McReavy (Reagan County, Big Lake); 5. Mike Buchanan (Hallsville); 6. Bobby Voights (Baird). Height: 5' 11%". Conference AA 1. Riley Odoms (West Oso, Corpus Christi); 2. Ray Gonzales (East Central, San Antonio); 3. Terry Richardson (Quanah); 4. J. D. Daniels (Canton); 5. David Quiesenberry (Burleson); 6. Wayne Smith (McCamey); (tied for fifth place). Height: 6' 11,4.". Conference AAA 1. Herbert Woods (Lake View, San Angelo); 2. Doyle Lawhorn (Carthage); 3. Bill Thresher (Diamond Hill-Jarvis, Fort Worth); 4. William Leslie (El Campo); 5. Niven Glenn Herring (Belton) ; 6. Mario Palacios (Pharr-San Juan-Alamo, Pharr). Height: 6' 61h". Conference AAAA 1. Kenny Cauble (Lee, Midland); 2. Ben Wadlington (Highlands, San Antonio); 3. Steve Kennedy (McCallum, Austin); 4. John Jordan (Denison); 5. Ronald Pittman (Grand Prairie); (tied for fourth place); 6. John Marquis (Stephen F. Austin, Hous­ton). Height: 6' 31,4.". Broad Jump Conference B 1. Tommy Smith (Wheeler); 2. Tommy Carter (Melvin); 3. Joe Clifton Henderson (Brookesmith); 4. Ervin See (Snook); 5. Lonnie Brown (Crawford); 6. Mike Jacobs (New Diana, Diana); William Sokora (Pep) (tied for sixth place). Distance: 21' 9". Conference A 1. Jim Crocker (Whitesboro); 2. Larry Hodges (Woodsboro); 3. Roy Myers (Marble Falls); 4. Pat Mattingly (Pettus); 5. Joe Reed (Lorenzo); 6. Bobby Grant (Quitman). Distance: 22' 71,4.". Conference AA 1. Terry Richardson (Quanah); 2. Barney Halm (Canyon, New Braunfels); 3. Mel­vin Eddy (Gladewater); 4. Billy Don Fondren (Plano); 5. Riley Odoms (West Oso, Corpus Christi); 6. Mack McKinney (Yoe, Cameron). Distance: 22' 4". Conference AAA 1. Albert Mannier {New Braunfels); 2. Bob Brabbin {Brownwood); 3. Charles Hill {Conroe); 4. Carl Haye·s {Robstown); 5. William David Bentley {Brownfield); 6. Bill Potts {Nacogdoches). Distance: 22' %". Con/ erence AAAA 1. Lester Winningham {Adamson, Dallas); 2. Charles Cannon {Permian, Odessa); 3. Dee Wayne Gray {Permian, Odessa); 4. Charles Austin {Paris); 5. Al Coroy {South Houston); 6. James Riley {Alamo Heights, San Antonio). Distance : 22' 6". POINT STANDINGS Conference B Bartlett .... . ......................... 50 Friendswood ............................................ 28 Rule ........................................... ............... 22 Skidmore-Tynan .............. . ............ 20 Orchard ....................... ..........................20 Follett .................................................... 20 Conference A Goldthwaite ............................................67 Coahoma ..... . ....................................... 36 Pettus ......................................................30 Springtown .............................................. 24 Barbers Hill {Mont Belvieu) ....... 20 Cal alien .................................................. 20 Memphis ................................................ 20 Conference AA Taylor ...................................................... 53 Palacios .................... : ............................. 50 La Grange ...........................................c..31 Lockney ............................... ................... 26 Quanah .................................................... 22 Taft ........ ................... ............................. 20 Con/ erence AAA Monahans ............................................... 56 San Marcos ......................................... ..48 Channelview ............................................ 30 Lake View {San Angelo) .................... 30 Palestine .................................................. 20 Ector (Odessa) ...................................... 20 Greenville ...............................................20 Conference AAAA Highlands {San Antonio) .................... 55 Permian (Odessa) ............................... 34 Memorial {Houston) .............. , ............ 30 .. ,Miller {Corpus Christi) ..... .... : ............. 26 Sam Houston {Houston) ..................... 26 Cooper {Abilene) ..................................26 CONFERENCE RECORDS Track and Field ·:1 . (Through 1966 State Track Meet) Conference B 440-Yard Relay: Barbers Hill {Mont Belvieu) {Hollis Naquin, Dan Hooks, Donnie Myers, Gordon Speer), 42.9, 1956. 880-Yard Run: George Tuel {Bryson), 1:56.6, 1963. William Rodriguez, {D'Hanis), 1 :56.6, 1964. 120-Yard High Hurdles: Donny Bell {High Island), 14.6, 1962. 100-Yard Dash: Ronald Fountain (Spring Hill, Longview), 9.7, 1962. 440-Yard Dash: Ronald Fountain (Spring Hill, Longview), 48.5, 1962. 180-Yard Low Hurdles: Don Taylor (Hermleigh), 19.6 sec., 1965. 220-Yard Dash (Curve) : Gilberto Chavarria (Tomillo), 22.2 sec., 1966. One-Mile Run: Johnny Eschle (Groom), 4 :23.9, 1958. One-Mile Relay: Larry Trosper, Jim Meier, Bill Hughes, Shayne Slovacek, (Booker) 3:23.9, 1964. Pole Vault: Kenneth Walker, (Whitehouse), 13' 7", 1964. Running High Jump: W. L. Thornton (Aspermont), 6' 5", 1955. 12·Pound Shot Put: Ronnie Urbantke (Riesel), 58' 11", 1965. Running Broad Jump: Charles Clifton (Rio Vista), 24' 6112", 1964. Discus Throw: Richard W. Stafford (Matador), 163' 2", 1958. Conference A 440-Yard Relay: James Cook, Gary Warlick, Jerry Roundtree, Charles Blackbur: (Goldthwaite), 42.7 sec., 1966. 880-Yard Run: Mike Mosley (Coahoma), 1:55.6, 1965. 120-Yard High Hurdles: Steve Lane (George West), 13.9 sec., 1965. 100-Yard Dash: Mike Holmes (Reagan County, Big Lake), 9.7 sec., 1962. 440-Yard Dash: Gerald Keller (Poth), 48.5, 1965. 180-Yard Low Hurdles: Jimmy Pautsky (Holliday), 19.1 sec., 1965. 220-Yard Dash: (Curve) Charles Blackbum (Goldthwaite), 22.2 sec., 1966. One-Mile Run: Albert J. Lee (Cross Plains), 4:25.0, 1966. One-Mile Relay: Goldthwaite (Ronnie Hill, James Cook, Owen Yarbrough, Jerry Roundtree), 3 :21.1, 1966. Pole Vault : Kenny Walker (Whitehouse), 13' 6", 1965. Running High Jump: Barry Noble (Jourdanton), 6' 5", 1963. 12-Pound Shot Put: Howard Van Loon (Rotan), 63' 6", 1964. Running Broad Jump: Raymond Lanehart, Iraan, 23' 7", 1963. Discus Throw: Howard Van Loon, Rotan, 175' 31/:(, 1964. Conference AA 440-Yard Relay: Taylor (David Rummell, Leroy Kolinek, Terry Czimsky, Marcus Heiermann), 42.1 sec., 1966. 880-Yard Run: Fred Cooper (Stinnett), 1:55.4, 1966. 120-Yard High Hurdles: Isaac Tennison (San Saba), 14.3 sec., 1953. Leonard Peters (Seymour), 14.3 sec., 1964. James Biggs (Taft), 14.3 sec., 1966. 100-Yard Dash: J. Frank Daughtery (Olton), 9.6 sec., 1953. 440-Yard Dash: Melvin Ray Sissney (Lockney), 48.4 sec., 1966. 180-Yard Low Hurdles: Leonard Peters (Seymour), 19.0 sec., 1964. 220-Yard Dash: (Curve) Marcus Heierman (Taylor), 22.0 sec., 1966. One-Mile Run: Richard Gallegos (Crystal City), 4:17.4, 1962. One-Mile Relay: Palacios (Roland.Flores, Donald Washington, Jerry Haynes, Ernest Haynes), 3:20.7, 1966. Pole Vault: Tommy Marshall (Yoakum), 14' Ph", 1963. Running High Jump: Clarence Miller (Crane), 6' 5%", 1954. 12-Pound Shot Put: Richard Inman (Belton), 62' 8lf2", 1960. Running Broad Jump: Mike McClellan (Stamford), 23' 111,i", 1957. Discus Throw: Ronnie Lightfoot (Copperas Cove), 173' 3lf2", 1965. Conference AAA 440-Yard Relay: Andrews (Darvis Cormier, R. E. Merritt, Ted Nelson, Larry Shoe­ maker), 41.5 sec., 1960. 880-Yard Run: Gene Westmoreland (Lamesa), 1:52.8,1962. 120-Yard High Hurdles: Rex Wilson (Snyder), 14.1sec.,1958. '100-Yard Dash: Monte Stratton (Breckenridge), 9.4 sec., 1965. 440-Yard Dash: Charles Callihan (San Marcos), 47.8 sec., 1965. 180-Yard Low Hurdles: Pat Mitchell (Gainesville), 18.7 sec., 1959. Herbert Woods (Lakeview, San Angelo), 18.7sec.,1966. 220-Yard Dash (Curve) : Merlin Eck (Greenville), 21.5 sec., 1966. One-Mile Run : Robert Gonzalez (Falfurrias), 4: 10.4, 1966. One-Mile Relay: Andrews (Ted Nelson, Larry Shoemaker, R. E. Merritt, John Land-rum), 3:15.2, 1960. Pole Vault: Gary Hobson (Kermit), 14' 6", 1964. Running High Jump : Rocky Woods (Lakeview, San Angelo), 6' 61h", 1966. 12-Pound Shot Put: Robert Young (Brownwood), 62' 3", 1960. Running Broad Jump: Fred Hansen (Cuero) , 23' 11%", 1959. Discus Throw: Clifford Larson (Forest Park, Beaumont), 190' 11", 1965 Conference AAAA 440-Yard Relay: Port Neches-Groves (Mike Simpson, Randy Byrd, Kenneth Bernard, Lyman Landry), 41.2 sec., 1965. 880-Yard Run: John Robertson (Dallas, Sunset), 1:53.2, 1966. 120-Yard High Hurdles: Fred Brocker (Austin, Austin), 13.7 sec., 1962. 100-Yard Dash: Don Parkhurst (Baytown), 9.4 sec., 1962. George Aldredge